Colloquial Chinese
Colloquial Chinese
Colloquial Chinese
^s^
i??»
^
.1»
-JOHN -FRYER*
CHINESE- LIBRARY-
A CJvAAl.MAK
i>K TIIK
MANDARIN J) 1 A J. KCT
i;»
OK TDK
TKKINCr.
SECOM) KDlTlOy.
SHANGHAI:
I'itfASnVTKr.FAN MISSION pRKSS.
1864.
'»
V
Main Lib.
JOHN FRYER
CHINESE LIBRARY
y^;^^ /^ ^
£2?
^
PREFACE.
The plan of the work embraces the northern and southern m-nvlarin. This
renders it impossible to be uniform in orthography, in m.my instances
where the sound differs, the northern and southern form of it have both been
4
given
writing for himself to adopt such modifica-
I
convenient to write the one h or s, or hs. and the other ch uniformly. Na-
tives of Tientsin and Hankow al.so pronounce in this way. Hut in writing
in the dialects of Chefoo and Nanking it will be requisite to keep h and s
separate in all cases, as also is and k.
IX
'Vho study ol tilt' CliiiiC'se latiguaiix- i:s inuc}i too extensive to be convenient-
ly comprised witliia the limits of a siriirlc work. The eliicid.-ition of one por-
tion only of Chinese irrunmnr has ()een undertaken in the present work, viz.
that ol llie mandarin dialect. The field thus embraced coincides with thai of
}*remare in tlie first part of his work, and with the second division of J?cnni-
sat's L^r:inmi;a\ I v<'ry much regret that I have not yi't s^-en .M. Hazin's work
on colloquial mandarin, published this year. 'I'he manner in which lhi^ author
prefers to discuss the spoken languaire, is however clearly seen in his earlier
brochure on the same subject, given to the public several years sine;.'. His
aim has b<'en to exhibit in all their copiousness and variety, the laws of com-
bination existing in cfroups of words, and lurther to trace the origin and pro-
gress of the mandarin language by means of its literature. This mode of
treatment is in harmony with the advancement of mod(>rn philology oroncrally.
and has resulted in several valuahh^ contributions to Chinese philology in par-
I iiular.
TIk; works of Morrison and Marsbman on the grammar of this language,
(ail to convey to the mind of the student, the richness of its idioms, and the
extended development of its p-jculiar principles. Tbev were not aware of
what their predecessors had already accomplished, aiid consequently spent
seviTal years in acquiring such a knowledge ol the subject, as may now be
gained in one, by means of Premare and the otiier helps since place^l in the
liands of the learner.
Pr«'Mnan' liimself with all his breadth of view, learning and ta-5.te, lived too
early to be influenced by modern iniprovements in the study ot languages.
'J'hat part of his treatise which is occupied with the mandarin dialect, ischiefjy
a dietionary of ]");u'ticles with copious examples of their use. Invaluable as
such a work is to the student, it is nt)t properly speaking a grammar, nor did
the author adopt I'or it that •itle.
The province of the grammarian I imderstand to be, to find out the laws of
tb«' language, and arrange them in the most natural and convenient manner.
l«v US. \\ t' not to a position evc-ii to coiijectun' with any prohnbihty,
art'
what tloviutions from early development, or what outward causes, liave occa-
>ioned in these lanqnages the early and entire loss ol' inflLClions, or their ori-
triiiul absence. IJut the whole organic structure of tluse languaiies, is less
perfect than that ol'laniruages having inflections. Vet'' he continues. '' philo-
logy ni.iy obtain valuable illnstrali()n.s from abnormal langnaees, just as phy-
siology i£ains information from misshapen orLranisms in the animal world.''
A better acquaintance with the (.'hiaese language will probably lead to the
abandonment of such words as ''abnormal '" and ''misshapen." in the descrip-
tion o( it. It will rather be spoken of, as possessinij a very copious and ad-
mirable development of the principles of monosyllabic language,— as indeed
the most perfect example of that class o( languages. Comparative philology
has hitherto directed its efforts too exclusively, to languages whose words
consist of a root and some addition to or modification of the root. The Chi-
nese must be regarded as the best type ol those languages, which do not admit
any modification of the rool. but allow the appendage of auxiliary words un-
der a strict law of limitation. The scientific investigation of it is adapted to
throw light on the strncmre of a language like the Fiiialish. The lOnglish
occupies a middle ]>osition between the classical LiUropean languages, and the
monosyllabic languages in Asia. To the former, it is related by its tense and
case endings etc. to the latter, by its formation ol compounds and its auxi-
;
liary verlis, etc. 'i'onic pronunciation also is found more fully developed in
(^hina than elsewhere, and a competent knowledge of it as there existing, will
lead to a better understanding of the local accent found in provincial dialects
of Cnglish and othfM- modern languages, and ol the syllabic accents of Greek
and .Sanscrit.
The line of distinction drawn in the present work, lietween natural tones
belongjnij to the dialect of a city, and tone-classes extending over several pro-
vinces or the entire empire, will be found essential to clearness of views on
the suliject of tonic pronunciation. The sketch here attempted of the origin
and growth of the mandarin pronunciation, of .secular <'hanges in the tone-
classes, and of the older form of the languag(\ as it was l''om about the eighth
century upwards, will shew that the earliest history of this language, is per-
haps not ''unattainable." The description of native mandarin diciionarie.s,
and the notice at the end of native researches in philology. ^'iH shew that the
Chiin"-o have airearlv doiv no little to aid foreign siMinlnr^ in tlios'> iuvestiorn-
tidif^.
In' the department of etyuioloey* the auxiliary substantives, and the remark-
able development of the verb, have received particular attintion.
I still feel some uncertainty as to the distinction to be preserved between
etymology and syntax but such deviations as ore here observable, from the
;
cnAPTEn 1,
ClIAl'TEll 2.
cnAPTER 3.
rUArTKR 4.
OHArTER 5.
ClIAl'TER G.
CHAPTER 7.
illAI'TKU 8.
On the Partnt Stem of the Mandarin and other modern Dialects. — Its aljihabetic ele-
ments. — Its partial rt-tention in variuus cxi!^ting Dialects. — Table of the principal
vowel changes. —
Traces of old .rounds in old native works and translations. — Secular
changes iu Tones. page ^4
(•HAPTEU 1.
CnAI'TEIl 2.
On Words. — Old words in modern u.<«e. — Changes in words. — Arrangement, page 100
CIIArTKR 3.
Divi.sion of words into Parts of Speech. — Indeterminateness of this division. }>ago 105
CHAPTER 4.
CUAriER f).
CHAPTER 7.
CHAPTER 8.
On the Verb. —
Formation of Compounds: Co-ordinates. — Auxiliary words- —
(Jroups —
of two. —
(Jruups ofthree and four. —
Atfirmative and Negative Groups Groups form- —
ed by Repetition and Antithesi.s. —
Different kinds of Verbs. — Modes of Verbs. — Par-
ticles of Time forming Tenses of Verbs, page 172
CHAPTER 0.
ciiAni:!; U'.
1 IIAI'TKK 1 1.
I IIAIIKII 12.
lll\l•TKli 1.
1 IIAITKI: '2.
rilAl'TKK 4.
• IIAI'TKK 5.
ntAl'TKK 0.
Ou *in>ple Propositions —
Extension of the Subjcet. Extension of the Predicate. —
Extoo.siuu of the Copula. —
Commands and (juestious. page 237
CIIAl'TKU 7.
Subordinate Sentences. —
Cireunistantial Clau.scs. The Object as a >'eparate Clause. —
Relative Clausets. —
Final Clause."*. Explanatory Clau.ses. — Comparing Clauses. —
Clau.-)cs expressing Similarity. —
C«)nditional (clauses Superadded Clau.'ies. i>. 2l(J —
(IIAITKR 8.
Co-ordinate Sentences. —
Simple Couneetiou Councctivc Particles. —
Sentences with —
Adversative Conjunctions. l)i.«jun<-tive —
Sentences. Illative and Transition Sen- —
toueca, —
Uuestious cousistiug of two Sentences. Comparison. —
page 255
Till
niAI'TKK .'.'.
CIlAriKI! |(».
CirAPTKU H.
llliytliiuus. ])ag<! 20")
APrHNJ)lX I.
APPENDIX II.
APPi'LXDIX III.
subdivided into an upper and lower scrie.-^, making eight in all. In mandarin this
subdivisiuu extends gemrallv. unlv tn the fii^t which is subdiv ided iutit the first and
the fifth.
A (JUAMiMAU
OK Till::
CHAPTLK \.
gutturals, /t, /:•, ii'^; dentals.^, t'. n; labials, />, ;/, tn; aspirates,/, h; sibilants,
tt
^ pu', 5/r;). ^^( 'p'u, the whole. ^^ \\\\\\ a grave.
,// ;fang, square. >7H Jiwan;^, desolate. y^ jsieu, elegant.
H/^ sheu, gather in. J{^ .jau, /A?<^'. ^12 'tscu, to wall:.
Y)\ jt'sieu, autumn, rJ cheu, «// round. •fill jC'lieu, r/7-a?/) out.
^^ ,yru, sad.
The aspirated consonants /:'•, t\ ;*•, arc pronounced by inserting the sound
h, after the letters A-, /, ;/. To obtain, for example, the aspirated form of t or
;>, enunciate the word Tahiti, without the vowel a, and fiap-hazard, without the
initial hu These consonants, rare as they are in western languafjes, occur
A
2 MANIiARIN CIKA.M.MMJ. I'AUl' I.
extensively in those of southern and eastern Asia, and after snmo practice arc
does liot lurnish one, • jtfdoes not occur as an initial in tlie English language.
vowels /, 1/, to s, and inniany dialects coalescing with that consonant.* This
letter will also be used at the end ol words, as by many previous writers, to
Sh, properly a single consonant like ng, is written Avitli two letters for want
of a better symbol.
Ts and cit, with their aspirated forms, are the only compound initials, or
these compound consonants, occurs after t, not after s, lor if t be omitted, the
initial in English, and lience, as in the case of those consonants, some effort
dialect, eight more will be necessary to express provincial sounds. They are
g, d, b, r, //j z, dz, dj. Tliey form a series of soft consonants, whose place is
The symbol // is used for a weak aspirate, whieh in some dialects accompa-
/)/ is allied to r//, as g to /,*, dz to Is, *fcc. It is the English / as '\n jewel.
Dj and dz though really compounds of r/, z and / are for convenience treated
o Vowel StCiN.s. — Tiie vowels required for expressinii^ the sounds of lh<'
I Din /
iSi//iihnls.
J'Jnu-lish Value. Examples of Use.
William Jones. P^or the mode of using the accents adopted in the j)rpscnt
work, sec the fifth page. No great inconvenience occurs from dispensing with
5. Some reasons lor not adopting Dr. Morrison's spi^lling for the vowels
First. It is better to spell a single vowel sound with one letter than with
two, both for brevity and (or accuracy. In writing 'ku, ancient, or ,c*he, a
carriage, koo and ,c'hay, there is a sacrifice of analogy with other lansna^cs,
in the use of vowel symbols in favor ot our own irregular orthography, and
more than thi.s, there is a loss of time in writini:, through the inrreasod length
of the words.
4 MANDARIN (.KAMAIAK IWIVV 1-
Second. Dr. Morrison's spellinir i.s jiot unilorni. For rxainple, >clien,
tnic ; .men, door ; ^keng, watch, whicli have the same vowel, are written by
him chin, mun, kan^. So also 'chi, paper, tsr, self, tsi', limit, 'si, die, 'si, to
wash are written in his system incorrectly with the same vowels: thus, die,
tsze tse, sze, se. By adopting another symbol for the vowel sound contained
in the first, second, and lourlh of these words, this irregularity is avoided.
Further tV, to meet, kliS a sentance, having the same vowel, arc spelt by Mor-
rison yu, keu. By using the diaeresis y and c may both be omitted with ad-
vanta'^e. INIorrison spells .hwei, to return, and .wei, to do, two words which
exactly rhyme in their sound, in two modes hwuy and wei. So also the
former of these words rhymes according to the same author with JSP^suiand
^(B, jChui, which he spells suy, cliuy. In fact, ei should follow kic, hw and
ID, while ui is preceded by t, s, ts, ch, j, n and /. The voice passes quickly
(i VowiiLs. —The symbols i, v., will be observed to have two sounds, ac-
cording as their position is at the end or in the middle of a word. The me-
dial lis always short in mandarin; the f^nal. except with the short intonation
is always long. Final ii, which will be used to indicate the short tone, does
employed. This agrees with the usage of Prcmare and other French writers-
troduce the accent for long quantities, in a large number of words. The same
symbol e, will be appropriated to express the final vowel in .she, a snake, and
similar words, and the grave accent will be used to distinguish the vowel in
"^ cheh, from that in -i|'- keh. the former being pronounced as v in '-there,'
The vowels a and o arc in mandaiin both long, whether as medial or final,
and are never shortened into the a and o of the English words hat, hot. Tiie
accent therefore is unnecessary for these vowels, except for provincial dialects.
heard iii the Eii^^lisli words "men," "mend," e. 2:- 'ti<'ii |!^|4 a jjui/il. Tliis c
s'C. foni\ tsr, a character, chr, Lnoipledv:c, \\ jdi, a <luij^ and siniihr words.
Tiio sound is easierto imitate than to writedown. It is produced hy enuncia-
ting the consonant without any of the common vowels foUowiuir, only taking
c:ire to m dvc the sound distinctly audilile hy a full expiration ot vocal hreath.
for this vowel is, that .sounds such as |^^, p| ? [|^. pronounced shih, ji'h, chih,
can thus be more accur.itoly represented than by the spelling shih, jih, chih.
No vowel / is heard, and these words differ only in tone from the sound of
7. In expressing the much larger number of vowel sounds found /;/ pro-
vincial dialects, many more symbols are needed, which arc o'^taincd l)y the
use of accents. The acute accent is used (or long vowels. The grave and
circumflex accents, with the diaeresis, denote other modifications of the vowel.
In the short tone, linal h is added, as also /r, t. />. when reqnired.
The sound here written i, may Ue ilhistrated further hy words sucli as ma-
son, Whit.mntide, where the sound exists after s and ts. To obtain it, the n
tory several years since, and retained in other works issued at the Canton press.
The unaccented a is here made the symbol of a in liat, a sound not pro-
1 I Tones. —Tlie only reiuaiiiinjr symlwls to be noticed arc those for tones.
Tlie Chinese use a small circle at one of the tour corners of the character to
mark the tone. Instead of this niarlc, a comma turned away trom the word
will be employed for the 1st, 2nd, '.ird and 1th tones, and a full stop for the
fifth tone. Thus i»j5 ii. (jW I'i,
|^ tM , fi} til. ,
7^ .t'i. The Chinese
n unos of the tone-classes, to which these five word.-^ respectively belonir. are
Jl I**
sl»''"i?
l'"'!,%
""j'*
_[l W ^li^"'ir sheng, ^ ^ff k'ii shcng, /^ ^:i^juh
sheng, and P hiap'ing. Hut for reasons stated in the chapter on tones
they will lor convenience be spoken of as 1st, 2nd, 5th, (fcc, in preference to
retaining the native nomenclature.
are more niunrrous, full stops and double connnas may be used. In sucli
cases, there is always an arrangement in two series. For the ujiper scries
commas may be employed, fnll stops for the lower, and double commas for
CHAPTF-R II.
ces is kwan hwa, or iiutndarin* dialed. Tiiis dialect is in its essential fea-
tures, the common language of the people in the provinces north of the Yang-
tsi-kiang, in Si-chwcn, Yim-nan, Kwei-cheu, and in parts of Hu-nan and
Kwang-.>i. At least, there is sufficient similarity in the sounds employed
through this wide extent of country, embracing two-thirds of China, to war-
rant their being called by a conmion name.
2. If is usual for the people, while includuig the dialects of so wide a ter-
ritorv under the designation Inran liwa. to distinguish them bv locals names:
e.g. S/iantmig' kwan hwa, the mandariti spoken in Shantiiug ; but it is still
• The word mandarin, ihoiich Portujjurse in origin, u too convrnicnl to Ik* rwi^nod .is an V.nz-
lUh cqniv.ilcnt for Kwav. The term " court dialect " is not oxlrnnivi' cnoii;;h to nprocnt the public
colloquial medium of conversation in all [(ulilic offirrx throu;;'' '''•" fintry, nnd niiioni! thi- |>eop|e •
darin, allowance beina made for some admixture ol hlaiig tan, or provincial-
isms.
provinces, and of the wes'ern provinces. Jn the first of the systems, tlie words
are distributed into five classes, with a tone proper to each. The fourth of
these is short. The filth class does not admit the initials /•, /, y;, ch. ts with-
out the aspirate. The final ii becomes ng^ after tlie vowels o, i. No conso-
nant final exists except ;/ and //g, which is also true of all mandarin dialects.
no rule but custom to determine into which they have wandered. The short
vowels common to this class, are all lengthened so as to admit of their being
pronounced with the long vowel tones. There is thesame rule as at Nanking
respecting aspirates in the fifth tone-class, but words transferred from the fourth
to that class, do not assume the aspirate, if it docs not belong to them original-
ly. The finals n, 7ig, are kept distinct from each other after all vowels, and
are the only consonants that can terminate a word. The initials /* and /,-,
regular distribution of the short-tone words, nmonjT the other tones, is found
to extend southwards to the Yano-tsi-kiiiiiii: in llu-j)tli, but on the sea coast,
not farther than the mouth of the \'('llo\v Kiver.
philology must embrace in its researches the whole territory, where in its es-
dialects are at least as wide apart, as that ot Si-c-hwen is from either of them.
In fact, the tliree are varieties of the same great dialect.
standard, there are four tone-classes; they are the first, second, third and filllr
Words orisdually in the fourth or short tone-class, are here found to be all in
the fifth, without however assuming the aspirate after /.-, /, c)'c., properly be-
exists for the initials h and /.-, as in northern mandarin. Before the vowels /, w,
The same system seems to be spread throughout. a great part of tlie western
j)rovinces. It exists so far as respects the tone system, in Kwei-chcu and
parts of Kwang-si.
system which has either five or four tones, has only n and ng for consonant
finals, and is wanlinor in the letters g^ d, 6, z, r, among its initials.
standard, and where it varies from the orthography of the national dictionaries,
as given in initials and finals, the latter has been sometimes followed.* In the
• It h.os hrcn silrntlv tnkrn for c'Tinlrd l«v • -- that the ort' '
v of (nodrrn Jiclionarirs
reprosoiils thr proniini'i.'ition of oilier tiiii's. > in f • mfv - tlictiunnries rcUin the
forj;otlcn sounds o( a tl)0U!ian(l vcam ajjo Mornv>n in pr> is vrrv useful syllatiir dir-iionary
from the native work Wu t'hc yun fu w ; n ..i ir.- that iLl i - ^ he followed were iiot Mandarin
at all, bnt «n obsolete pronunciation.
K
10 MANOARIN' GUAMiMAU. PART I.
The Peking dialect must be studied by tliosewho would speak the language
of the imperial court, and what is, when purified of its locahsms, the accre-
dited kwan hwa of the empire. It has not been selected as the only standard
of spelling in the ]iresent instance, because it is too far removed from the an-
alogies of the dialects in the southern half of the country. While many de-
tails respecting it will be found here, the form of tiie sounds hitherto adopted
stood and is better suited by its central situation to the scope of this work,
which aims to collect and compare the characteristics of many dialects. The
Peking sound of characters, where different from that of Nanking, will be usual-
ly inserted in a parenthesis.
CHAPTER III.
On Tones.
u as in in ; i as in rattle.
and variations in time and pitch, used with vowels and consonants to form
spoken words. By toiic-classcs arc meant those word-groups, into which the
words of a dialect are divided, in order to receive the inflexions or other tonic
four to ei<>-ht. The natural tones are upwards of twenty. From them each
the classes referred to. For example, in the Nanking dialect, the words are
thus j Ji -^- ni|i 'ji^ }j'\^ all written t'o, bclonjj to difTcront classes uiuuljcr-
2. Till" natural tones nrc the even or monotone, the rising and fjillin" in-
flexion, and the risini,' and tailing circnmncx. These five tones are donhled
in nninhcr by pronouncinir them ([uickly and slowly. IJy placing the ten in
tonations thus obtained, in a high or low key, they are still further increased-
to twenty. Four more are formed by applying the rising and falling inflexion
sound ot a bell. Writers on elocution mark the monotone as that which should
be used in describing wlnt is sublime and awful. The long monotone is much
more used than the short, as an intonation in Chinese dialects.
ii. The ris^iyiff hijlcxion^ or slide of tlie voice upwards, is that modification
ers to ask questions in the same tone they would erajjloy in Knglisli. This
should be avoided as giving a foreign complexion to the pronunciation. In-
terrogation is expressed exclusively by the words, and the syntax which com-
bines tliem. The most emphatic utterance of the interrogative or rising in-
as most probably it wil 11)0 found to do, the words to which he applies it should
be noted, and the intonation in question carefully attached to them, and also
iii. The falling- ivjlexion is the tone applied in linglish conversation and
reading to emphatic assertion, admiration, expostulation, and scorn. It is also
used in sentences containing a contrast, and then stands in antithesis with the
risint' inflexion: e.g. " Professing themselves to Ije wise, tliey l>ecame fools."
\2 MANJJAIUN" (.IIAAIMAK PART I.
this intonation belongs. It is perhaps the most easily recognized of all the in-
tonations. IJy exclusively employing it for words in its own class, a per-
fore a full stop, and the risinu: before a comma. The ri^iljig and fall ins- clr-
"And Elijah mocked the priests of Baal, and said, cry aloud, for he is a god.
From the description given by this author, it is clear that the inflexions he re-
fers to, are the same with those just mentioned as the rising and falling cir-
the two preceding. When slow they give a whining effect to a dialect. If
two intonations are appropriated to one tone-class, the slower of the two is
very frequently a circumflex. \Vhen a majority of the tones are quick, and
pronounced with decision, a dialect is said to be //,«?•(/, ying'. In the opposite
4. When tones differ in key, the interval is not usually greater than a se-
cond, or two full musical notes, for common conversation. In emphatic and
5. The nine words required in describing tones, viz. even, rising, falling,
may as such be represented for brevity by their initial letters. Thus for ex-
kind for the classes, without distinguishing them from the intonnlions with
wliich they are enunciated, have introduced a confusion into the subject, which
can only be removed by the adoption of a more correct system. Using the
initial letters according to the method here proposed, as symbols of the 21 na-
On "in: 'J'onk-Classks.
7. The tone-classes or groat groups into whicli the words of the Ian2:uapfe
are divided for purposes of intonation are national, while the natnral tones are
local,
8. In Chinkse books, the tone-classes have the namrs p'ing, even, shang,
rising, k'ii. departing, and juh, entering, applied to them. When they are
more than four, they are distingnished by the words nppor and loicer: e. g.
shang p'ing, iqyper even tone : hia k-ii. lower departing tone. It is more con-
venient to number them, thus I, shang p'ing; II, shanij shang; III, shang k'ii
(c'hti); IV, shang juh; V, hia p'ing; VI, hia shang; VII, hia k'ii ; VllI, iiia
juh. In mandarin, class VI is part of II, VII of HI, and VIII of IV.
9. The native name for tone is 'feif sheng. sound. The names '"j**
p'ing,
J2 shang, -^ k'li, /\ juh were given when there were but four tones in
the language, about a.d. 500. They were so chosen that each name cxem-
plied its own class. The word shang has now left the second tone-class, and
passed mto the third. The division into an upper and lower series was a sub-
sequent moditication, occasioned by changes in the tone system of the langu-
age, and the words shang upper, and hia lower, were introduced to distinguish
the two series from each other. Words are distributed in the upper series
in the same manner throughout China, with very few exceptions. It is in the
ferent parts of China. In the mandarin provinces the first five of the eight
just mentioned are in use. In the system of the national dictionaries four on-
ly are recognized, indicatincr thnt such was (he number in a.d. 500 and for
several centuries after, that beins the period to which those words belong.
Many dialects in the central parts of China at present have only four. Can-
ton has all the eisjht. At Amoy and Fnh-cheu the sixth coalesces with the
second. In the Ilak-ka (t^ ^) dialect, and its parent the Kia-ying-clieu
dialect, the sixth and seventh classes coalesce respectively witli the second and
third. In the Tie-chin dialect, the third and seventh form between them three
tone-classes. In this case the additional class, called k-ii sheng, is composed
fMlAI'TKIl '.i. ON Tlir. TONr.-( l.ASSKH. 15
parts of llii-pi'h, ns at Ta-ye near Wii-e'hnncr, tho sovoiith class doos not, as
ill other regions whore mandarin is sj)oken, coalesce with the third : so that
althongh the dialect there agrees in general character with northern mandarin,
it dillers from it in havinir six tone-classes instead of five. At llwei-rlien,
where as happens in many dialects, the same words have a different pronun-
ciation wlien read to tliat which they have in conversation, the irrecrnlarities
in the tone-clnsses are very great. Tin- natural intonations applied there to
the classes in rending, differ from those l)elongin£j to the same classes in col-
loqnial nsa^e. The eighth is prononnced as the fourth in reading, hut in col-
loquial it pa.sses principally into the first, and partially into tho second. Words
of the seventh class, if they terminate in a vowel, pass into the eighth, if in a
n different class for reading, to that which they adopt for colloquial use. The
sixth class agrees as elsewhere with the second. This anomalous tonic deve-
lopment is accompanied, as is shewn on, further by changes equally irregular
in the vowels and consonants that form the remainder of the words.
11. In Cheh-kiang and southern Kiang-nan the eight tone-classes of the
more southern dialects are separated by alphabetic differences into two series.
''Classes I to IV, take as their initials k, t, p, ts, ch, either pure or aspirated,
with s, f, h, sh, w, y, and the vowels. All the other letters g, d, b, ilz, dj, z,
V, //, J. /, m. 71, 7ig, r, and the vowels and semivowels form initials to
inflexion but differ in pitch, the former series lieing heard a musical second
higher than the other. Such is the law of the dialect at Hang-ch(Mi. The
sixth class however is there not distinguished from the second in pitch or in-
flexion, but only in the initial consonants. In other dialects where this sys-
tem prevails, the seventh and eighth classes differ in pitch only tVom the third
and Ibuith. while the fifth and sixth vary in inflexion also: e. g. Shanghai and
Sucheu.
12. Tones .sometimes aff«3ct the ortiiography of words. Thus in the Fuli-
ung, iu, iii,:r, ti, iie, I'l, eiiij, ui, iiiifT, 6ng, i, eiig, ui, o, oil,
ong, eu, eng, uii, oe, 6, aing, 6i, eiing, aung, e, aeng, aui, ae. aiu.
okj euh, ek, eiih, oeh, oh, aik, oih, eiik. auk, cli, aek. auih, ae, ainh.
13. Tliere are sometimes two intonations to one tone-class, one of which
is used it may be when the word stands alone, and the other when it occupies
certain positions in a group of words. Thus in Peking, words of the third
tone-class receive usually the intonation lower-slow-falling-circumflcx when
alone, but when quickly spoken and when they stand last in a collocation ot
14. The average distance at which the intonations applied to the tone-
classes are found to change, may be stated at 100 English miles. In the east-
ern parts of China, places at this distance, are found to liave dialects whose
cur frequently. Each dialect selects its own vowels, long and short, to be used
in the juh-sheng, as for the other tones. Hence the diflerence between the short
tone and the others is not one of the quantity of vowels in most instances.
juh-sheng, as in the words -g^ fah, ^ koh. f|L] shCdi, ^ chili (rhyming
witli ,chi ^P), ti. siih, ^ ch'iih.
16. In the tonic dictionaries of the general language, the juh sheug is dis-
tinguished frorii the other tones by the mute finals /,-, t, p. They also serve
for its peculiar mark in Canton. For the dialects of Tie-chiu and southern
Fuh-kien, some words in this tone are pronounced without the final conso-
nant. Foreigners usually write h to fill the vacancy. In such cases, the only
distinguishing mark of the tone, is the abruptness of the intonation applied in
pronouncing the word. Father north, where the final k only is preserved as
at Fuh-chcu and Shanghai, and where i, p, only liold their place as in Kiang-
CIIAI'TIR "J. OX TUK SHOUT TON'K. 17
si, it is Still more necessary to rofT.ird the shortness oftlic intonation as the
tirely disappear, and many vowels are \<m'g^ the (luiekness of the enunciation
near it. this is combined with a chanjrc or shortenina; of the vowel. Thus u
and i in the long tones, become 6 and i in the short. For examj)lt' j'}\^ jku,
"^ 'ki'i, /jZ l<u. j^Y lv«jli, nnd y'^ ki, if(i l<i, fi'G ki, f^ kih.
17. All these characteristics of the jiih-sheng, viz. the Jinal consonants, the
(juickness o( the intonation, and tlu; short quantity of the vowels, are wantinq^
i') the north nnd west of ( hina : so that this tone-class as a whole has lost its
IS. The inflexions of tlie voice at present api)lied to tlic five tone-classes
in the principal cities where mandarin is spoken, will now be described as far
The following account di/fers but little from this. It has been drawn up
from the pronunciation of a native of Ta-hing, one of the two districts included
Ill Lower quick falling tone, or lower slow falling circumflex tone.
I\ . Distributed among the other four.
20. The following table, where the Roman numerals represent the lone-
classes, nnd letters the natural tones, will illustrate the thrne systems, at present
n. q. ^ 1. s. r. J; u. q. f.
5 11. 1.(1. r. 1. (]. r. f.
21. Words in the fonrtlt tone-class, are short only in central mandarin-
and in the western tiiey coalesce in all cases with the fifth class, or
classes
lower p'ing shcng. This last class whicli is new, is thus seen to be partly
22 The particulars in the table here given, are taken from the lips of natives
tones.
1. \ word in shan,"' sheng' before another word in shnng shcitg takes the
'si 'lien, wash the face is pronounced with the intonations u. q. r. and 1. q. r
3. There is a singular effect of accent, M'hon placed on the first of the two
words, in altering the intonation of the second. The unaccented word, Avhat-
ever bo its tone class, takes for its intonation a lightly pronounced low even mo_
notone. atid it is said by the Pekinese to have chaneod into shangp'wg: Ex-
"^ f^
-^- \f]
.shen mo,
shr ts'in?, thinsr ^]l^X\\ 'hw^o c^hV, aosistant in trade
what >
5i "f ' '
'^^'^ *°" ^ S5 ^^^^' '•'• ^'^''^- 'T'lie last word in each of these
CHAPTER 3. ON INTONATIONS.
19
conii)(»iind words takos the intonation 1. q. e. and is said to l>c in the fir.st tone
•1. \\ h.Mi /Q ri follows a word as a snliix, it is ollcn heard as a final ;•
forming a pa-t of the preceding word. Its lone is then lost in that ofth,; word
to which it is joined. I-^xamjm.k.s ~j' t'snn ri or t-.snr', a„ inr/t j^ ~^' ^^^i
24. Conversation with individnals from man y j)arts of the western provinces
led me to the belief that the fonr tone-classes (the J Vtli cunntini,^ as part of the
A'lh), receive there nearly the same intonations over an e.xtent of conntry em-
bracing two or three provinces. The symbols given above for C'licn^-tu the
capital of Si-c'hwen, answered for many otiier dialects in that
part of China
25. The intonations in nse at Tsi-nan-fu, the provincial
capital of Slian-
tung, n.s taken from the lips of a native of that city, are the following
:— I. u.
0. n, n. ti. r. Ill, 1. s. r. IV, distribnled among the olliers. V, u. (i. f or
1. s. r. c.
28. It u learner does not wisli to confine himself to any one dialect or any
one teacher of the language, he may safely neo-lect the tones. His intclliiribj-
his position Avith natives to whom ho sipeaks casually will be just tli.it of an
of Pckin"'. The intonations differ and the meaning is learned from the ar-
rant^ement of the sentence, and the general resemblance of the sounds in re-
When the same persons arc conversed with day by day, the imitation of
The necessity of repeating the idea in various ways, with the help of signs
29. Some examples are here placed, of words rhyming together but in cbf-
30 Whoro tlio fifth class lias no word in these exam})lt's, it is becaufio the
initials k, t, r, en, unless they take an aspirate, do not oQcnr in that class.
When the first class has no word, it is because L, m, n, r, do not occur as in-
itials in that class. The e>rigin of these two laws will be subsequently discussed.
Exanijjlcs of words rhyniinjjj together, and having the same intonation are
here given:
,pien.]g;p fj,,!
p' ^^ t^s ^ik' (t^s)lHltt %l^M ts 7^ «
f^k (ts)
31 First Tone.
^ chui, to pnrsKc ;
^ k'wei, /oss ^ hwei, at^hcs ;
Second Tone.
'•"'"•
M: si, /o (/tV; l^'i ". .^
'1
tsau, C'^yVy;
fJH tan,
^*
//« liver; S
-1-11
siang, /o /Aj«^:
I
"r
light;
air ay ; ntg:
proniise;
Third Tonk.
Fourth Tonk.
+4-
(.pan), thin; ^IJ koh, to cut J.'^ t'ah, a pagoda
J^^: poll
;
5^ siiiehjS/ioir ; ^
vpij
kioh. a horn : nf^ t'oh, /o entrust to;
^ loh,;o?/;
^j^*
choli, turbid;
hwohj //y//;^;
J
^>-;J
jx
lit,
h\vi\h,
p^^^i^ fo
slippery;
pluck up ;
-f •-»
Fifth 'ro.M;.
"''"-
II'i' II""
lltl^ iniLii. t) hi' (h)ini : \\]^ man, lo hide: JJ '^^ ficn, tu sjtrtutl ,-
i'iC t'fii, /o^o towards, )T|[ lieu, tojlow: i^^ c'liau, « //t.vA
J-J: in;>i. /"y/// HI the ground 'jl|l l an, to vlay the lu'.i]>
stretch out the hatid;^^ jJH ,slicn "t'i, the body: j}^ ;y|s: ,k\va *k\vo, melons
andfruits: 7L 1^ .kwang 'kino^, appearance of things] '-y,^ Wj .tsiohu*
''to assist: 7\^ ^J;!, .t-ieii k'i' (Chi'), the weather; 7'' -^ yh'i tan*7o knoic
lUj m M'-o »o''iS " hindrance: \{\ [§ ,i kieii', as before: \\^i J\, ,sl)C
k'ien* (c'hien'), to sell on long credit;?^ jjj^ .t-sin vsih, relations by rnarriagc
and birth: ^\ \] .shenj? jih, birth-day; H '^ T\^ jSIkhi sJiih, to collert and ar-
range: 3C \V\ •iiU'.iiiHr'h (,sie), to rest; 1^< }]\x i Inli, rhthes :>fi^ lJV ,sin
pill, a new pencil: | i/Jl ,ya t'ou, « serving girl: k\J\ X, ,s'i , wen, refncd in
manner; ^ .]'
ffj ,shu ,fang, room for study :A^ )|l'p ,siii .slion, the mind. \li\^
fUjjkcn.t'sim-/. /o/o/Zo/c: ;]\ IH .kin .ii, a ^o/r//t.v//; ^jjt: |',','j \}'j yon .wo
,1'ani^, bird's-nest soup; ^»J/ ih^ ^>K
-p
•' '^'^^'O" -''i') ''^ car/// f'jr/-;
>l\f\j ^ ^fv
,t\van c-Iia.lai, to bring tea: "{jJ^ Jilt jnu yin 'tsi, to wrap up silver: ^X
P^^^ .shni^k''\{c'\i'i)M, to collect: y\l ';j l
'
Asu Aan-^'lsi, to Id a house;
an own youufjcr brother \\y I ^>\\\ \ As'uv^nV .'yn, a quick-witted man ; ^{^
Q -^"^ fipf .]n\i\.you'k'\>\n'u.pl'iuMihfeninh'ii.'<iin(nfjufftrn)-ds: y[_^ }(;
24 MANDARIN (lUAMMAU. *
PART I.
full k'ti (c'liii), to turn round and round ] ^ Ij/j^. IH 3i j^ung .t'siau
caUinr/jyiti/idlf/onhcaveyiandearthfor aid :
Ha J ti /// ~f^ ,sheu sliih
M hrJ T^C j^ii^ 'k'eu 'liaiii!: y^iis' ^intentions opposite to ivords; false in
his speeches; -^ ^VC J^T^ ^ ,kin -vi" 7^^^^^ 'v^^h (/old, silver, pearls and
other p>^'€cio%is th in gs.
'siau ,si, ivaiti7ig hoy; 1 Y^'ta' saw, to siveep; jl If^ 'ta t'ing, to
jhiang, to light incense; ^ "T^ 'lau 'tsi, father; ^x ]x\^ 'pi 't'si, this and
that; ^* 'J^ 'kwan 'pan, to look to and protect ; ^>\\ n^/ 'chi 'ma, a pa-
per horse; \\X ]\H 'yiu 'tsieii, to drink ivine; IJ^ /y 'i-M\'^\im timid -y^^
^ 'tso 'shell, the left hand ; JL J^ 't'u c^hun, produce of the land;
V P ^^ 'hng siaii', sardonic smile; 3PX p5^ 'hwei pang', to blame and
calumniate ; /'[;yi p^f 'kan sie', gratefully thank; _^ ^^ 'sliang tsan',
cold tea ; •^ )^ 't.sau .c'lien, m the mourning ; l;}\ [i^ 'tien .t'eu, to nod
the head; :\'\\ /\. 'ch'i .jen, a paper man; ^-p U^- 'wu .sliT, noon (11 A.
M. to 1 VM.):/lS 'iM liiii .niang, mother; /y '\^% 'J^ 'siau ,p'u 'tsi, «
smai^/ shop; ^. S f ^ 'tsen 'mo yang', ]/(^ }Ji^' :JC 'si 'lien 'shui, water
for wasliing the fact ;)yj 'jf^ /"[liy^ "iiang ,cliang 'clii, two sheets of paper; %
/V =^ 'lau .jen ,kia. an old man ; JJ 7(>\^
-j-' 'in kieh 'tsY. to fir a knot
-f J ]j] 1'^ ta sheu shih, ^u^vJti unaments in order; 3( t;^ yQ '^ii •^''^^
rilAI'TKU 3 ON Tin: TONE-CLASSKS. 25
.ri, a girl \ Al iLi>» f' S' tso , si veil' 'siiiii;.';, ^o ///////.• ojvr (7 matter; ^\}l
^ Itfii
j^4 'i'"'i'i-^''"o 'l>'«i'i ,«',
ffrJ
wullcenst
"7/ ~T-"
and
i^
''^
iacsf;J\')i "(•
f> -l^t ^'ts'ii, pci
.c'ha .lai, bn'ixj <i rup of tai ; -^ /J ^\: pl\ 'shwa tau luiij;-, ,t'sianf^, to
|] I.! / '/
,1. ' ^ -J.
;t)/rty ?t'iV/i su'on/.s and speor-s :l^[ ||?/[l
X(J- .-^>. 'n,ai 'wan 'liau .c'lia, bu// a
vHj) <)/ (/()(><f fed ; /P J
j^J il I
'siau ,ya .t'cii .iirmi, ijouu<j scrvintj f/irls;
-^ 'Tr'l ^ '^ 'sii' k*'! .jell I<-ai!\, /(>/('>•//('/(</• y)^r.so7?«fo see; -^ jl} vj'
'hi ,c'huhi\vai%/o«(^ o/f/o/;<;/ oM^; ^ -^ JMv :^ 'fan puli tuiig' ,slien,
T^P i>aii' ,clri, to iii/hnit of: ^^, g- nien' ,sliu, to rcadjjt ^ffjk'wiu' 'tsui,
(/ quiek fon(/ue;^jf .f||- pair 'li, arranfje for; manage; j^ ^' cliii- 'slioii,
think earefidly of; til 'J -It k'iucir "clri, urge to stop; v'/L .LLk'wjiiig' 't'sie.
' and sti/l more; _£^ v^j shang' 'ma, ^> mount a //o>-sc;j=i" p/]*kan' su', fo /;^-
form; ^ ,^1,^ k'air hi' (si), /o^sce «2'A'//;]'-l lllj '' P^'i' ^^^ prej^ai'c he-
'^J
-4- tiii' tso', ^) sjY opposite; ]^ I'^s: wang hwai', /b^-^cf ; JJIH .^i^jiyiien' i'
advertise jndtliely; ^^ ^;X •"iig' shall, /"o /.•///; Jlj- ^l l"'"' ^^>ih, honest
liberal; ^f^ /] V)' \\]\, strengh: /3<C I I
'"' j'"^'- (f<>/'"ss the days) make
shift to live; \-^] \ \
\)V men, to shut the door; "3 Ir ij
ying' .c'hcu, to
have intercourse with the world; returning civility for civilittf: y fllhia'
.k'i, j)lay at chess; y* ,•
|^>J |
kair .t'si, to say farwelf ;
~]i- '|
pj shi' .t'sinnr^
matter;thing ; -j\\i x)y( Is'iu' x'heu'^ enter a city; JMH ('L' J-hiiir .f-surig. to
comply with and obey; yC 'i^ m* ^^^ ''^^" -y^^- honound sir; j^ ^< ]y^
hwan' jifuh, ^> (7m7/;/e owc'« (/re**; -MJ, \t j chc' hwei' 'tsi, /or thin
time; ^^ i^U. ^^fC sung' kwo* .lai. /o ^/Av over a„d present; ±\j jfj" h"
tau' kiai (chic) shang', go into the street; \;ii ^< :^c tso* ,i .shajig, to
make clothes; ,Al -II yv ta' ,kung ,fu, « v^vr^f undrrf eking; ^'j-|
26 MAXDAIIIN <.IIAMMAH P\ l:r I.
^ tso' yih (.i) tso', to mt a little ; iJft IJC f^lmi- > ili \<-\ to puss a
night ; iM i^H pfjj lui ju 'u, fears fallhnj like rain
"77
; ^
/*=-*
jj;f
-3^
f^"
';!''
^ pan'
jSin^r piihkicu' (cliii-u), lialf ncir, not xcorn out; .^, '^(^ :^ 'j^:if^
^j.-n k-i'
(t'si) t'un jslieng, to repress anger and keep si/ent; 3v^ " '
y> ))ji|l yang'
yih (,i) yang' .shon. to recover one's spirits a little; ^} J Wj '
IJjJi tiiiig'
'shew tunf:,'-\d()]\ (chian), to motr hands and feet; fh ^'i- T^ til tsai" 'ii
pub if^ixv , at home or not \ \\i\ y^ |]i) J.U. wen' .c'liang win' tv,im.tnusk
PEH "^' iwh ,^hxi, to read aloud ; to studu; p ^C Imh ,kia, the whole ^'a-
wi7?/; (/^ tj\ fall ,tai, /o he mad; ^IJ p^' k'eh ,sliu, fo engrave a book;
ches; length ;2Jj^ '^' ytih ,tsan. a jade-stone hair pin ; J^ ~y toh 'shcu,
to p>ull out of his lands; ^(th '/q pih 'si, to kill hij oppression :
J Prrl ^'^'^h
'
'chn, to act as master ;^^ J
teh "slicu, to be successful; I I ~J' jih 'tsi,
just give your 7nind.to}^J!j Hfj dnili fir, to give directions*{\^ Tt|/ sih fu',
daughter-in-lawj\\ j .j- fuli.'jlj'r, j'o wait upon: n>L on sliwoli Inya'. i'l)
^r///.- :
f^|- 2A^ tall yiug*, to answer; Jjj^J (,lii!| nah men-, to became sad; ^4"
\]^ tseli poi% to blame: ^^ /£ tscli (.cliai) ting', to f.v ones choice upon \
/lii y;2 yiieli fah, so much the more; ^^ ^"^ choli(chau) kill, f/nximcsand
hurried; H^ §J§ e'hih yoh (.c-hi yau'), to take medicine; fj\ .^ liieli
(,sie) sih, to rest :^i ^\] tsih k'ch (k'o'), immediatehj W\'. \] tsoh jih,
*ili» a'iJ %f I'^^'ili ,t'ing tch, he suddenly heard; g^ -|?y \ tuh ,Khu
^en, one of the literati; | ^^ ^("- sliih slnr .uien, more than ten years;
^L pk y^ <^'liih .c'hang ,chai. to keep long fasts; Q 9^^ fl^^ P^li (-pai)
,tan koh. to lingerfor no use : \\\ '^'\^
^ ^^ c'huh .lai tsin' k'li' (o'hii).
cHAj'iKi: ;;. ox TUfc; TONK-l'LASSKS. •27
5y ."&*
.l»''^"o jpi'^'iN'"'
<'/'•>•/</' :
I^Ji^ V-]"-
iiciin; ,kaii, j»oicer; [H] ^^^ .liwei
.kia, to return home; ^p /j,*; .iiicn ,kong, o«c'« a</r : lijij ,[_^^ .sui ,siii,f/o as
l/ou p/eaae-.lU -4^ .']ii M'ln.ftt present; v.'Ct Tl<j •^"•''' ''i'i'>> distressed in
mind; Jjfj "J^ .yau 'sheii, t<> irave the hand: J'i: |^^ .t'i 'siu^', fn auudcen
to a saisc of dutu ^^' dan'jer : i^, '^y^ .liaiig ,.sluii, rold icater; %II ij|^ .ju
't'si, thns; ^SC 11! ^^'''11 'li, bennty *f style; ^f- fL .uini ki', //«<>•*; -^
-J- .!:unLC tsi". name; 'K\j[ |,(3 .fan luoii', (jrievid; il< 'JJC yiii k'u', frm-
/^^ •'ft JZ? ^77
sM/w/ ; xf J/Q .yung inair, eountenanee ;
.^C ^j'j^ .c'heng jeii', fo acknow-
hd'je ;
|;'^ IJii l'"? X^'"'' efertuaJ ; pf TM k'i (t-''^') k^^"'. .s^/-««r/c ;|^:(|
?W/c /«/A* ;
-f/|: ^S .t'i pill, /'//r uj) a peneil ;
^/Iv^.wcnynli, a written secn-
>•''///; Ifli n'i.nanshwi.li, h(rrdto f<fii/;)jj ^l.i'ivvj; n\i,a house; <^f\Z lien
.nianfr, immediate/f;f/v]
urn ]j-":j:
^ .Im .Vu,^
f,
foafish y[\i ,<
(I -r\/- , . , .
.uii .t'sai, a stave
-4 4- "=*="
;
y\[ y^< .fan .k'in, ;)A/// the harp : |L1| /jv .Invci .lai. to return ; f\>- ^|i
/^ i^ .t'siang kioh [.chiaii] ,l>i('M. at the earner of the wall ; |jj |{lJ, |j'
.yi'U ,t'a .incM, A7 /A«'//? 'A> <V ; 1H . ^i> l"J •^^'" 'i'^'' •l^<^ no other plan
[c'liii'], <o ^Mrn^/i<'/(raf/ rriray; ^-Jl -^Q j,'^ ^I'j" .>inii si mill hwdli, .vomc
seeking death and others life 5k ^I' Jl y"*^" l'" J^^ '^''*»j '< »« ^^''^
t'ung
]li\
v}\ tl'j :!!l ^\i -^^'i .t'sing .wu i', without a feeling of kindness; '\^ ^
* llu tu' is common in rhihli. but ,t'a is the proper sound.
28 MAXDAHIN l.RAM.MAU I'ART I.
pl /lii .t-'sunf; ,kin [cliiii] jili 'k'i, herjinniiKj from tin's (hnj ; >|cX ^^ ^^
on the lueatlivr •,%\ "©
1M i^ii '^i^' li'i" ,wcn, /o fr;/Z: « //^/t' n=f ^JC J'l -ii
Ox Accent.
32 If the nutivo pronunciation bo carefully observed, an accent will bo
noticed in groups of two, three and four words, such as those in tie? j)rece-
ding exercise. It falls in a group of two usually on the last syllable, in the
Peking dialect (when the group consists of an adjective and its substantive
or a verb and its object) for example, \pji ^f'/ tso' hwoh do icorlc. In a
few dialects, as at Sung-kiang near Shanghai, the accent falls on the first of
33 Particles and enclitic words refuse the accent ; e. g. /\. 7li 'X'^' IIJ
.jensh'i' 'hau tih, ^Ae man is (food; the word 'ha u is i)ronounced more empha-
ticallv than in /v %£ ^^ Jl^- .jenshi' 'hauhan', the man is a hero, because
0-;/ being a ]>article the accent is thrown back on the preceding word. In the
term ^j. ~4 'lau 'ts'i, father, tsi' is enclitic and the accent is on lau : yet
-^ lah clndi ,hiang [s], candles and incense ;^^ "J^ J'^ .yin 'tsi .t'sien,
silver and coppermoncy;^^ i(^ T^ hiau' fu' 'nui, to honour one' s father
and mother.
35 It occurs on the second of four and five icords, as in llJiifj^ Uflil'Lj
.
I
. -^^l • T- tlj'
'li i' .lien 'c'hi, 7:>o//^e'??c.S6-, tiprightness, modestij ; pt ^ll^^- pj :i;'',- kn .king
f re and earth ; ] /L f f fi/l jtS >tii» ^'I'l"' -yt'" f^lii' jt'ing ,s'i, features,
3") The princlpnl accent fulls rogularly on the hist word in all such ex-
uniphs I'XL-opt wIr'U it is II partick'.
3{) In Rontoncos of sovcn words, such ns arc met with in proverbs and
ballads, there is a ctBAMra commonly after the fourth word, dividing the sen-
tence into two grouj)s of four and three words each. These take the accent
as if tiiey formed indcpend(mt groups e. g. in T7, tjl \h *
kY
;
'-jf,l "^f l'^
,wu kuh ,fung ,t('n<; .nien sui- 1i:ui, the five kinds of grain are abundant, it
37 The word accent is here used in the sense in which it is applied to En-
glish words, as when the verb convict is said to differ from the substantive
them, are subject to secular changes, explains many facts which otherwise it
would be difficult to find a reason for. For example, the student is not to
be suri)rised when he notices that the intonations used by any native do not
correspond with thefiames he assigns them. Probably no dialect retains the
intonations just as they were when they W(Te first examined and their nomen-
clatiu*e decided on. Further as already shewn, the '^territorial extent of the
same intonations is very limited. If a word said to be ''in the even tone"
does not appear even to the ear in one dialect, it may be so in another.
to join with ; are in the first tone-class or shang p'ing in all dialects. But
why do words such as %\i fu', a married woman ;
I|l chung', heavy
'fi chu', a pillar, appear in the Canton dictionary Fen-yini in the loivcr
shang sheng, while in mandarin they are in tin- /j'lt ehcng? The re^ison is
that these with many other words, including all whncp initials are mute or
sibilant in the lower tone-series, have l)een slowly making a transition from
the shang sheng or chv<s VI, to th<' k'ii shong or ehus.s VII. This transition
30 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. PART I.
is in the Canton, Shanghai, and some other dialects, not quite completed.
40 The circumstance that the class shauf/ p^uu/ does not admit l, m, n, j,
R except in a few recent words of colloquial origin, and that the hiaji'ing does
not admit k, t, r, ts, cii, (except in words from the short tone.) is accounted
for on the supposition, that these two classes were originally one. When this
class separated into two, one appropriated certain initials, and the other the
remainder. The aspirate and vowel initials still remain conunon to these
two tone-classes.
41 In classes III and 7]^ of Mandarin many words have one sound, which
differ in their tone in the southern provinces. Thus ^JyCkieu', to save; '^kiciv
o7r7; with JQ shan', <7/a?i ; ^ shan', virfuous, and 'i^/ t^iS to carry,
W tai', a generation, are placed in classes IIT, YII, in the south eastern
and west.
provinces, while they all belong to class III in the north So also
y^ sh'ih, to lose, "U shih, a stone have one sound in Nanking and Western
Mandarin, but are placed in classes IV and VIII respectively in the south
west. The second tone-class furnishes no examples, because the mute and
sibilant initials which should be found under class VI. have been long since
tion to the the national dictionaries, where S, 'liia, summer; ^ 'heu after ;
;^'tso, to sit and nearly two hundred other words are marked as belonging to
the second tone, though in mandarin they are pronounced witli the third tone,
42 These changes in tone must not be confounded with that power which
many words have of assuming two tones, according as they take the form of
a substantive or verb. Tlius "j^- c'hwen, to hand doivn, changes from class
I to III when it becomes a noun chwen', a history. Here the change in tone
same word, and examples of this kind are not uncommon. The distinction
in the case of some words having two senses, fomerly marked by the intona-
43 The following are examples of words having two tones now in uae»
CHAPTKJl .*! ON VAUIATIONS IN TONE. 31
^fl c'hunr,^ ,sin, afnsl ; Ij,! i^'tin dmupc' hcavicsf of all : W lYj
till, ;/()(>(/; fi /t£ W AlT \\] l)'uh sill' hair i' tili, not wUJiug, not
'k'ui'i {i:\nv) i^hw'oh, to explc ill. ^'J Nn liing .c-Invni set thr boat sailing;
t:J (T.tch liiiij;', viiiue; [^ /.U .fliaiior 'twan, long and sl„>rt; j'^ J^
Vhaiii; shan^'% a irKpen'nr. j^i /V iiir,,li
.i,.,!,^ f,„(l utan ; ^^J Jl^Vk'o wu',
Imte/uL iMl ^ .i-it'ii .i, c/iedp ;
|%" p{J .siii ])ion', ax yo?f ;>/ra.sr ; ,it //our
coni^enience. f^P H| ,cliiiiii,^ ,ki(Mi, //<f wiiW/c; 'P J cliun^^' 'liaii, //f // Of!
Jilt the mnrk'xu "K j^'I"^" 51»»»J-'j ^'> <^' ^^ soldier; -JH- ^f^ 'ticii taii«;-, a paicn-
shop. t(lj 'j»|', kic'ir [q\\\ .k'iaiig, [c'h], strong in body; ^'j'k'iaiij^pa*,
>jl[«
«ecf/; |[|( _C J cluing' sliang' 'liau, it is planted, ^(^j^ f'ljf i|f. the*
cluing shi', this viattej'. j'-ll J j^ 'shi Invan', ^:) employ a person; -^ 'f^
,kung shi (,or 'shi)rtw ambassador. Jp! ^ "in
shi' 'die,
t—
a messenger. Hj 3£|*
jdian k\va\ f>> divine by linear symbols; 'j>i» |_^ 'kMang dian', to size up-
on unjustly |5k ^'Ie ?^>^'" "^"S misfortunes ; ^'jl j=f .nan t.h, hard to
to attend upon. 1^1: ^ ,t'8ung .yung. at ease: pjli f^c .sui .t'sung, ^oo^/ey;
—
follow. )^ J^lt tir .hang, j/ewcroj/s; jjj, ' yf h;uig' yihliang'. 7;?'Y7.s?/rc
if- i'ti .ni fii, carM; H j; kwuh tir, « ///'.V'^ow. :^7^ |j|-| ,t'ou
,k-ai, to divide : ^ 77 .niing fen', s/mrf ; t/?//y. ///^j 'ji'jf .siurn Cjiwcn, ^o
<M/;i round; $'0' :l!iy. ^ dnvcn' kwo' .lai, ^o /wni 6ocA-. liJ )4' ,sianff
.c\\y>-cn, mutually hand down; },,) j',/ yih, p'ion cliwcu', « />joyrr/y)/<//.
^^J 113^ ho mull, harmonious; ^\i ijlrij ln)' tiau', to accord with. j|^ j,^
jt'ing kifu', ^o hear: ^ f'!:
tMng' .t'snng. to obey, jj"*,^
jj mo' sluh, a
grindstone; \])^ J^-. yen .mOy to grind. J^'^ ^ .mo mien' grind meal;
.mo tan grind a knife; "7^ »a{7; 3)J
)%i' Jj ,
"J- J .tinLr ,tsV. «7
_t ting'
Bhang', to naU ; US ']^ ,ying ,tang, omj//</; j)^ j^J ying' tui', to answer.
32 MANDARIN GRAMMAR, PART I.
^f W. II -^^'Jin Jnw^ .si, to watch over things; ^:f 'TF^ k'air' ping', ^o
atttiid sick pcraons. -t^ lil]j 'lau ,slii, teacher; /Q nrj? .yum .slnvai'
44 In some words this assumption of more tlian one tone has disappeared.
For exam])le the shang sheng intonation in tlie lower series (chiss VI) has
been lost, and with it the corres])onding exceptional sound of certain c'hu
sheng words. For example, c'hii sheng was formerly used in pronouncing
pairs of words, and shang sheng in the last three: JH •^ shang' ,king,
to go to the capit d; y /Ijpf hia'. c'hwen, ^o^ectue a hoot ; }y\ -^ 'so tsai',
a place; J^ \b\ , shang mien', the upper side; y [rJ 'hia mien', &e/o?r;
yj\ ^j^ pull 'tsai, he is not here; At present in ;il] such Avords, -^ )^
k'ii (c'h) sheng is used without exception.
45 The dialects of Amoy and C'hau-cheu, in the ijrovinces of Fuh-kien
and Canton, contain some anomalies on wliicli liglit is thrown hy the liypo-
thesis of progressive changes in tones. At Amoy the words -f^ ^lau, old;
s^ 'ri', the ear; ^t^ 'wang a net; are all read as book words in the second
tone-class, but in colloquial use they are in the seventh. Tliese words all
the second, these and a few otlicn- Avords, preferring the low pronunciation
they had originally, passed for a time into the seventh tone-class, where
they could conveniently retain it.
tone-class of the same name in other dialects. The transition words already
spoken of will lie found under y -^C hia k'ii, together with many words
belonging to tone VII. Some of the transition words, with a i)art of those be-
longing to tone VII and a very few from tone III, form a new class, viz. tone
IX, called "^ ^j^f k'iis sheng. The mode in which these tones are distri-
CHArTEU 3 ON VARIATIONS IN' TONK 33
47 The fulluwin^ list of words formerly in the second, but now in the
third tone-class has been i'onned j)artly iVom tlie ilictionary '^y; jjA^ ll', HJ^
of the fourteentli ceiituiy, (juoted in JiL J|'- liM VlTfJ-
'^'^"* ^'^^^ ^*'"^<' ^^^^^ *
dictionary several centuries older, called /j,lf \\l\ 'Ivwan;:; yiiir. The
words have been checked one by one for their modern sound by the modern
Mandarin dictionary T/, yy 7C ^-I' '^"^^ ^Y ^^e j)ronunciatiou of a native
of Peking,
Amont; them will be found none with vowel initials, or eomnvneinc^ with
the consonants sa, s, m, l, u, .j, the transition being limited to the mute and
sibilant initials. Thus f-}- wang, fo go, in class VI, coalesces with f j^
'wang, crooJccd, in class II. So also yp ^. I
•( pT^ 'yen, mrjf ma, jy*
lii ZTL 1'" JLii' >% ^^^- '^^'^ ^^^ "1 class II. The former difrerence in sound
between ^:[: "wang and fx ,wang, is considereel by native writers to be that
of the initial letters, and not a variation in tone. There can be little doubt
that it was a variation in ])itch, while the intonation was the same. It is
carried through all the four tones. Thus j^ /p ^Jj^ wang, yeu', yih., are
said to ditiVr in initial from ^X 'Jj iSl ,^vang, yen', yih^. That this differ-
ence occurs in the earlier dictionaries in which four tones only are recognized,
shews that the dinsion of words into an u])|ier and lower series existed when
they were compiled, and that it was a vju'iation in the height of the voice,
but not in inflection. We cannot, as the Chinese do, call a high w and a low
w ditferent lettei^s. They differ only in height. The modern pronunciation
in Kiang-nan agrees with this account of the sound formerly given to words
^(I'-l WJ tung, l[r Chung, $ fung, l|/ Vi ^|i il; ± h\i f^ ^\^
sM, ffi pei, f^ /( If m 1.. \a 'ii m v^ nii \\\\^ - ^p^^ ti,
Illj^ W 1'"- li' ^ 'M- fl '•.. M Vn, % hai. 1ft: f.ai. ^tf ,S
I'r'l lg :ii tai, \% poi, # ,s„i, |ifj m I& £! tui. [,'gkw,.i. :|t|,i„,
W %i ht
im! ^i.V tano:, ) Jl han-, -7^ }yC Jm taii-.TP Ijf pi'iiX,
li^vaug,
^ tr # ^ ^t # m ^M n hing, tsin,, ^#
1^ slu.u, E3
M ^ » VM JP ;^ ^ W
-1-4- -<^A-
kieu, heu, shen, P^ ^g kin, \^'}l "f ^
tan, yt^ jjHi <Jq fan.
Ox TiiK Initials.
in; Y, tassel.
ation. The initials are 30 in numbei-, viz. k, k', ng, t, t', n, p, p', m, f, h,
distiuctiy in the wunls )^ wuh, Al'iJ wong, i^j wo ^-^j wu, but the second
of tliose words is also sounded un[^ hy some natives of tliat city.
and 6' and //, an- in certain instances undistinj^uishable, hut this does not
aifect the number of initials, because it takes place only before the vowels i
and M, Thus a native of the metropolis cannot distinguish between the fol-
lowinjr words:
Dr. -Morrison long since pointed out this peculiarity of the northern dialects
but without mentioning the coalescing of the consonants. The first of these
northern consonants may be written ts k or di, the latter h or s. or as 3Ir.
121 \ 1|J.j eu, ngeu, gen f^lj |) /[J rh. ngeh, geh.
(though the first is more common) and in Nanking in the first and second.
At Si-ngan-fu nrj, and at K'ai:fung-fu 'g are chiefly in use. At C'heno'-tu-fu
ng is employed, as also at Tsi-nan-fu. and Tien fsin. In the syllabic spelling
tone series, but it does not occur in the upper. Such is also the rule at
Canton, Fuhcheu, Ningpo, and Sucheu. At Amoy g is used with the same
law as to tone. Ng thus appears to be the best orthography.
36 MANDARIN GRAMMAR PART I,
formed "VN^ith r in the languages of the Birman peninsula, which probably have
a common origin with the Chinese, and where kr, tr, hr, etc. are common
at the beginning of words.
tained before i and m, but becomes I before other vowels. In the mandarin
8 >S', is sometimes used for sh, and ts for ch. For example (^ sheng, ^-
shi [JLj shan, P^ slii are often heard seng, si, san, si'. Instances of the
interchange of fs and c7/, are the itiost numerous. Momson has in conse-
quence frequently given both sounds. In many words, the initial sh is in the
the Nanking and (more particularly the) Peking dialects are the best guides,
10 The Chinese r is jpronounced not Avith the tip of the tongue, but with
the central part of that organ. It has no vibrating ring, so that the latter r
has been avoided by continental writers, who have profeiTcd U as its symbol,
11 J,f,ch and sA, do not take ?' after them.* Hence words usually
written by foreigners ching, shing, chin etc. should be spelt differently. The
same vowel is found in the words /V .Jen, )|ii|i .shen, i'K ,kcn, | j .nun,
pH. p.hpn. Through the operation of this law, Avords such as |-| jih, |{^
chih, ^ shilij originally in the short tone, when they become lengthened,
invariably take the forms ji, chi, shi. This is their pronunciation even in
Nanking where the short tone still exists. Hence also k and ts before i,
though pronounced in some dialects nearly like ch, do not become confounded
with words originally possessing that initial. Thus ^>^ king and fjg tsing
CHAPTER 4. XATIVK SYSTEMS OK INITIALS. 87
mistaktu for^ (by IMoiTison and otliers -WTitten chhuj, but really pro-
nounced) clun'j.
12 A tew wurds taking the initial y, as ying "hard," are in some dialects
M: h 5/ii y^"' ^'tc- ^l''^<^ assume the i)refix. In the latter all words in i
and y are heard with the initial j. In this respect, the Kwei-cheu pronun-
ciation resembles the Hak-ka dialact, spoken in many parts of the provinces
of 33 charact<'rs, viz.
* The ch which before i suid u, represents k aud is, a.s in Mr. Wade's orthography, is not hero
takca iQlo accouul.
38 MANDARIN GRAMMAH TART
Of these all which take i after the initial, 13 in number, are supcrfluo^^^
Sh, j, ch, f, cannot take i. Si and hi, with ki and tsi, should be identified,
according to the practice of the author in other parts of his work. In the
tables constructed with the aid of this series of 33 initials, he however regards
them as distinct, no doubt wishing to avoid the confusion that would arise
from spelling many words in k and h, with ts and s. The same motive has
led me in this work to retain the old consonants k, h, in such words as p^
k'i, J^ hii, in conformity with the common usage of French and English
AU the vowel initials are placed together under the characters yau and
ngeu. The former includes under it i, ti, y, the latter e, a, u, w, with ng.
trict Ta-hing in the city of Peking, was published in 1810, in four volumes.
The order of the initials in his work is that of lines of poetry. For conve-
nience of examination they are here arranged in a natural order.
from their natural affinity, they should do. F and h, are nearly allied to p
This work was published in 1710 after the author's death. His native
CIIAPTF.R 4. NATIVE SYSTEMS FO INITIALS. 39
place is u little more than 200 miles S. W. of Peking. He docs not mention
the lengthening of the short tone, except in the cuseofa few words. In
Chinese works on sonnd, not being compilations, it is always important to
know where and when the authors lived, for not having alj'habetic syiabols
to wTite with, their testimony is of vahie chietly for their own dialect. The
above 20 characters form the ali)habet according to the order of which the
dictionary is arranged. Tt is in two volumes, and is very extensively used,
volumes, was prepared in 1810. The order of the initials and finals is some-
what different. The place of each word in the old tables of rh}Tnes is pointed
out, and more meanings are given to the characters ; but while it contains
many more words, it is less eonvcmient for reference than the smaller one.
It is called ll^ f f|j ^Ij ^5 ~}j 7C W- The editor olten shows bad
judgment in following old authorities, where they differ from modem usage.
He also counts eight tones instead of five, tlu'ough his desire to reconcile the
them in 15 classes as linguals, dentals, gutturals, etc. and places all words
in his dictionaiy in the order of these classes. He gives the Honan pronun-
ciation from the testimony of several previous wnterson the Mandarin langua-
ge, being himself a native of the district Chau-wen, in the city C'hang-shuh,
near Su-cheu. In this work, the native method of spelling called Fan-t'sieh
is used to ^vl•ite the sounds, as employed in the older dictionaries. Two pro-
nunciations are given. One contains the soft initials for words in the tone-
classes V to VIII, and represents the pronunciation in Su-cheu and cities near
it. The other places the aspirates k', t', p', c'h, t's, instead of g, d, b. dj,
dz, in tone V ; and the hard initials, k, t, p, ch, ts, in tones VI T. VIII. in jilace
mation. His initials are the hard mutes and sibilants, k, t, p, f, ch, s, ts, the
aspirates, k', t', p', c'h, t*s the soft initials, g, d, b, v, dj, dz, and the
nasals, liquids and semivowels, ng, n, m, w, y, 1, r. Of these the soft initials
are found to their full extent only in the fifth tone-class. In the sixth they
do not occur at all, and in the seventh and eighth only in a minority of cases.
That the soft consonats are embraced as here stated, in the initials of Cheu-
teh-t'sing, may be shewn in the following manner. The character pj is not
placed with ^^ tsi' among the hard initials, nor with y\^ t'si' among the
aspirates. Its initial must then be soft. To express that initial j^Y^iis used.
Thus we learn that ^| and ^^ should be Avritten dzi', .dzi. This ortho-
pa's Mongolian alphabet. In that alphabet there is a symbol for dz, as also
for g, d, b, z, and the characters which they are employed to write, such as,
^vith d,
-71 rb^ ^^
M-kiik U
Wx. >^
^
i
vffl.b,
\- 4f-'
i- fn ffi. g, Jt ^ tl. ^, %^
P-U VM 14 J dz, r^sc. XSr I'd ^^ ^"^^ ^ pronounced at the present day in
Kiang-nan.
It is remarkable that the power of the Mongolian characters as known from
the Tibetan alphabet, is in these monuments, for all the mutes and sibilants,
the reverse of the Chinese sound. Thus k and p represent the Chinese g and
b, and g and d are used to write the Chinese sounds k and t. Is thus accounted
for by the fact that letters in course of change are jironounced with an indis-
tinctness which deceives a foreign ear?
To sh, there is on these monuments no correlate consonant. Thus i. ,
dj, are all spelt with oh. The last three are now pronounced c'h.
ClIAPTKU O ON THK FINALS. 41
Oil the monumonts, ami in the book hero iimler diBcushiou the initial of
WKids, such as/v juli, y^ '' »» ^^^^ same, j and r not being considered
separate consonants.
monuments, for very many wuids written there witli the soft consonants are
found in the book with the corresponding hard letters. Thus -'p dz(j' in
di- as 117 tiS ItJ^ gwei' as ^ kwei', ^p dzui' as ;^" tsui\ jM^f boh as
^;5cd"^- l^iit on the other hand while Jt ^vang and \^ vaiig, ijt^ wu and
^ vu. etc differ in orthogra])]iy according to the spelling of the monuments
they would in the work in question be all spelt with w, wliicli is the more
recent pronunciation. By both these authorities ng in words such as
V^-^
(CHAPTER V.
On the Finals.
nants that end a word are the letters n and n<i. The vowel teinninat ions are
numerous, and the introduction of the vowels i, u, and more sparinHy e a
between the initial and tinal gives variety to the sounds. The Jinah fanned
ht/ single vowels are the following:
|r_I jchan
-« »-
c ^'Xshc- :iiJche' angi-^-mang unglll,kung ^p.rhung
t'h |ini"'l> pi'ijneli o ,^^^.mo ^h^'ha
eh ^jlfcheh "f'p''^'' oh /^.poh ^h..li
* 866 Mr, Wylics article on the Shanghai momiinpnt, in tlic Asintic TrannaiMions" HonukoiT"
—
1864 56. '
* •
42 MAXPARTX ORAMMAR. PART I.
Jst 'kwa
lang ^bl) ,hiang ua i^ liwa'
hi imp; ^ k^iiing
3. ]:J^ .lung,.
ung, eng, ing, iuiig.
?/j/«, and a small dictiunarv jJiiLlished in a. d. 1(j'J<>, called "j^T |]!,";^ ^^\\ yC|J,
Vin yiin' ,sii ,tlri, arc borrowi'd from tho earlier work o^ (lieu-toh f-sinij, ilie
first of the IMaiulariii dictionaries.*^ In that older work the finals are taken
'^-
^ iLi>' -f"!*''
:^'h
ineludinn^ ^^ .chi n'J" jS'i' -^ ,f^i,
uS? •^'*'»?
^
.ri, and a few from the short tone, as J^'J 't«T (tseh).
4. 'f.(\ ^Ijjjic ,tsi, .-wei, inclnding i, ci, wei, ui, as in the words
|5I ,si, T^P
,chi, ^p ,fei, ^n^ ,chni, ]\^ ,k'wei. and a large number from the short-tone
finals, eh, ih, oh, as ^^^ .shi, "J^ .si, pj kwei, ,^^j 'hei. In the Mongo-
lia!! ii!Scri{)tions already mentioned the characters Ba' |^ Jif are spelt hwe,
kwe, tei, if the vowels, "which are difficult to decipher may be bo read.
.'5. tit \y\ \\, .mu, incliidinu: all wo!-ds in \\, u, and many from the shoi't-
tone finals iuh, uh, as /|i| kii -^^ k'li, ^;f; lu^
G. ^t /N jkiai, lai, includi!ig ai, iai, wai, a!id many words ii'om the
short-tone finals eh, ah, as |i[j mai', %.{' .hwai, p| 'pai. ]n Baschjja's
8. y}^ LU lian, ,shan, inchiding an, and part of the finals ien, Wfi'i. as
9. tW ^^\ .hwo!i, ,hwon (or hwon), i!icliiding many woids whose finals
aie now jJFonouncedan, wan, as ^ .kwan, 75x ?P'in« /il/ 'twan, J-/(;J
hwan',
^y p'an'.
1'^- 7L >\. ,sien, ,t'ien,'incliiding the finals ien, en, iuen, uen, wen, as ^^Hi
* Another small dictioiiar}* by a native of K'wen-shan near Su-cheu, called ^ /T| tJ*
11. jj^ ^' .siau, .hau, including the finals iau, au, and many short-tone
\vords in ioh. oh, as i\% 'k'iau, j^ 'tsiui. ^ .hiuu. The ki.st of these words
is 60 spelt in Monfiolian writing, being the same in written form as fX hiaii'.
12. HjK .Ai •^^'J? .kwo, including the finals o, wo, and many words in the
13. %<. iJm' M'^^^ -"^'^ including words in a. ia. w.i. and almost all short-
14. ^L :t^ jC'he, ,che, including the finals e, ie, iue, and the corresponding
short-tone finals, as "]
Wj -^^i^N Tu .tsiue.
the short-tone tinals uh, as J^ 'shen, ff^ jeu', for shuh, juh.
17. '1*^*
^^ jt'sim, .sirn. including manv words now pronomiced with the
IS- !mL Jy^ ,kiam, ,hiam, including many words now pronounced with the
10. ]f^ ^if\ .liem, jSiem, including many words now pronounced with the
finals ^^ 't'ien.
an, ien, as pzf chan,
5 Ohl mandarin final m of Cent. XIII. The final m in the last three
classes is known to be the sound intended by the author, from comparison with
the old Mongolian writing, where the sounds attached to Chinese characters
time of the author, are headed by the same characters as those employed in
many of the tonic dictionaries, but reduced from thirty to nineteen. Later
but they have not lieen bold enough to make the other changes in this system
final m, and the union of such sounds as [^ > ^pj? kwan and jA^^ jC^^ chi,
entirely new system ui" liauls, and an alphabetical ananj^enK'nt for (iic initials
has sometimes ajtparently relied too much on th.- older work of Cheii-teh-
f sing, as in spelling cheng^ ,sheng ]£, }jl^, and other Avords chin- shin^^-
and in i^eparating 7^M from X.' though thoy are both i>ronounced eliV. IMiese
peeuliarities may however liave been required by the dialect familiar to
the
author, and his work is a most useful and convenient manual dictionary,
being
on account of the alphabetical order of the characters very easy of reference.
There are many errors in it, but it would b.-dirticult to point to a better "uide
to the mandarin sounds, there being no imperial dictionary in wliicli they are
detailed. Some instances in which it does not agree with the present nn lU-
dann sounds are the following. The words -Sffi c'liuen, ^c'hangand some
other words in ch are spelt with sh. JIJ-'J^*,
[Xj'
,*f^. ^. etc, have s for their
initial, instead of t's. ^sk '« sheng instead of sing. The words ^I^and-^
are spelt kiung, kung, whereas they are now both called kimg. The same
remark may be made of other words agreeing with these in sound. Veiy fe w
of these faults are con-ected in the newer edition.
be fco iO
-t •i^r^
'V
p>i" n«,^
t
T
11
P j.t «5*
111
P'
m
f
h % PS Weft
s
sh
ts
t's
ch
cMi
w
ciiAPTEU ;>. TAHI.K OK SYLLAHLES, 47
•»
'V 1; a> a 7i B
k'
1± IS ^
a ii'i
P m ^ >;;
P' lira 5m
m ^ij: 7k Mil m ts
f
h 1'
M
.-II
ffff s^x^
B mmMmmm ^10 ; i'?i'jij ft
sh m m m
J
ts
ch
c'h
1
MBi¥m n
r
w
y
* In northern mandnrin coalesces with i e.
m W:
X In Wu-fanc-yuon-yiii-k'iai.In the north ,ts'a.
o o o . ^ Zi S "-^
o r; :; rt C3 rt O O
c: ?=
^
F-
M^
1^
t^
F-
t^
1^
p^
?-
--
?;
k f^KiCvS
k*
P 5J
P'
m
f
h
mmimimm m
s
sh
mm
w
3
mi
ts
t's
ch
c'h
1
^'^-^mm $\i
w ^i.
y ^
throughout the rej:^ion east and south of that city as far as Fuhcheu, while
Hunan and Ilupeh like Si-c'hwen prefer N.
In the Nurth the finals x and kg are often lost when, the a'Hx yQ follows
The Syllables jt)o/i. Jan<j, fen, pie7i, ffiuj, yiu, tiny, ti, etc. hct'omv jnir, far,
fer, pier, fur, yir, fir, etc. retaining their orifj^inal tone.
The finals ix, ixg, do not occur after f, ch, sh, j. In southern China
they follow ch, sh and j in many words, hut in all such words, the vowel k
The final iex has the open sound of a in some northern mandarin, e. g. in
Pa Erl 'Shan-si. Some natives of Peking prefer i:, others a. In the dialects
IKS. Thus 5^* yiL ^^^ written either <mw, kian, (the a in/an), or tie7i, kien
(the e \nj\n). As in other cases, the vowel i in this final refuses to take the soft
sibilants sh, ch, .t, before it. In C'heng-tu pronunciation the i is sometimes
omitted, as iujyj^ hien, pronouncccl han. Some words with the initial s called
sien by MoiTison, insert u, e. g.^r IlM j''^^" ^^^ pronounced siuon in some
northern dialects and in Si-c*hwen mandarin.
The final iaxg appears to be free from variations. It occurs only after the
The final iuxg is used only after k, k* and ii. In many parts of Dnithern
The finals iuex, lijx, occur after s, h. ts, k, and their aspirates. For the
vowel E, a is often used, as in the case of the final iex.
The finals ex, exg, rhyming with the English words son, sunxj, are found
after all the initials, except that ex does not combine with t, l, or s. The
number of words ranged und^r these finals is greatly increased by tiic transi-
Words in wf.x, wexg, are rare and are met with only wnth the initials k,
the latter is also heard in colloquial heng. Morrison has marked kweng, and
50 MANDARIN' GRAMMAR PART I.
hwcng as separate syllables, and Premare has kweng, but there is good re-
ason to omit them as is done by the author of Wu-fang-yuen-}^n.
Words in an and ang are found after all the initials. The number is in
creased by the accession of many characters having the initials sh, ch and j;
the north. Thus ^§- shan, _[! shang, are at Nanking, the same in sound,
The medial w in the final wan is usually not clearly pronounced after the
initials J, l, s, t, and y. Thus, "jfjf jc^jL, are heard toan, loan, where o takes
the place of u.
Among words in wan and wang are included by Mon-ison, Premare, and
other writers, many with the initials p, m; e. g. ^^j i^-]- pan, man. These
I prefer to spell without the medial w, for though heard in provincial dialects,
natives of the mandarin-speaking cities do not make use of that sound. The
finals WAN and wang coincide in the Nanking dialect, where 7u and [^
are both pronounced kwan. They are kept clearly separate in northern and
western mandarin.
true). Premare uses o, rhyming with go, and that orthography agi-ees witli
the sound as heard from many native speakers of mandarin coming from
some words belonging to this final, the vowel is variable; e. g. in Y}^. "tftf ,
jJ/J, pronounced feng, meng, p'eng, or fung, mung, p'ung, also t'M' l^ung
heng or hweng, f\i[^' ]\ ^„ kung or kweng. The syllable shung is recognized
Peking. In Peking feng meng, p'eng, are conmion, but fung p-'ung, mung,
The final UN rhyming with moon, is often heard im as 4' J t'sun or t,sim a
vifhige. The consonats k, ng, p, m, f, h, w, y, never take tliis final. At
CHAPTER 5. ON THE SHORT -TONE FINALS. 51
Pikinff UN and un are both used. In the mandarin of Nankin'^- and Si-
c'liwen im is pretVrrod. The uutliur c>l"Wii-lan>;-yiit'n-}iii makes hin and lUn
separate syllables. Tlius fjftj Inn, discourse; 1njj hin human relations.
21 Voivel Jinals. The final i refuses the initials nu, f, j, sh and ch. Thus
-V
J y^'often written chi, nhi, should he made to rhyme with "pj, <^y, si,
tsi, according to the orthography of this work, and with sze tsze, according
to Morrison.
Words in i are limited t(^ the initials s, ts, sh, ch and r, with J, in the
short tone, e. g. ^Q 'si,
tl ^^i', ^ 'ri. Some may doubt the propriety
of using the same symbol for the vowel jmrt of the sounds, ^q 'si, !P| 'ri,
but this is what is done in the native mandarin dictionaries, and it seems to
me that they are right.
Words in e take only the initials sh, ch, j, y, and m in one instance T^l
'me, or as it is perhaps more frequently called 'mie. For the ])ronunciation
ofC'heng-tu, the best standard of western mandarin, this final should be
written e, as thv a in case. At Nanking, it is nearer in sound to e, as the a in
quires the insertion of the vowel i as^^^ 'sie. It occurs without the medial
I only after sn, j, en, a limitation which also marks words in the short tone
in eh; e. g. ^f sheh.
The final o, in many parts north of the Yellow River is sounded u, and
is like the first vowel in the diphtiiong of words such as coiv, how. In the
52 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. PART I.
The final ii occurs only after k, n, h, s, ts, and standing alone; e. g.j^)"]^
,ku, ,u. There is no need of the inserted i or initial y added to the spelling
Words in iai take only the initials k, h; e. g. f]^ kiai, but when i is not
inserted, all the consonants except f and J are employed. At C'heng-tu the
The sound yai heard in Shan-tung, is ugai at Peking as in J^? %-^j etc.
Words in iau take all the initials, except sh, j, ch, ng, and f, which in this
The final eu takes all the initials. It rhymes nearly with the English
word '-prow". The intermediate vowel, e in tew is the e in. "then", as in
^ nieu, an ox.
In the finals ai, au, ui wai, each letter has its full sound. After k, h, p,
12 Short-tone finals. The finals in the short tone all consist of vowels,
into IH and ih. This is rendered necessary by the fact that i does not take
the soft sibilants, sh ch, j before it. Thus Tg sih, ))ecomes si in Peking,
and is there identical with si, ivest, while in Nanking it remains sih with
the vowel short. Words like ^^ and ^1 *
agree in tone and in vowel sound
CHM'TER .").
ON THK SHUItT-TUNf: IIN'Al.S. 53
with \v^' .shi time, at rckinix, ^^^^ ^^ Nankinjr in tho vowol souml but not
in tone. For (he latter the spellinpj sliili, and i'or the former .shi. is here
adopted.
The iinal eh as in pj- ^J jieh, spelt by French writers pe, and by Mor-
rison pih, varies in sound in the mandarin dialects. In Peking it is predom-
inantly Ki, Ai, E, or o; at Xankinf; kii (the e as u in tun); in Si-c'hwen eh
(the E as in there): and in llonan ki and ai.
The iinal eh preserves the same vowel sound in all the dialects. It only
occurs after the initials sn, j, ch, y, as is true also of tho lon<^ tinal e, its
correlate.
When there is no consonant preceding, as in ZlL 'i i^^ the sound jireferred
in all the dialects. At C'heng-tu eu is not used. Thus >'^ called lieu* in
the north, and identical in sound with )\i] lieu', is heard .In at C'heng-tu,
agreeing in sound with ^ij .lu, and %\. .nu, there pronounced .hi.
The final iih is usually written iuh by foreign authors, and both sounds
are given in the preceding table. Almost all the words under this final are
however pronounced ii at Nanking, and in the other dialects. Thus {4^ lii
not linh, and {trj k-'u (t'sii) not kMuh. Yet |iq .c'hii is in Poking sometimes
heard c*hiuh.
In the tinal ieh many speakers of mandarin omit one of the vowels 1 or E.
They are more firmly fixed in the mandarin of the north, than in that of
othi^r parts. Thus ||J,4*; tieh, hntterjln, in Peking tie or t'lc, is in C'heng-tu
called ti agreeing in sound with jjj ti, ajiute] while at Nanking it is ch.
The final iah occurs only after k and 11. It usually fakes the form ia;
e. g. ^jjj .hia.
Words in lUH take ii in })lace of tliat final. The termination iueh often
loses the sound u or that of e, as in !^^ siueli, J]JL hia pronounced sio or
sie. The finals ini and il'EH occur only after k, ii, s, l and y.
The final "won often omits the medial w as in ^p .ho, living. Many
f >
"g"
speakers change theotoei; e. g. in -^^ pronounced liwei, in '^ 'Slum-si
— ti.
and Honan. The place of o is also often taken by e, as in PL)^ hwoh, pro-
nounced in Si-c'lnven .liwe. This and the final Invah (pronounced hwa),
occur onlv after the consonants k, ii, and sii.
1 Ji
13
• —U-
In the lengthening of words
J. t-|
in the short tone, as detailed in the work ^
)W^ H hM ^^^^' t^^^' mandarin of century XIII, it appears that words in the
lower juh-sheng or eighth tone, having mute or sibilant initials pass into
p'ing-sheng, and chiefly the lower subdi\dsion of it, viz. the fifth tone-class.
Words in the upper juh-sheng with the same initials pass into the shang-
third or k^ii-sheng. The excei^tioiis to these rules in that work are few, and
it would be interesting to ascertain if they exist in the pronunciation of any
large part of northern China at the present day.
14 In the tones of words lengthened from the juh-sheng in the Peking
dialect, there is an approximation to the same law. By referring to the table,
it will be seen that a clear majority of words in the lower juh-sheng with mute
and sibilant initials, viz, K, t, p, s, f, h, ch, take their place in the lower
classed under the third tone or k'ii-sheug. The second tone however, though
it embraces only words conforming with this rule, viz. characters having mute
and sibilant initials belonging to the upper juh-sheng, contains but a minority
of them, the greater number being distributed among the other three tone-
classes, the first, third and fifth. Of these the first tone takes the most.
Original tone.
56 MANDARIN URAMMAR. PART 1.
20 i. In Peking pronunciation the words y\\ puh not and i one as-
1 Before p'ing sheng they take c'hii sheng ^\ ^* pir ,tO; not many.
2 Before shang sheng they take chli sheng .^\ ^Q pir \si", he will not die.
3 Before c'hii sheng they take hia p'iug ^"^ ^P) linxig'', on once moving.
ii Upper juh sheng words are found in Peking for the most part in shang
p'ing. The following with a few other words from the lower juh sheng, are
^Iso enunciated colloquially in shang p'ing examples J^^ nie, to take luith the
iii. The tone class hia p'ing in Peking embraces not only all lower juh
sheng words with mute and sibilant initials, but a considerable number from
the upper juh sheng. They are chiefly among those written chi, c'hi, chie,
iv. The second tone class, shangsheng inPeking, attracts to itself afew of the
upper juh-sheug words. They are principally such as are accustomed to stand
alone in colloquial usage e.g. y^ 'chai, narroio Jp^ 'kei, give r]i|J 'chiau
V. The third tone class, c'hti sheng is in Peking the favourite tone of juh-
sheng words in reading. Not only do words beginning Avith 1, m, n, ng, j,
almost exclusively prefer this tone, but many others form the upper juh-
eheng, used in combination and not found alone also assume this intonation
EXAMPLES JJ^ li', to stand ^K'J ^'-C'S observe, search ]j\\\ dm' a wooden bar-
,
new intonation. Such words assume the intonation of c'hu sheng for rhythm-
ical purposes. This tone-class thus becomes in the metropolitan province
the representative of the \ostJuh sheng for ]H)etical comjiosition and veritation.
rnAPTER 5. PF,K INC/ ROUND OF SIIORT-TONE WORDS. 57
The words are there spelt by the method called Fan-t'sieh. Thus under
^^ yo, medicine, the direction given for the pronunciation
HIF' T^P- tS' jk'i (c'h), ,shi, .shi, ,chi, .mei, respectively, in spelling and in
tone.
In transferring the sounds thus given to a i)Iace in this work, the process
of Fan-t'sieh has been omitted, and the result only given, viz. the correct
spelling and tone in the Peking dialect of all the short-tone characters con-
tained in the table.
Common
Examples
orthography.
c'hah
chah
c'ha
cha
m^ n fi';
ch«di che
'M -^f^ -1^ S^ -f^ li'fr -ffl Hf(^
chill clu
m '^ ^A m
,^ \\ ivi ^'k i\yk \^
c'hih c'hi
nM M ^M
choh chau
#r;^ ?>j:- 'K- siiij- nij-
» cho
choh
chuh
c'ho
cho
M
n '^ 4!|(
•jtiS
chu
,^ -ii M-^"^. Hi m u -^
58 JI A N DA n IX U l\ A M M A P. PART I.
Common
Examples.
oi-tho<z;ra])liy.
C'llllt'll
c'luih
•tB
fah m .i£ Vs m
'<^ ^i'
f'T,' ll,'-"
"in
full
m -'Jifii -1^ -tt -^ M n -n s m
hei
I'M '*iii '^ %m
lieh
??
ho •1 -l^i) ili^ !£'
hi ah ?ia hia
wm %
n m -m -e ^^%
hieh hie sie
mm mm -pt
liih
hioh
si hi
sio hiiie
mmm m '^^
)'/?
-HF^ 'EI3
siaii (li)
55
sioe (h)
55 /\ (or sine)
hiiih m (h)
hoh ho
hau
fl'A ,^, n -u -^ m .m n ^ .-h
hwah hwa
Ay:.
liwoli hii J.|^.
hAviih
jeh
liu
a .M m m C eIl^
^'
J^-
t-r
juh 14 ^J;=i
jllll jrll
cHArTKll i). PRKIKG SOUND OF SHORT-TONE WOUDS. 59
Common
Examples.
orthotj^raphy.
AWWlH^R'
kt'h ko 4m .^i': M m r6 .SiS .Jis mu
tsie
k^eh k'o
kit'h tsio il m Mi M m 4^ 4 m ^ m ji
kill tsi tf
kiueh
t'sio,
tsitie
ue m- m M'r-
k'iueh t'siiu'
kiiili
k-iuh
tsii
t'sii
4-k Mi h'i
ffl'|lM!l|c,ook..,rill:|..«nn-
M
koli ko, ke
k'oh k'o m m -m y^
kuh kii M )!« f> iV-j 1:)' Iji^oiall r -|-
k'lih k'u
K'h \A
lo
>>
^IJ ,k'e, to rw/, engrave k'e' po, to rff/i/ hardly with »h! .k'« *<7Mn and quarters.
60 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. TART I.
Comiuuii l\'kiii<r
Examples,
ortliop,Tap]iy. soiukI.
lieh lie
m:m wm
lih
liol
li
liau
^ ^ M- m m' m If
Ik.
liueh lie
5^'
liiili lu
meli mai
iiiioli
J?
1110
miu
r m m m *' if wj m m m-
mill mi «^ i^ ^O' >lL
^t^.fi
jj
mo
53
mu rfs-
iiali na Ift' eft' Ift'
iigeh DgO
ngoh ngo
nieh me ffl- Hi-
iiih iii
nioli nioe
noli no
pah
ji'ah
pa
p'a
•A m« jjf ij{
pell pai
l»'i 4b
CHAPTER 5. PKKINQ SOUND OF SHORT-TONE WORDS. 61
Coiumou
Examples
orthocrrapliy.
jj
po
p'cli p'ai
i\\
pi eh
j>
p'o
pie
nmM If:|- ffl- iE-
•ff-yij-fu!
})'ieh p'ie
pull l>aii •
lii illi/ -iij,'-
})
po
'*^i# •^^€ 15 -^ I* ## .*t
p'oh p-o
]i'u
po
J)Ull pu
J)
p-Il
p*uh p'u
^
^i4i
sail sa m
.11
M
•--.»-
sliali
shai, se
sha
^i{i XI5.
tN luj
^iii.
aut
/."t
Lj
•
JT-.
,ii^»
^<-
^
5lt'
J'
sia
sheh she 1' I iT.Mj mux tiiii ri'i I") (m:- lL ^>
shih shi I J 'f'r
X. :5
:>^C mm r\ .Yi M^ :k
sliili
shoh
shi
shall
'v'iu\\\ ''^- m m- w ^ ^t-
sliuh slitii
^^ htandins last.
-f^ l>efore±-'F, [^ ^. ±^
•>P before "S* 5)p For Examples v. Usui ching lu Part III.
62 MANDARIN GRAMMAIi. I'AhT i.
Common
Examj)]<js.
orthography,
» M fL .n<Mi mm
.;i$
m ~M- m- m n- w
tihwah
.shwoli
m
sieh }i-^=
•i-\-
!>>:
sih •&-
Js?:- 1 1^ .11 11 li tiV il m
r
s
mm nmm ^iT-
I
sioh to
siueh
siiih •ri
}} fi' iP^
8oh
^^^V
»
tah
M' is^ m ^'
t'ah 'i§ m mm
q^ ought Jjivjv
teh, t'eh
tieh
% s
>iitc mmmm i^- i'k
tMeh U 'M n 'hi-
CHAl'TEK .).
(A MANDARIN GKAMMAU. TART 1.
Common
CIIAriKU :>. K.\.\^U•I.K^<. (JS
of Pekinu; ami tin* ii.»rtli j^riR-rally, is the ultcivd lonii jfjuli-slicii^ words.
The following; examplt s are f]jivc'ii to aid in iaiuiliarizing to the eye of the
.^\ '^' yair .e'lii pir Iiau, he fakes mcilirinc iritJiout benefit: "XT "l* -^^
,t"si .sill li<'ir, scveutij six; ^''i\i l^il, [^ lii" .ytii 'sai. of n i/reeu colour: ^
"g ^i
'^ ivj '1''^'' tsi mei ,ko titc wheat is not yef cut] -j J J'j( 'ta lie', to
hunt: 'lil htj 4 ,^"^^0. .tail 'ts'i, a place for showin<jflou-cr.s\ ' *
yj, ||/){
Itu itii 'i^ 1^ • li' I'l"' ,tsaii t'a' pu* .te, o single fjrain of rice must not
2vas troffden upon and destroyed : JiJj 7^ cho pen', stupid; (l^ t-.^t'siiie,
.shi, (ircurntehj true : \^\ -^ Vamv cliiau, Just at the time; fortunately
fli llll §f ^M '^-'i^u r^^ .^^-^"'^ ."=1".' ^n'«(/mr/ «''^^'// K ^'K fP fflJ
sie* til .shen .fo, to insult the gods and Buddhas; |]: -i^j^ ,tso yo', to play
music; y^\ ' "
\'l}j\ ,sie ,i ,sie, rest a little:] [- riiy- jii ^2^' ^^'^
"S*^* f"*"'
for the knee; /Jjji /Ijl I ):::\ J 'tsiau 'ti sia- ,shi Iiau, tcet nnjier foot;
,wu ahouse ;
, 3}! i I'J c'hi% ,fung, ^o canonize; pj jj^ .liwan;^li', imperial
calendar ;^^ ±1^ shw \\\ upright; ttj 7J .cMiu l\\ to exert sfrrn>rfh :
yfiX l|'')C '^^^'^ tsei, <o /aV^ thieves; YjL i'jl^ .e'hcii ni', /o ir drownet/ : /J//
1\ U-I t'.^^nii .to pu' .('hu, cannot Jind it out by thinking: )'lj i W^>i<' hu',
to let iva/er through :'ff}l j^. 'k'wn .tseh, to choose : j (j -j\ ^ Vhau pu'
.chau, cannot find him; ^^ J [|j){ J -^ ^j ^..i,-,- 'Iiau fan* .niei 'yeu. have
you hrefd.fastrd {dined) y,t or not; ^I'K l.j^.nan .te, dij/icult to g<f: -{^ /v^
H|''J 'jv'; -t^i'l •^'J'^n '^^^ .(hen, /f»-r/r/y / /.//,-, rongrr: fl ;-,V; ^\ F1 !">'
,hei pu- .pai,i7 /« neither black nor white: ^[j} j/j^ j | J :2V J .clii .n .( Iiu
/'m3 ^X 5Wi J la-.(hu hwo juie' 'Wnn^ the candle is gone out : \\ OS
- y 7f^^ J sill ten .f.sa ,sha Iiau. /<e teas stoned to death: Iji^-jfi jjl
seven days; 'X M^ ']' 'nii .sia 'ta'i, a hlhid icomav, JJ-ji }^i W .tsiiie,
tstag horns ^\ ^}] \l^ \m' .m'm^ .\-)ai, he does not U7idersta7id; J^. ^ )'|*i
'j^fj to lijl jClicn sill" .liwo .lb ,c'hu slii', he is truhi a living Buddha horn
into the ivorld; 7v ^ ta' mai-, luheat; f\. ~T A^ :i:-t 'c*hi .t'sun .pu
tui-, the measurement does not agree; Jjll. IJlC A^ \ II '!^ii'<^ i^o' (mai-) pii'
.hwo, f/ic Z>?oocZ is not active; Q EL IVj W l^J tsi- 'clii .ti 'ku jeu', otic'*
own blood relations; JI^ 7JC ^--ji' -t'eii t'ai* .tu, ^/<o sun is very power-
ful (poisonous); ^W yfc '& ^^ \nv yair' t'ai' .sin .chi. do not he too
missing; ^<c jS £( ffi P^^^i' i^'^i'i' 'P''^i sing', Ae oppresses the people;
_
— ^^ _^ "tr li/k jSan -Inven .c'hi p'o', three souls and seven animal prin-
ciples ; ^'^i ]^ ,t'sin ,t'si. relations; jQ "J ,p'ai 'sbeu, to clap the hands;
1^ ^S ^^'^
-V^^ tin-foil: )x "W tM -^5 j'l^ei 'yen .Hang .shi, ///c?/ /^are
no provisions; TjC ^^ ~f^ mir .sai 'tsi, a ^cooden palisade ; ^ h'ilI Plfe
llli pu' jen' ,shi ,t'a, I do not know him; "^ [trj ~J"* c'hang' 'c'hii 'tsi, to
tsai' ,shan 'ku ,chiing, he lives in a mountain valley; -pi 7\^ Pj^ ^=f ^:J*
^^ 't'siau .11 shall' .te 'hau .t'ing, the birds sing sweetly -M"^ f±_ ]yLj 'tsui
"li 'k'o. I am thin^fir.^^ It^I .tsic sii', to connect; WA A^ 1^ ^ai' pu' .te,
}] >7gj
i^^ yne' liang' "haii, the moonlight is beautiful; ^ f£ ^ ^7"
^^ che' 'li pu' .sing .ti, it must not be done hcrc;^^:^ -flE ^ifv l^lH tsin' tsai'
u' 'li, to shut up in prison; 1^ j\^ ^ 1^. .t'ung ,siu .ho i', of one mind
and h€art;'i'il jj^^ ~^ .man ,iiiau k'an'. toxich it andsee;^<, ^ ,tsia ye',
family property; -^ iJ: tsr 'nni', written characters; ^ 'Jht ^t'sinje', <o
«««cA one's-self closely to W k'. "iR fe -^^^^5 ^^^^ ;^^'^"o M^^, '^*<' Aowses
—
;
>j';? o//; ' Ijr. fti a ll'j A. ,i .chwang .ii chu' .ti .jen. men who live
IF. li^, fill- ^A ^heng' .chi .wii ,si, upright and unselfish ; ^jt (J J >(j* .shwo
.ti 'hau, he spealcs writ: n/^ ^^ )^ -^ "St )^ -^l^' -t^' -k^wei shV 'hnn
CHAPTF.K r». KXAMTLrS. 67
half black ami half white : "}][ \] f'- /\, Ik* ilia- .jtii, to friifhtvn and deceive
peoph \ y^Jv 4^{. xt J 111 -I'inc: 'siiie \ni\v \\\ ire and snoic are on the ground \
~~*
^^ mi ;' -^'^'i .''liwfii. o boat: bIj ^[ tsi' .clio, remember-, 'J/' .^
'l^ 'shall pir .ti', it /.s- indisjiinaabJe ; n>i ^^x /t. ,s)i\vo jm' ting', I cannot
say certainhj \%\\\ 7] ~X^ p^ .in fcir 'veil sioir. A/V share of happiness-
.yin .t'sion, to add constantly to his gains; ij^'j y\\ |^ 1'^ ;?^" 'she pu'
.tu jC'hi ,t'-lnviii. he will not spend even for food, and clothing; ^ ||5 'S^
Jpg .ia .t-t:{ii .til .fii, //(' /.«??•/>•// and h(rj>py;^% tl '
'
/v .tu tsr J .jon,
he, a single '}'^'''f''-p.Mwi\ I'I'I' li^'l" Uj ^\"' '^^'*^' ^^^' *^'^' -^^ ^'^<^'^'c a"(/ pin-
ching; -fj- /^ ri3^ J_l,^^ !^ [ly ki»- c'liu' she' li' 'sie .siiie 'kwan, eve?*y-
tvhere establish schools; -^ ^^ ^<4i
—
^x ko' c'iiii' kwang' kwang', /tc ' ,i
arranged them in order of battle; Jf^* ,\r[! ^T^ t'e' i' .lai, conw intentional-
ly; ^^ ~y 'so 'tsY. string; ropei^H ^^ -^he "pen, to b>se capital; ^K.]^
r//v *^ ,sie ,si ,sie ,si, res/, rcis/ XL l™ xE A'^ ,\noi\
: .t-hii tBai' .sin,
the injury he has suffered is in his thoughts; -^ [-^ ^ j- [J-J [iJX ^^'^^
P^
a'lnv' ,i\ ,tfie'i, the theives that plunder the people; ^\ *\ g^ pir ,chiing
jt'ing wo< pleasing to here; /\. r^^ /(^" jii' k'o' ticn', /iCf/i/frec/^Ae /oc/j7J»<7-
honse; ^^ /^ 'jj,* ^[^ P lien' .jen .i tai' tso' sia'. the six men sat
down together.
which the .siiort-tnne finals uic .suhjorl in ihc mandarin diahrls. The co-
Final.
68 MASDAUIN OUAM.M Ml. I'AllT I.
Final.
C'HAPTKU 5. FAULTS IN MANKAKIN' DIAT.F.CTS. 69
Final.
70 MAN'OAKIN tlP.AMMAR. FAftT I.
stantives affects the sound of vowels and pushes out the finals n and n*;;, as in
/\ TLi .jen .n, a rnan, iironounced nearly like .jer. in | ) ^'U .men .n, a
door, which is like .mer, and in Tjv i'JX yCi inu' ]ian .n, ivoodcn hoard,
heard like mu' 'par. Aspirates are incorrectly used in the words 51^ tie pro-
nounced often 'tie i|^ telr pronounced t'e. Further, words in iai, iue are
heard ie.
pronounced Ian. The vowel i in such words as^lj? yj lieh. t'sieh is oft^^n
omitted. Words such as 7^ I'ien ^f- nien are frequently heard t'eu, nen.
The final n becomes ng aftt-r i, and ng hect^mes n after a. Thus j\^ sin,
heart is the same in sound with ^^ shig, a star, and J'Ul ,lian, order, with
the walls, the soft initials g, d, b, etc. prevail among the country people.
Bad speakers of mandarin are more common among Nanking ukmi, than
among those from Peking and the other mandarin speaking cities, because
the former city is on the boundary between the northern and southern sys-
tems of pronunciation, while the others are In the midst of a population
29 In the western provinces, the initial n gives place to l' except before
shoe (heard hai). Some words in ie. as ;^ ,sie, are heard i, dropping the
last vowel E. Tlie words^^ yiin', yJC 'ynng,J]lL, /\ hiue, ^ shi'. are
as in ^' jo, ]^P .ju. Y is also found for j as inf rj jim' called yun. Words
in Y often substitute i, as in/^.lung for .yung.
31 In the north, the variation in the vowel part and the tone of juh-sheng
words gives rise to much inconvenience. From the preceding tables it ap-
riTAP"Tii. (». \\TivK modi: ui uiiiTiNf; S()i-\ns. 71
pciiri?, that many wnnl-^ have two or tlirfo ]troiiiin('iati<nis own in Pekim;
itsrlt". The wtmlf^ lor exam j)le, is then' ch1I('<1 liio liiiie or liiau (s). and
.'I'-'J has til.' tluro sonncls .lei. hi* amMo'. Sonu' words that have •'one far
ironi their oritcinnl t'orni in tlie colloipiial, arc nineh nearer to it when ])ro-
'V2 At T'ien-tsin the port of Pekins:, tliero are some diti'erences in the
initial letters: e. •;. .i for some words in y. and TS and s foi- many words inrn
iind sn.
sounds. The vowels usually ai;ree accurately with the recognized orthogra-
phy, but the initial consonants still retain among them the soft letters, c;. d,
b, z, etc. e. g. Irjif .jwen, a boat lor .chwen, -^ .dza for .c'ha, tea. So the
country dialect near Tsi-nan-fu in Shan-tung does not confound the initials
K and TS before i and u, nor ii and s before the same letters, as is don<' in
that eity.
CHArTKR VI.
ciation of particular cities, repre cut the sounds with tlie h^lp of the Fan-
initials, and another the finals of a dialwt, are chosen as a standard of pro-
nunciation. Ry means of them the s«nmds of all other words are expres-
sed. In many ca.ses however, words to represent the Found are choven with-
out regard to any series. Kxamples illust ratine: this method are here given.
72 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. PART I.
Example. Initial. \
Final. Sound. Authority.
f? i
k'i
.k'i >> 7J
k ki
ki
Kl- .k'i jj J?
? k,i 35 J5
Syllabic SpeUinf/.
turn over, and t'sieh, to touch, to rub, was introduced to China by the Hin-
doos in the 5th and 6th centuries. The first dictionary, in which it was
'•'
This dictionary of the dialect of Fuh-clieu is called /v HZI M pj
Pah ,yin hoh ting'.
77 y^ J^ ^- 'pf ^ ,Fen yiin' tsuli yau' hoh tsih, or more briefly Feu-
yiin.
§ ^^ l\^ "of i^i^- The pronunciation only is given in the dictionary in-
cluded in this work. The words are arranjjed accordinur to their initials as
3' AA-
Example.
74 MANI'AiaS (.UAMMAli I'AUl' I.
than one hnndrcd. His system ^vitll slight variations has. continued in use
to the present time. The finals may he still further diminished one halt" by
and (2) the final, all words having the same intonation being placed together,
so that the most general division of the book is into four parts, one for each
early works is now obsolete, but they are still the standard according to which
literary candidates write poetry for the national examinatiuns. The tradition-
ary soimds of the T'^aug dynasty as here registered, fonii the rule according
to which all Chinese poetry is still composed. The natives consult these
w^orks with facility from knowing l>y the habit of reference where a word is
to be expected.
7 The syllabic spelling learned from the Hindoos was soon followed by
systems of initials and finals, which very much assisted the natives in com-
prehending the analysis of sounds.
The initials were an-anged nearly in the order of the Sanscrit alphabet.
j]^ ,sim, z y f)
.zia, ch {If"? 'eho, e'h >|- ,c'hon, dj i\X 'Jjnng, sh ^ 'shim, j
'-
joibv f;^ 'yang, h 0^ 'hio, u nf;f.',/, jlLhap, 1 ^ loi, ni nyit
We are told (Li-shi-yin-kien, vol. 2, p. 6,) that a priest of the T'ang dy-
nasty, named She-li ^,- A"'} formed this system, but without the six cha-
racters %li, \\'\\, ^^ , )^j, ^'ii, ^&. These were afterwards added, and in
fact some of them are sujiei-fluous. For the first two can be identified with
the initials \Z\ nyit and )Q^ djing, and the last four with the initials^p, ^J,X,
3B? ^'J; ^'V loading p for f In the Sanscrit alphabet there is no f, and in
tlif lifth cf-iitmy words afterwards placed under the initials i\ \\ were pro-
CHAPTER G. SYLLABK' SI'KI.l.INC. 75
nouncecl with p, h. Tlnis yfj full, j')|j fuli^ luul for their ])honetic value
at that time the t!>anscrit syllables jmt, biul, ami were changed for other
the llinduu sounds aeeurately, sla-winy; that the jiower assigncil to these cha-
racters had changed in the interval. Many other words now pronounced f
and V, may he concluded from various sources to Ifave been formerly heard
(•^ 1, ei,) ^ ,1ft: tp (ii, o,_u,) ^{0,)Ui ^^ M ^V] (aJa, 6i, fti,)
g$ ^ (in, im,) 3(, )ik /C ^J| (iu"' ''". ^vun.)§i >/j( t'g (en, on,
w6n,) llljlj^ |i| (an. wan^) /L f|l| (ien,) j^H W # 5c («, '^o, aii, iau,)
^^ yJi Miii (a, wa,) |>i lii jiong, 6ng,) $t l'|- rR_^ang, iang,) ftf
San.scrit alphabet. That order is a, a, i, i, u. I'l, e, ai, (5, au. The unaccent-
ed n in a closed syllable corresponds to e as used in the present work. The
vowel a is ])laced near 6 in the Chinese system doubtless because of the close
consonants used as finals is also nearly the same as in the Sanscrit alphabet,
The finals in the second and third tone-classes ])eing likf those of the first
are not hero transcribed. In the common rhyming dictionaries now used for
versification, the JJl ela.sses hen- found, are reduced to about half that number.
76 MASDAllIN OKAMMAH. I'ART I.
to the Fan-t'sieh method, with the initials and finals as here described. In
the traditional sounds of the characters are quoted from earlier books. To
read the old pronunciation correctly the values of all the initials and finals
given in this chapter. It is derived from many sources, viz. from old tran-
Corean, and Cocliin- Chinese; also from the existing state of provincial dia-
Phonetic Characters.
are formed phonetically. Many of these are of recent invention. There are
guage has passed during several thousand years, some of these laws are not
beyond the reach of observation. Phonetic and ideographic characters are
found mixed in the oldest remains of Chinese literature, and tradition ascribes
them to one inventor >g jjv! T'sang-kieh, who lived before the time of Yau
and Shun, in the reign of Hwang-ti, said to be b. c. 2600. But though
there is no traditional evidence of any lengthened time elapsing between the
formation of the two kinds of symbols, we may be allowed to assume it.
Phonetics Coinpnund.s.
±i ,fiin<: Is •
1
'
I
"K. Ti I .
p«n?r-
fnj slmnj:- :^^- .sliaiin: (/.li), |.-|^ 'shaii';, i^ 'i:lmi)<,', jjnj l-imj;,
'M
W .taiij::,
'i^
ijl .t•all^^
-^ ,ft'n ^
.j^T ''ii-
l.ii- (vi'ii), ^it p'cn
jiX .p-cn (Ik-u),
(l)Hi), //tl ,i>an,
/;(! ,
^
>;|i .pin.
tion a tV'W more than a thousand. It appears therefore that after the inven-
tors of the Chinese characters had determined on tin* more tlum 2,0tX)
tliem as symlxds of sound. Tlie sound assigned to them wa.s the name of
the ohject of w hich they were- primarily chosen to be the ideograj)h. Probably
therefore sufficient time intervened for the symbols first formed to bccomo
well known, and suggest at a glance a certain sound. As already remarked
]t, in almost all cases is the same in compound characters as in their plionetics.
* In the seal characlor "tH -iti'l -fck have the same fonn.
78 MANl».\i;iN CUAMMAK. I'AKT r
This fact belongs to the first tbnnation of Chinese writing, and proves the
ous changes that have taken place during the la]>se of thousands of years.
Characters which once rhymed together, and tlierefore contain the same
phonetic, have separated frequently, and now find their ]>lace under three,
four or more different rhymes. Tlius among the i)receding examples -^ che
has three values, and "HL ye no fewer than five. These mark clianges in the
lano^uao-e, and it remains to accertain which is the oldest^ and which the
newest form of the vowel, before an approximation can be made to tlie ]»ri-
mitive sound.
1.5 While the medial and final letters of the sound attached to compound
characters ao-ree witli those of their phonetics, the initial ulten differs. When
the initial consonants are not the same, they are usually closely allied. Thus
f and p, k and h, ch and ts, cli and sh are often the initials of words having
the same phonetic. But there is no certain rule in regard to initials. It was
apparently only in the final, that identity of sound was held to be requisite
T t :c:;^7'lIP^ t IE
kk 4- ^h^^^^r^^
m 1 m ag f/ij
^
M a m it 1 M Iwi
^i^m ^ M * St i$ U M ff:
6 VC
. ''^i 'lA ^ '}]•- :''.•
Jl !L! >kij '}^ §M ^fr jl? >]l)
-h ^ 3^
1. r^J li. di '
I' r)i tA i^- :^ ^ ii M S
17 111 the i)rosent state of our ktiowledi^e, the original value of the vowel
much more easily and frequently than consonants do. We can only conject-
ure that as in the case of the words ending in consonants, all characters hav-
single letters instead of syllables. Tluis the symbols p"J a J(^ " I
•
71^ y I*"J a,
stand for aniya, the Manchu word for 7/ear. This is al|ihabetic
sjx'lling. The characters however are so printed as to suit the syllabic nature
— "^^vl "^'"^'"^ ^'^'' Mongolian word K'uitMui, cold, in thf work \}^
\^ tfli W\ ^ ]£ ,
«^ f^l'^lt with two triliteral .syllables. It
cases.
It does not appear that this mode of spelling has ever been used to repre-
sent the variations in sound of Chinese diahrts.
ciiArrin: \ii.
Is mentioned as the first writer who, Ity noticing tlie separation of the
old first tone class into two, was led to speak of five tones/-' The first des-
cription of tlie distribution i»f the short tone-class among the other four is also
liave borne ihat naiiu'. It is uncertain which is meant. From the- dictionary
spoken in liis province 600 years ago, can be known with great accuracy. He
retains the final vi of the old tables, and of the southern dialects in the jirescnt
day. Thus ^L^ ,sim, ]% .lim, f^J .nam, are distinguished from ^,/f .sin,
the words that formerly had them, being tliere pronounced with vowel finals
in the old tables, (i. e. words in the lower tone with the initials, k, t, p, ch,
ts, &c. aspirated or not, in the southera dialects,) keep that form in this
dictionar}-, always in the fifth tone, and frequently in the others. The con-
sonants k, t, p, ch, ts, are also very commonly the initials of these words in
the third and fourth tones. Thus 3Ej yS, ping' agree accm-ately with t|A|
ping', in all respects, according to this author, though they differ in central
the fifth tone-class, and omitted in the others [second, third and fourth].
tone among the others has already been mentioned. Words with the initials,
k, t, p, f. ch, ts, s, sh, take the second tone; those having, according to the
old tables, g, d, b, v, dj, dz, z, zh, take the fifth; and the rest embracing
and some other finals as now pronounced, also then existed, for which see the
chapter on finals. Variat ions in the initials arc very few, see above.
* Li-xhi-yin-kien. vol. 1, page 8.
t Preface to Chnncr-i'heu-t'siucn-yxin.
cnAPTKu 7. ON Tin: A(;n of tiif, mandauis rnovi n'CIAtion'. 81
in course of t'onnation. The existence of the oUl soft initials and ot' tii-- final
m, important features of the oKK'r dialect, and used as has been seen at the
court of the i\[ongol emperors, forliid the suppositinn that the mandarin
dialect was then fully formed. l*art of the periud which the Miii;^^ dvnastv
occu])ied, a. d. 1368 to 1G44 must be included therefore in the time during
which we conclude that the consolidation of this dialect was comj)leted. In
the ilictionary Wu-faug-yuen-yin written at the end of that dynasty, the dis-
authorities reiiuircs some notice. Words with this tone are given with lono-
vowels, but instead of being read as long-tone words, they are still counted
as being in the short-tone. E. g. in Wu-fang-yuen-yin^, [iy; IJ|(, etc. at
Nanking read meh, are placed under the rhyme ai, according to the usa^-e of
the ni)rthtrn provinces where these words are frequently read mai. Words
sudi as ^, ::^', ^,and many others have assigned to them two or three
pronunciations. Hioh, job, toh, are regarded as their correct spelling; but
they are also written hieu, hiau; jeu, jau; teu, tau. Words such as ^rj k-idi,
~h- uh, j|t liih, TlflLf^uh, ji^'v uli, y\ uh, are written in this one mode
exclusively.
ten tsoh, oh, loh,; twiu, an, lau; and tseu, eu, Im. Tin characters ^. iJ/JI?
^jS, ^^' ^, art' written yoh, kioh, yob, lioh. hioh; also van, kian. van,
liau, hiau, and yiu, kieu, yen, lieu, hitu. Tlu- characters ji^jUl. are
written yuh, kMuh. or nh, kMih. The characters J^' i^*'0,Jire given as
ko, k'oh, poh, or keh, k'eh, peh. Thecharactefh ^jX* I I' |-] . are written
S All these words are retained in the short tone, while they lake the long-
62 MAXDAUIN .illAMMAR. I'AKT f.
work need not therefore surprise us. In that city it still exists, though with-
out the tliree final consonants k, t, p, which are preserved in these tables.
The hia-p'ing or fifth tone is wanting, and the soft initials are found through
all the four tone-classes. The only difference from the older dictionaries is
mandarin dialect. Amone^ the old final consonants, the onlv one that it
shows to have been at all disturbed is t. That letter is omitted after the
vowel i; thus "0 is pronounced t'sih, not t'sit. This work also aids in ex-
"
and were correlate to ch, not to ts and sh. So also -^now pronounced shV,
was formerly as the /P4 yp^ 'Kwang-yu* states read dji, and so it is written
in the inscription alluded to. The opposite process has taken place in many
words, t" beinff prefixed to s and sh in the fifth tone; e. g. jj^' rb ' ^^^' read
pfr: -",1:3
in the ^^ pj^ ziang, zhang, as correlate to s, sh, but in mandarin they are
t'siang, c'hang.
about A. D. 1000 to 1500, as that which \*'itnes8ed the formation of the mo-
12 It'tlie loss of the true souiulol'k, and li, hcture thf vowels i, ii, bo
such as ki, kii, are not read with a sibilant inliial, but with the hard sound k.
Ann>n;^ writers on mandarin oidy those of the ])rosent century, so far as I luive
seen, mention this change in the value of k and li. Perhajjs however, a lean-
ing to autiiority may have so far influenced the transcribers of Illanchu sounds,
and writers native and foreign on the kwan-hwa, as to lead them not to dejjart
country. The flnal m now reaches no farther north than the Yan<^-tsi-
kiang. A triangle whose vertex is the Po-yang lake in Kiang-si, and having
one of its base angles in Kwang-si, and the other midway up the coast of
Fnh-kien embraces probably the whole region where it is used. The final k
still preserved in parts of Kiang-nan is pronounced with an indistinctness,
which seems to indicate its approaching disappearance. The same is true of
the initials b, g, d, v, dz, and z, in that region. They are often heard near-
ly like the corresponding hard letters k, t, p, ts, s, &c. towards which, they
are tending.
are in the oUler dictionaries pronounced with m. This shews that words in
f and p, were the first to throw off the final m, as they have also done in the
than either, for it retains m after f, as in q]^^ fan spelt hwam', though not
after p', pp e. g. ix'ing written pMii. In Medhurst's Corean V'ocabulajy
these words are spelt with m, shewing that the j)rimunciation of that work
CHAPTER VIII.
1 Old langucuje. As Latin which was once spoken over all western Europe,
spreading over the whole countiy. Differences of dialects were noticed indeed
as early as the Han dynasty, and a work of that time still extant, yj ^
,fang .yen records many examples of such variations. But it speaks of words
frao-ments from each. Its alphabetic elements were briefly, such as,
1. Initials.
2. Finals.
Vowels, i, e, a, o, u.
3. Medials.
4. Tones.
This is also the system of the Indo-Chinese languages, which are of com-
mon origin with the Chinese; except that the number of their tones difters,
lects \vi\\ now be made, so far as seems necessary to exj)lain tlicir origin, and
to sliew what portions of tliem belonf:^ to the old language of the country,
(a.) Northern provificcs. Here the greatest changes have taken ])lace,
eight initial and one final consonant having been exchanged for others, three
finals lost, one tone exchanged for others, and a new tone formed. Tliat the
systcnn just detailed prevailed here can be shewn uidisputiibly from the cir-
that the court resided, when the Buddhist books were translated. It is th(.'ir
dialects that would form the standard from which the Jai)anese transcriptions
and many of the dictionaries containing the old Chinese pronunciation were
successively made. That the Japanese transcriptions, wliich furnisii tiie
Chinese words, were taken from the northern and not any southern dialect,
is certain from the fact that the second of them is called the Go-won ^)g ^
from the Tartar dynasty of that name wliicli nded in northern China, a. d.
(b.) K'uing-nan and Cheh-hianrj. Along the southern bank of the Yang-
tsi-kiang and a little to the north of it, the old initials are all preserved, as
are four upper and four lower, and they often difi\'r in infiexion as well as
elevation, so that they may Ije counted as being from four to eight in numlxr.
The hard consonants and aspirates take the upper scries, the soft consonants
and nasals the l<jwer. The vowels are common to lK)th scries. Probal»ly in
the time of the old system of four tones, the same distributions of initial con-
sonants into an upjwr and lower series prevailed, for it is dilfieult to see how
othenvise words such ius VX. i ,wang, .wang could Ixi distinguished. Both
Si'i MASDAf'.IN l.KAMMAR. TART I
taking the first tone, the difiference must have bjv'n marked by a change in
to reading. The former is the older pronunciation, and the latter more near
to mandarin.
The cities of Su-cheu, Haug-cheu, Niiigpo and Wen-cheu with the sur-
Local dictionaries for these dialects are not in use. Th3 old dictionaries,
radical and tonic, answer every purpose, because the tones and initials sub-
stantially agree. I have met with only one local dictionary belonging pro-
is called Q jg^ _|£l pH]. It has four tones with two series of initials. In
the lower series, j, dz and z are much confounded, h disappears before w, n of-
ten precedes i, and w is often v. The finals n, ng, coincide before i, while m,
The city of Hwei-cheu has a dialect of its own. The soft initial consonants
are exchanged for hard and aspirated ones. The finals n and ng, are in many
words entirely omitted in the colloquial form of speech,"' though retained in
reading. The other consonant finals none of them occur. For peculiarities
soft initials have all been replaced by aspirates. Of the six final consonants
only k is wanting. The tones are seven, and are irregular in pitch.
At Nan-k'an<jr-fu on the east of the Po-vanjc lake, the old initials are
retaftied, and of the finals only k and t are wanting. The tones are fom-, in
hard and asj)irate initials are used in the lower series of tones irregularly.
(d.) Hu.-nan. In many parts of this province, the soft initials still lin-
ger,t but ill the city of C'hang-sha, the spoken dialect has the five tones of
t 1 noticed them in conversing with natives of the following places. —Ngan-hwa^C lu i"
LHAPTKU J<. ON" Tin: I'AIvKN'T STEM OF TIIH MODKIIN DIALECTS. S?
mandarin, and the aspirated and other initials distributed in the same manner,
(e.) Candm. The llaklc.i dialect J^ '^<. u\ \ «poken in many parts of
westward, and to.jk up their abode in many country districts, where thay
now form about one third of the ])opulation. The soft initialt" arc in tliis
dialect displaced by aspirates, or which is the .same thing, all words iu the
the same with the sixth and seventh. The Hakka dialect differa veiy little
ularly. The six final consonants are all in use. The tones are eight and
are regular in elevation; i. e. they correspond as actually enunciated, so far as
their highness or lownesa is concerned, with the names they bear. There is a
circumstance in which the tones of words in this dialect agree better with the
ancient system than with that which now prevails. Many words with nmte
and sibilant initials, e. g. ^r^ fu, tjl chung are pronounc^id in the lower shang-
characters, which formerly belonged to the second tone-chi«sa8 they are marked
in the dictionaries, and had soft initials v, j, etc. They afterwards passed
into tlie third tone-class, where they are now found in all mandarin and in
Chinese words assiime in the lanjruasjre of Annam. Manv of the hani conso-
nants are softened, instead of the reverse process taking place as in other parts
of China. Thus vfftW i^ di', both ti' in mandarin, are both pronounced
di' in Hai-nan. B and p are both used for many words, whose initials are w
and fin mandarin; e. g. ^ ban, ^ p*u.
C'hang-sha-fii, T aing-t'siuen O'J^C '" Hf^ntr* Ji«"u-fu; Yunc-cheu fu 7jv»/l|/l'J" noar the
boundary nf Kwans;-si, YiiPn-ling-hieiW /LrX *M» in Slipn-choii near the Si-c'hwen boundary,
part of that province, in its vowels and consonants, but the tones differ. There
are eight tone-classes including three subdivisions of the ^ Jj^ k'ii sheng.
The oltl finals ni, k, t, p, are all in use, but in the colloquial ng, n, m, are
freq\iently nasalized, and k, t, p, often omitted.
k^wang' i'f kwa», Ifkwai, j'f kut, || kui», PRI k'o, ]$. kau', ^|
,kau, 5^5 kio. Words inch commence with t, as 't' 5Si jfKi' p4^' -^5
ip§
3u? J^Up u ^, ^^^
.
many others. Words in f commence with p,
/t- B is found for w, in tIC) {Qt, 3?' 1$* 1^' t' X- ^S'^^ f*^^"^^^ 1^^^-
forey, wand i, in J|L' 0' ^ff' JS' ^' hP' jlL' Itc? ^^"^^ ^"'^ny others.
Ch and c'h, are found for s and sh, ~p chap, ^ ,c'heng, |^ 'c'heng, ^))i
given the colloquial is preferred to the reading sound as being the older,
N<r raised above the line denotes that it is nasalized as final n in French.
N and m are also often pronounced in the same manner, but in the reading
sound ng, n, m, are always restored. When the nuite finals k, t, p, are
dropped in the colloquial, they are also restored in the reading pronunciation.
[f.] Fuh-kicn. For the dialect of C'hang-chcu which may be considered
as representing the southern part of the province, almost the same descrip-
tion as that just given of the Tie-chin dialect would serve. There are the
same initials and finals differing only in particular cases; e. g. Tke, low, ^
nin ^ g'fj niong, IjIa "u" ? \7V P^'*^-
^^^ ^'^^^^ dialects the initials ts and t's,
sh and f, give place uniformlv to ch, c'h, s and hw, except where ch occurs
i'oY sh, andp for f The sounds bat for }p\ , iiinl ji or ju for -^,seem to con-
tain vestiges of the early soft initials b and dz, which were formerly assigned
CHArTEU S. ON TlIF, PARENT STKM ON THE MODEUN DIALECTS. 89
to those characters. For the old initial nj;, whitli is usually preservetl in the
in the Tie-eliiu collo(iuial. The characters. fiEj' |^- are also examples of
this ant)inaly, which occurs as a uniform law in the I l;ikka dialect. In w.oids
ending with m, p, the Tie-chin follows the old system more closely than the
southern Fuh-kien; e, g. / (j- J|__' hwam are reatl hwan. in the last men-
tioned dialect, while^(v;hwa]) is also read hwat. Both the.se dialects agree in
refusing to admit m and p, when the initial is j), hut oidy the Fuh-kien re-
nunciatiou are briefly, that in Kiang-nau some instances, though few, occiu*
of the same initials; e.g. yj} bang, ^j-X p'u, J^^" .gwan,|ri| men*', tli.it in
'Shan-si v occurs for w, that at T'ien-tsin j occurs for y, and that generally
anti(|uated colloquialisms where they occur, tend to support this view. Fur-
ther, native critics have detected many of these initials in studying old books
as is shown farther on, and the Buddhists have at intervals changed their
spelling for Sanscrit words, when alterations in sounds required it e. g. IP
heng, changed to y^ k'ing ^;J|| k'ia for Ganga, these characters being at
that time doubtless read Gang-ga. So also j>']! .(••Inii has the value din, in
The dialect of Fuh-cheu in the north of the same jjrovince, ditVer.s much
from those that precede. The finals n, m, are replaced by ng, and t, p, are
omitted. The tones are seven a.s at Chang-cheu. ^lany of the colloquial
initials are like those just descrilMjd; e. g. kiang. teing*.
f^ JJ jI'I'^o-:^
Ts, t's, sh and f, also givt> place to ch,c'h, sand f, T is heard in some words
as if it were d. The initial j has its place supplied byyorn. Ng at the
tained before the v^wel i, in some words where ng formerly stood, as ^§ gi^
This old initial is well preserved in many words in the dialects of Fuh-cheu
and Su-cheu, where / (' is called ngwei and nga, and /\ ngoh and ngoh.
In the province of Kwei-cheu, it is common to begin all words in y with a
4 The information gained on the old lan<xua2re from the sources alreadv
and g, to V and h), seem to belong to an older stage of the language. So also
m to w. Following the guidance of the Buddliist translations, these earlier
initial letters were not found in the general language, after the seventh cen-
tury of .ur era. (
/} . The loss of the short-tone finals belongs to the same period. The
change of the final m to u, did not occur till the I4tli century as has been seen.
The coincidence of some Anamese sounds with those of Fuh-kien, as in the
c'lnveii, in niaiulariii. In Anamese, 1^ tnivcn, rtJ bang, IJljC * anli, ^^JQi t^'»- So also t pre-
kien, and eastern Kwang-tun«r, viz. b.f whicli also occurs in the Japanese
transcriptions of early Chinese sounds.
/> Chaiujes in vowels. This view of the mother lan<,'uage from which man-
darin and the Dthcr modern diak'cts have s})rung, would be incomplete with-
out a reference to the former condition of the vowel sounds. The principal
variations ai-e jijiven in the following table, where each character rej)resents
many other tens of woi'ds which have gone through the same change.
Examples.
92 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. PART I.
lan<;uage that exist in Biuklhist and Chinese native books, and in modern
dialects have not been unnoticed by native A recent writer^' remarks,
critics.
that from Buddliist books it appears that formerly Ja liad the same in-
f'l,
itial as ^- p'u; i. e. they were both bu, being used to represent the same
Sanscrit sound. He also shews from other sources, thatylx, 1a> M^t'iow
called fuh and fu were piimarily pronounced with the initial b. which after-
words became v and then f. He also observes that ^ was formerly men,
and illustrates his remark by the Kiang-nan colloquial pronunciation of |JJX
viz. men. He then proceeds to shew that many words in ch formerly com-
menced with t. Thus, by means of old dictionaries and the interchange of
characters, he identifies [g] chih withi|^-teh,^j chuli with ^ tuh.f p ,c]iu
with Brtu, i@, chui with Xyl ,tui.:|: The Fuh-kien and Tie-chiu pronun-
ciation agrees remarkably with this author's investigations, the words in
question being there read [M-tit, 4^'tiek, fJ^ ,ti,^ ,tui.
quent books of poetry give the means of investigating the old language to the
appears on examination that in the Chen, T'sin and Han dynasties (b.c. 1100
to A. D. 250), there were but three tone-classes, the third or ^ Jf^, being
not yet formed. Under the "Wei and Tsin families, a.d. 200 to 400, many
is yC HnT in the work called \ ^ ^J 5c ^f^ ^' Shih kiachai yang sin
luh. ThLs writer, a native of Kia-ting near Su-cheu, lived at the close of the last century.
and ban. The values he gives to some other characters, arc yp put, "jj Jbut, ;^/X.puj)r ,p'u,x7
tok, long,t'iu, chiu, cliwan, chi, t i, .ti, lim. Of these, there occurs in Morrane's Cochin-Chinese
words in the '2nd unci 4tli toni'-classes, united to loiin the 3rd, whicii then
jnukes its first appeuranec. At tlie same time, many words in tlio p'inf-slieni'
l)a.sscd into the other tliree ehisses, and the li»ur tone-eiasKes were thus com-
pleted." He adds, ''Formerly words were arranged in two great grouj)s. The
first contained the modern p'ing-sheng and shang-sheng; the second the
connected with the jdionetics. In several instances words in the third and
fourth tone-classes have a common phonetic. E. g."^ kau is tlic phonetic
of the characters, t Of kuh, 'An ^^"li-riy 1^"1>5 ^'^^-
% this author's researches
it a}ipears that it rhymes with short-tone words in k, four times in the 8hi-
king, and once in the Yih-king. Of the words which take 3^ clu and \^
hai, for their ]>honetics, e. g.^iH t^li'i's IJw ^'i'^l*? three-fourths aiv in the short
tone. Both these words are repeatedly found rhyming with short-lone words
in the Shi-king with a final t.* In other cases, the phonetic has remained
in the short-tone, while some characters that contain it have jttiased over to
the third tone-class; e.g.pjY" ^^ui, is in the Shi-king pronounef-d in the short
1) Double pronunciation explained. These views will ai.s > ]»- found use-
ful in rxplaining many double j)ronunciations of th(! .same characters met
with in books. Thus^U I'*'*
"'' 1"''^ '• ' •
I -J I'^'% & toh or tir.f ^ luh or
feu', 1p tsoh (^r t.s.)'( ||\)( is the same word written ditfeniu I \
),;*,vi; oh or
•'i'.
IK •'^'^''' •*• ^^"'' ^^^J y^^^ """ ' ' -^^ *^'"^^ ^^' ^^^'S ^''^' exMiuplesof words
that have pas.seil from t he short tone to t he third. In such cases, the jjrini-
'"
• Othrr wohIb placrd in thci»hort toDC by thi-s Btilhor, nrc y\.' .'''\''
\ /jv.'
>|X' T'J"
['
M<^ X." J L' w«l»» final t. »"J ^^'ll' fi'"' ^ WL' /N- ^^d'. The chnroctcn. pM-^I^Ul:.
much used as phonetics for wonls in ihc chott icm- in >'-> ilius .tliown
i .iri
hy Chc Shi-kinir iolu\c
itive sense is retainetl in tlio short tone, while the tleriveJ sense Ijekmgs to
the ctlicr. The same is true ol" words in tlie first and second, transferred to
the tliird tones; e. g. 3("J[* hau', fo /ore, from ^jh 'him. (/oo</, "j^ shi-, a
messenger, from 'shi, to send; 4K. i', to dress, from ,i,cIotJies;p'^ iV, to ad-
dress, from 'ii, words; ^J ting', to nail, from ^ting, o nail. So also |i|jj
third tone-class, which would naturally result from that class having been in
a state of formation, when the new sem5e was given, or Avhen the necessity of
provinces, when the short-tone words were changing theii- tone, they fell into
that which was newly formed, viz. hia' .p'ing, in preference to one of the
old ones.
That the third tone is not exclusively used for the new meaning of words
may perhaps also be shewn by examples. Thus J^ 'c'lm, tod well, to man-
age a case, and ^^ c'hu', ajjiace; ^ .c'heng, to Jill, and sheng', flouri-
shing; ^ 'she, to throw aicay, and she', a cottage. Which is the earlier
meanino- in such words is however uncertain. The noim and the verb have in
each case classical authority, but it is customary among the natives to apply
the distinctive tonal mark to the verb sense only, implying that the other
were partial, while those of more recent date are exliaustive. Thus it appears
to have been only part of the words having the initials k. t, p, and m, that
assumed h, ch, f and w, instead of those letters. So it was only part of the
words in. the second and fourth tones, that united to from a third tone. But
in the modern changes all the soft initials, and hard finals have been lost
together, Avhile all the short-tone words have ])assed together to the other
tones.
searches into the early form of the language, is that there were at first only
If tlie foimer, it is tlio same tiling as saying that tlwiv weiv at first no tones
at all, lor tin.' long tone Liubiactul words ending in ng, n, ni, and tlu; vowels
while the short tone approjiriated the finaLs, k, t, p. The ditierence of tone,
has been carried farther back, than was needed to shew the characteristics of
centuries. It is from this that nuindariu and the other dialects sprang. A
description has been given of it in this (•hai)ter, supplying the means of re-
storing it from the modern pronunciation. At least the })rinciples of such a
restoration can be stated in something like the following manner. Join the
first and fifth tone-classes, changing the hard and aspirated initials of the
latter into the coiTesponding soft consonants; e. g. t' to d, and s to z,. Re-
store the lengthened juh-sheng words to their short form, and affix to them
the final consonants k, t, p, using as authorities the dictionaries and dialects.
Change the hard initials of a certain part of the words in the tliiid and fourth
classes to the corresponding .soft initials; e. g. t to d, and ch to j, relpng for
aid as before on the dictionaries and dialects. Transfer a part of the words
having soft initials from the third to tlie second class, following the guidance
of the dictionaries. Change final n in many words to m, and alter the vowels
These processes having Ix'en performed, and the old sounds of Chinese clm-
Four Ix^oks with Chu-hi's commentary, the new critical editions of tho de-i
96 ilANDAIllN GrwVMMAH I'ART II.
tionaries fjj
j /j^JiT-va, Jiiid fjji '3^ Shwoh-won and otlier.s. Hlnco tliat time
have simply adopted the s])elling of an earlier period, and are therefore of no
PAKT ir.
CHJI'T/:/,' I.
Introdl'i'tukv.
1 In the preceding chapters it has been shewn, that the mandarin pro-
nunciation is spread over the north and west of China. It has a better title
form of the language, that used in the metropolitan cities, and recognized
with the statement that mandarin is the popular dialect over the greater part
a dialect. Now the usual mandarin pronouns ^X '^^'^S kJ^ id, |tli ,t'a, 7,
thou, he; ^ die', /J y 'na, this^ thai, with the other common particles, pre-
vail in the popular language in the same parts of China, where the mandarin
An exception occurs in the case (^f Hang-cheu. where the mandarin particles
speech of inilividiuils.
is I^A^ fe <^1>'" *J»^ Ci»c)yang*, Mj/s; /j|i J^-'na 'li, whcre^ na' 'li, //<ert';
> f ^ -na yang-, which kiud^ mi' yang', that kind; t3 LL tsi* 'ki, aeff;
S If ]^ shih 'mo, ('mo) .shen 'mo, ('mo) whof/ \^, J&j 'tsen 'mo,
('mo) /<o </-.'' ^P .tn, (///; -^ ko\\, each; ^ ,H\e, a littk <>/'; fVj tWu si >/n
o/j)0S8eiisife;^\j |pj .lio .tung, <6'///< ; [n] liiaiig'. /o^rrnvAv; U:tsai-, rt<;3^IJ
tau- (motion), to; ||i W.^ung ,si, « thiuj 'i^ Jjl^ i]i'- fj'J >Uv 't'i, shi 7
.t'sing, rt;i M/^rtiV, Mf«7; Jjii;;! kih (kei), j/m'; pjc P*'i'; auxiliary verb or
f(
the passive; ^^ .na. JL^ ']ia. ?]'.]' ,t.siang, ^^ ^r;A't', instrumental auxil lanes.
J liau, fii'ju of the past; \iXt shwoh, to .say; y]\ puh, nut: } },/ |:J
.niei
Mi ti''l IM- Wv >^l»eng' li' 'kwang hiim' chih 'kiai, hnperiaf homilies onthe
dutieti of life plain!1/ paraphrased; and )\U^ v)^-
^'* llung-l.u-mung. Dream
of the lied Chamber , u novel of the present dynasty. The>e rw.> wuiks are
in Peking mandarin. So also is a more recent novel, called fjp ^-^ ^^ |^
'P-in ,hwa ']iau kien*.
pronouns used in Shan-tung. It was written in the 12th century, and its
l<iau-li?E ^0} Ji^' The two CoiL-^lm; Si-yoii-ki "j5j -^ fiC- Narrative of
7 SoniP "works classed among romances are written in a style midway l)e-
tween that <»f conversation and that of the books ; e. g. ". (^ i^. ,San-
kwoli-chi'. History of th<' Three binr/doms. The wide interval between the
copiousness ol" the conversational medium, and the terseness found in books,
the novels have come into existence, as pilj n3i bwa' shwoh, the story says,
junction with mandarin. See for examples the collection J[5^X ;^Cliueh-
peh-k'ieu, Bool: of Dramas.
10 Moral discourses for poi)ular use are often prepared in a colloquial
form. Besides the paraphrase to the Sacred edict noticed above, there is the
^<, )^ fi|ljf iiji5 Kia-t'ing-kiang-hwa, Moral lectures for fainihj iise, with
JSuhdivlslons in Style.
11 If mandarin be compared with the book style ^T jX. '^^^^ .wen, the
some particles and most of the nouns, adjectives, and verbs, will be found
the same in each. .Many particles however ditfer, and a large number of words
Src 7C /v FH Tai Ptl Vuon Jon peh .chung k'lih (c'liii), nlitcd by ?/^ -^ J^
Tsang-tsin-shnh. The pronunciation given in this work in syllabic spelling is that ofChcu-teh-t'sing,
corresponding closely with the spelling contained in his dictionary Chung-yuen-yin-yiin already dcs-
rrihed.
CHAPTER. 1 NATIVK I.lTEUATrilK ON TllK MANDARIN IHALECT. 99
liave gone out of use. Tlie Ku-weu is terse and expressive, iiiiiiiii<»- to ''ive
the greatest {[uantity of iiu'aniiii^ in the fewest possible words. Tii<.* kwan-
hwa is copious and full of compound terms and rejK'titions. These however
carefully confirm to the national standard of good taste 3c J^T. •^^'^''» 'h)
which rules the kwan-hwa as well as the Ku-wcn. The kwan-hwa bein<>-
addressed only to the ear, while the Ku-wen speaks to tin* eye, it iK'camc
more copious througli the repetition of ideas that was necessary to convey
the meaning.
12 These two styles are the national growth of the language, hut that of
the literary essays jX ^ .Wen ,chang is forced and artificial, and is regard-
ed as an inferior accom})lishment by native scholars who can write in the
em mandarin.
more to the grammar of the pi j3C Ku .wen, than to that of the true kwan-
hwa [^ ^1 lin ,ehen ,kwan hwa', and it will therefore 1>o found but spar-
ingly illustrated in this work. A certain magistrate of a district was d<'grad»(l
])y his superior in otH(M', l)<>cause be constantly used phra.ses such as /,\\ |nj
.jan .ri, however, andjn /^i tan' .shi', i>t/t, in common conversation. His
fondness for bookish expressions was considered to indicate, that he was in-
cuArrKn ii
On Words.
1 Old icords. Many of the words used in the modern spoken dialect are
X
— J-
'ho, /re. t$
|-r-f
'liai, sea. %
^
pf^
fu', v/c/<.
fj^^ heh', (hei) ft^ac^*. 'fl -li'"?:- ^^^ ^^o- /rJ y^mg'? ^o ««e.
2 Some compounds of two words each found in books are also employed.
TliL-y are examples of the principle of combination, by which two words are
In many such cases, the sense is one and indivisil)le, and the characters(in
the colloquial language) inseparable.
3 The same jthenomenon meets us in the history of words that has been
found to exist in the sounds that express them. Time changes their mean-
ing as it does their sound. Thus, many old words are retained in compounds,
but have lost their original signitication. "^^^ \-\ 'k'eu, mouth, has been
j)id talker: ]\ \~l .men k'eu. door: H ^C ItJ f^ k'ou k'i' 'liang
yang', his spvceh is different ; \-\ yj' k'eu Avai% beyond China proper;
fr/fq !~' r^^^'^" k'eu, ritsfo7n hnuf>c : |-l I'll Tj yih 'k'eu ,kwan .t'sai,
CHAI'TE/J 2. (IN wouns, 101
« coffin. ^P ^' 11^ ycu 'k'eu .t'sai tili, he can talk well; PS P f,^
5^" .sui 'k'eu shwoh \\\\a', talking at random.
4 So also Q mull (mu'), the original word for c/y^'/has'given placo to|it:
'y*-'*^ jtsingor 'yen alone, as in |JiV ||1< liiali 'yen. bJ-M/ieyc^. It isliow-
lift
E. g.
ever employed in conibinution with other words in derived senses. ^\^
j^ I
-j .t'i muh, a theme. UA \ ] -t'eu nuih, a chief.
The primitive word for '-head" U 'slieu, has been replaeed byi^ .t'eu,
5 Some old Avords are used in new senses alone, and not simply in combi-
nation, the old signification being retained in books; e. g. lUi ,t*a, lormeiiy
meant other, but now signifies he, so also 'liau, originally a verb to des-
J
troy, is now used ay a particle expressive of past time, but occasionally also
in its earlier sense. Most of the uumeratives or numeral particles are words
which onco had a dear sense. This in several instances was lost, when they
C) Xeio words, ^lany new words have been introduced, e. g-'JiH l<i"Ji) '^'i'
compound substantive 'rf 'to the ear: '(\^ .niang, mother: ifij ,tan,
/o car-
ry with a yoke over one. shoulder; JM ~^, .tan 'tsi, n bamboo yoke used
by ])0)ier8.
7 On the subject of changes in words much has l)een done to aid inves-
tigation by the native lexicogra])hers. Thf Work called Jj Q" .hing .yen,
ceutury, treats on the differences in regard to words, that tlien existed in the
various ]:)rovincesi.Qf, China. It says, for instance, that the word c'hwen, a
hoat or Junk, wa^ then used in K wan-si (Shan-si), wliile the okl book term
thencalledyC shi, which is the word used in books. Tsien ^^j the modern
term was then used in Shen-si. The same authority says, that 4^ )'/i1"sheh
tsi', ^0 c?'0.9s «/(?n-?/, had then given place to ^ i 15 kwo' tu', the modern
phrase.
S By helps of this sort, the history of words may be traced back, and
it can thus be shewn that the terms used in the ancient books constituted
the colloquial phraseology of the time. This might in itself be regarded as
i:>robable, but on the authority of books like that now referred to, it may be
proved by shewing that a large number of words at present obsolete, formerly
the language of that early date was as terse when spoken, as when it was
committed to ^vl•iting. With the pronunciation now in use, it is difficult to
conceive, how the book style could ever have constituted a medium for con-
njTus, antithesis, &c. such as is found in the modern spoken dialect, appears
necessary to bring the book style into a form fitted for viva voce intercom-
munication of ideas. If however, the great changes in the sounds that have
taken place are duly considered, there is ground for supposing that a much
closer resemblance formerly existed between the spoken and written language
than at present, and this notonly in the use of the same words, but in brevity
and in the mode of constructing sentences.
compositions, for example the oldest parts of the Shu-king and Yih-king,
are in a poetical form. Native scholars from their accurate knowledge of the
rhymes of the old language, are all conscious of this. Poetry indicates the
existence of literary art, so that the pure colloquial dialect would be subjected
to various changes before beino; written down.
CIIAPTER 2. ON WORDS. lO.'J
tinctions and attention to euphony. The words may be observed to fall into
connectctl with each other by particles, form complete sentences. The exami-
nation of the groups refen-ed to is in great part the i)rovince of etymology.
Their union by the help of particles into sentences, it is tlu- office of syntax
kwo' shi' ,i shih liang' kien', the chief thing in the support of the j)copIe, is
simpli/ {that they should have) food and clothing. Here yang-hwoh is a
keep alive. Peh sing men, is a noun, consisting of peh, o«e hundred, sing,
fnnihj name, and men, the common plural particle. Peh sing, means all the
families, the people. Tih is the sign of the genitive or possessive case. K«'n
pen is a noun, consisting of two words both meaning root. Puh kwo', 7iot
kien', food and clothing, those two things, may be considered as a substan-
tive group, in which food and clothing constitute the compound noun, and
these two, with the word "things" understood, are added to shew that the
10 There are here several instances of the mode in which comjiound verbs,
nouns, and adverbs, are formed. They originate either in the juxtaposition
which los(.' their independent character in that of the compound they assist
to fonn.
1 This peculiarity bidongs much l.'ss to the book language than to the
collo(iuial. Both styles are given in the colloquial etlition of the Sacred edict
lx)ok language "^ K" <1 ^, ^E M ^ f^ y'"'^'' .min ,chi 'pen, tsai,
,ii ,i shih. The meaning is tho sam««, but it is expressed nuich more briefly.
One word instead of two, is used for fn nourish and also for?*oo/. Min. poo-
I'M MAM'AillN (illAM.MAi;. PART II.
ph\ is a lH)c>k wdrd. Chi", the book particle for the possessive case, isrcj)laced
iu colloquical by Hv ^i^^- '^^^ii ii, are prepositions meaning in. In this in-
stance, tsai is a verb, consists in, while ti repeats the sense »t, and forms with
another part of speech, and are then treated as single words. In the term
l)eh-sing, people, literally hundred names, the two words, while they main-
tain their relation to each other as adjective and substantive, constitute in
the general syntax of the sentence a single noun. Tlieir individual sense and
mutual relation are not indeed destroved, but in common use are entirelv
ibrgotten.
tih, a fisherman, .\\,Jish, is the regimen to 'ta, to catch, yet the three words
together may be properly treated as a substantive. In (ix Jt rj> If | W
j\^ 'kai cheng' 'ni .men tih ,sin, set your hearts rvjht, the adjective Jccheng',
correct, is closely combined with the verb 'kai, to change, and they need to
be considered together as a verb group, having the same power of governing
a substantive that belongs to any simple verb. In this case they govern j{^
,sin, heart. Wlien however, these words are considered by themselves, they
are seen to iiave a relation to each other, such as is properly discussed under
that part of grammar called syntax. Cheng' qualifies the action expressed
by the word
D-U -y
kai. Such phrases as ^ J\\ ^ 'mai puh .lai, I cannot buy;
M zi-u
A^ f^ '"lai pull 'k'i (c'hi), / cannot afford to buy, can be viewed as
compound verbs, or as moods of verbs, or they may be analyzed, and shewn
to be under the control of the laws of syntax like longer and more complex
sentences.
CHAPTER 3. DIVISION OF WORDS INTO I'AUTS OF SPEKCII. 105
CHAPTER III
it is usually found to contain words ut' two kinds, viz. some tliat liavca sense
of their own independent of tlieir use in any particular sentence, and others
tliat are emi)loyed only forgiammatieal purpo.ses, to express relations between
words, to connect sentences and clauses, and to com])lete the sentence, so that
it may be clear in meaning and elegant in form. /\^ Wyil J |'|p ^^ j]^
^ -^ J jt'ien 'wan 'liau ,tu shi' shui' kiau' k'ii' (c'hir) 'liau, it is htc,
thct/ are all gone to bed. In this sentence tu and liau mean nothing when
viewed apart from the context. They are em^jloyed as subordinate words or
ters, while the auxiliary words or those which are non-signitiuint, they term
actions (verbs) and things (nouns). Tli<>se two kinds of Avords are CJilledyQ"
-jf^ hwoh tsi', living characters, and yQ -^ 'si tsi, dead charact('rs. Tlie
apparent, when the character of many of them is kept in view. They may
be used as noun, adjective, or verb. To place such a word as ^- hiau', in
any one of these three parts of speech would U- iuconveiiient, for it belongs
equally to all. In the phrase t^^^ -f- \\\] -^3^ ,rhunghiau' tsi6hiSy/r/«V/7y,
Jilial piety, temperance and uprighinesSj it is a substantive; in ^- "j ^
3^ hiau' 'tsi' hiau' 'nu. Jilinl 6ons and daughters, it is an adjective; in ^-
[(K; MAN'DAlilN GKAMMAU. TAUT II.
only bt' properly classed under a wider (.livision of words, such as that made
words and particles.
use of by the Chine.se, consisting of significant
classed in succession under the same three parts of speech; 'Jp sin' in ^
t^V !i}il' iti lii'i^i' ^i' ,chung sin', flkd lyietij, hrothcrln love, JiMUy and
truth/nl; ll=] ,siang sin', to
trustworthiness; 'jfj W( sin' shih, Jionest, jfrf
believe; to trust to. 1^}^ ,chung in^ Si ^'R H tsin' ,chung pan' kwoh,
to be grcdeful to the state and he jicrfect injidelity; ^Jj. ^B. .cliung .c'hen, a
^ t'ai' li' hai', very severe; ^ tl t^'^' l^ai'^tsi', i'o /??/«re ones-self;
^ wu' as^^^ |ij\ pei' wu', ^er^g-jt/^^ij^^ ^ wu' .fang, a sleeping room : \i%
{E ?]'P|1H
^^'^^^ tsai' 'na 'H, tvhere shall I sleep? ^ k-ii (c'hii) in
^ |fFJ
..
..• hiang' (s), the place to ivhich he is gone; ^^ k'ii' .nien, last year;
'£^ ijli j k'ir kwo' 'liau, 7 Aave gone there. It is the position of such
words in the group and the sentence to which they belong, that determines
to what part of speech they should be referred.
Some examples will shew that there is the same difficulty in deciding
f)
to what part of speech, many of the particles should be assigned. Thus fjlj
tbe o-voup of which it forms apart, qjt HU -t'sung .t'sien, before; H'J I I
.t'sien .men, f Ac /ro^^c^oor; IJt^ll l^lj ,hiung .t'sicn, before my breast, or be-
•31
\t Jien .mang, immediately; j^i fi M 3t ^ f P fM. M7
• 'IIAPTEU 4. ON THE liUBSTANTlVE^S. J(»7
fu' jt'sin .lien .11 'tsi ,tii ,sluui sliuli 'liaii. the father with his son lucrc toge-
6 From these examples it jij)iH'ar.s, tliat tlie Cliiufso do ii-.t wifliout reason
content themselves with a twofold division of words, into those that are signi-
The natives study the characters one by one, and if they consider them in
their grammatical connection witli tach other, it is only in the study of the
examined, if only for its pliilological interest, shewing as it does, how an ex-
tensive system of grouping, entirely compensates for the absence of termina-
tions and prefixes to words. By the laws of combination, the part of speech
to which a word belongs is at once seen, the cases of nouns and the moods
and tenses of verbs are clearly expressed, and various kinds of derivatives are
fonued among all the principal parts of speech. The accidence of western
<'if.\rri':n iv.
On the »Slbstantivk,
all substantives in the northern provinces and sounded like err or a single II.
lOS MANDAUIN r.U AMMAR. PART II.
Formation of Compounds.
the maternal relative, mother) ^^r ^Ii ,hiang ,t'siu, village relativesX^ },%
.yang ho', foreign goods; p) f [^ peh (pai) .yin, silver; TJC ^K 'shui .yin,
of anxiety ;j[^ \]f/j ,sin .c'hang, the heart; ^ J^ ^ tsah ho' p'u', shop
a rib; ~nf
~j" jkung ,shi
^§ 'mu ,chu, a soiv; /J^ 7^ .p'i k'i' (c'h), disposition; ^ {j\\\
3. The WHOLE PRECEDES ITS PART a GENITIVE itS NOMINATIVE, and SUb
5
kia .t'ing, family hall; ^^ ,lda .tan^y, fainily hall where ancestors are
10 orshipped, and hence ancestral tablets; 3iP t'R kioh (chiau) ,ken, //('<7:/)i;|i
tai, a hag).§\vi\ ^ .t'ung p'en, a copper basin Ql ifj^ 't'u tun', a/i earthcrn
nvmnd; |}ij "iPi;,* .c'hieu tai', silk sash; X} T'N shih .k'iau, a stone bridge;
* First, (he principal thins is mentioned, and tUcn that which belongs to it, or is said of it?
CHAPTER 4. FORMATION OF COMFOUKPS. 109
especially relative nouns, as in Xjj* yjjf ,ko ,ko, elder brother; y\^ "aC* 'ai'
i'Q.\\ aged hulif, W^ '\\k hxqV inoV, younger sister; '^|| ^|1[ 'tsie 'tsie, a
yoking lady; '{Ij '{I J 'niii 'nui, a married lady.
'tien, a very little; >|»i|< ^IX* yQ y'li jSi ,si .ri, a very /i7//c.
meaning;, thus/^ jtMcn, a day, hecomes ,t'ien ,t'ien, daily; and yj yjJA
J\ .nan .nan 'nil 'nil, means ?/?(» (tnd women in grent pi/whrr. nv aU the
Ill'] )|iiilh«)-fnh, misery and hapj^inessjvi^ Tfit •^^''' k'i' (c'hi'), the loecdher;
3at t'Kc yi" .t'sien, silver and copjwr money :^<, ^i\*.k\i\ ,hiang, home :\n\
'iX^siiiiv^' yidi (or i'), artijieers and servants ;'^^\ j'jif.siangkwei', c/<cjsYsrt»r/
stone.
When uklatjvi: nouxs are j)Iaced together, those tliat express sni)er-
iority usually stand tirst, as in "tjl J^ 'mu 'nii, mother and daughter; Tpj
"j /J^ /Vk. jkiiin 'tsi 'siau .jen, the good man or the man of honour, and
the bad man or the man of no pi'inciple; ~\^ ~j^ '(|,y^'lau 't.^i .niang, /<////</•
and mother; /L T^ JCV tI^K ;l''ii"o t^' j^"^' mei', ehh r "i-it younger bro-
\yii )[} shi- yung', the use to which a thing is applied; ?t^ Au^ .lai i', the
'ta pan*, costume; j^'f/j \7\i ,kwan hi', Me coiwcf^'jzcwr** ; \\^ -^hj-,hieu ,shu,«
fllj Hi P^^
l^wa', a square 2)icce of embroidery on a mandaruis roles. \fi]
''
I - .I'liD'j; .nlcii. (I friniil of {he same year.
11 j\liuiy compoiiiuls ;iic borrowed as llicy are froiu tlie book style, for ex-
ample many titles, the Tauist names of different parts of the human body, the
24 solar terms, and very many others. Tiie principle of arrangement in such
terms belongs to the grammar of the book language •••./C ^ ,t'ien .t'ing, {hea-
ven's h<iV) the forehead; W\ yfe ''^j 'liang t'ai- .yang, (two suns) the tem-
ples; ^§^ yj .c'luiu .fen, vernal equinox; M, d^ hia' i:]\V, summer soJsfier;
12 Abstract nouxs. The words ^t; f\xh and j^ c'hu', placed after adjec-
tives and verbs form abstract nouns. ^^ "f^c IS & che' yang' tso' fah,
this is the ivay of doing it; iy. ^' /^ uiuli (.mei) "hau elm' there is no
in the sense of law it is heard 'fa. In Shan-tung the sound is the same for
both meanings. _
\\\ Words which individualize nouns there are some auxiliary words j/^
'^~' which are emi)loyed and
.t'eu Icead. /Q .ri, son, 'tsi, son, to define in-
one or two words. Exam])les of the use of .t'eu will now be given. )\'\ u^
.mei .t-eu, the forehead ;$}}{[ UM -Hen .t'eu, a sicl'le
;J^i'' Um ^^'^^^
-^'^'^b ^
hone :
^J fj£i ^ '"la ,lung .t'eu, horse reins :
t7{^ uM 'elien .t'eu, a pU-
loio ; Jjil i^J ,c'li<u .tj('U, a drawer ;'A^ 8^! I'^h .t'eu, wood: J") UM
'ma .t'eu, a Jetty; i\^ UM .c'lieng .t'eu, acuity wall; cf UM s^ieh .tvu,^//c
Here 1 would ])lacp proper names, and those ot M Bazin's Srdclass, or words composed of a num-
Ycn'. pcnril etc \'s\ {v}. si' 'hai, the four seas, the icorld
(!HAPTKK 4. FORMATION OF COMPOUNDS. I | \
otliei-s to its woril. ^l /L ^'^'"'' ('t'siaii) .n, a bird; 'Pi'l ^^ ficli .ri, «w
invUation card) \'>} y\^ wiili .n, a thliKj; Pt'f j^^ liwa, .n, words \
'f:if^Q*
^^ ,slu'nj; ,yiii .11, sound ,\'^ )j >2t ti' ,fan<,' .11, aj^hirv, W j,'^ .fan
.ri, a peach ; ^ /l^ .ining .n, r/ name; \ ^L* J'" '"^ " ">'"< : i^J
"^
Tho words
in the north J/Q .ri" is very much used,
hy tlie custom of the dialect. Thus ^ >Q 't'siau .ri', a bird, in Peking is
'ir -^'^^^ '*'*'> *^t C'heng-tu-tu. This enclitic may often be used or
n--
omitted at j>leasiu-e.
-f- ,shen 'tsi, ///c Ao^/// ; j£ -J^ 'elm 'tsi, Mf- master; \\X "f* chwang'
'tsi, a« indictment; S\ "Jr 'nii 'tsi', a woman; %±: -j^ chih 'tsi', a nephew;
^ ^- J 'hui .i)-o 'tsY, »?// wife, an old woman ;^^^ ^^ ,hwa .yu(>n
'tsi, a flower garden ; /y /l:i^ ~jr 'siau 'ho '{v:\, a young man ; ])];\. -f-
.]v\ 'tsi, a flag; ^' ^ ,shn 'tsi, a letter ;^'^ ^ ,t'i 'tsi, a ladder; f f
y^ ,fu i.s used, e. g. in ...;) y^ 'ma ,fu, (/ groom; 'Jjlg yv kiivu' 'i\i, a chair-
bearer; 7yi y^ 'slini ,fu, « «'a^/--/>ear<'>- ; .^ yC ,c'he ,fu, a carriage-
driver.
17 "j 'sheu, hand, is used in ^jV^: 'J* ngdi .sbeu, a bad man; /(ijij
-j^j}]
J
"
.tsing si' 'sheu, a neat and clever toorkman; 7\\, j^'shui 'sheu, sailors'
t.'js ^ .pen' 'sheu, a stupid artiflcer; -^7 i'V\''n\'\i\\c\\, a clever art ifirer;
^^~\ ,t'siang 'sheu, the buyer of another's essays to jyass well at an ejc-
amination.
and carver
Injlfc "^l]
\}ji ,tiau
ycu
k'eh tsiang', (ff:
,t80, in the north )«« engraver ; )\\\ ) fi\ [H'. t'sih tsiang', o<7-
'j^ .t'sai i'ung ,shi fir, a ^raYor; § J'Jj: fjlfj jl'- 'lu .i)an ,shi fu', a buil-
der; ^Ij g| ftlj # t'i' .t'eu ,slii fu', «Z;a/-^v(v; Mj" ^ fjllj ^^| .c'liu 'tsi
3l± #^ /v ,ch\vang ^kia .jen, a villager; f|l i[JJ /\w chung- ti' .jen, a
tiller of the soil; if J ^ ,\ 'ta "niau .jen, a shooter of birds; i^)( ^ /V
tso' ,k\van .jen, «?>?rt?if/arw;'|7 ^' /v .liing ,i .jen, a medical man; \x$i
^ i^ 'lau .t'eu, a jailor; '|j]| 'JJ|; v^| .mo .mo .t'eu, a baker; ^J j^
Ini' .t'eu, a?i e?iem?/; ,ya .t'eu, a/ew?ff/e .sfjrawf.
f 3.H
25 ^C ,kia(ts),/«?«z7?/, is employed in 'j^' ^<. .liing ,kia, the acting
''fe ^^ -I'""' tsicn' ,kia,rt ;>oor man; ^ ^\ ^<,fn'k\\W ,kia, a rich 7nan
(or family); ^ip ^^ ^C .lin ,slien ,kia, « neighbour.
2(j The use of an active verl) Avith its object, followed by p^ tih, for
j&\uii t'lh, a mandarin's servant ; jli /i!l. flV c'huli pin' till, one toho ia
ll- il' U^ swan' kwa' till, a diviner; M' fiC J^ H;/ I'i^'J" lii-' fali tih,
yL M^ I'^ii jt-'aii .11 till, a dealer in small articles; It^ 3v, "W" THp'-ui
.win ,shu tih,rtj/oyeryim</<^ runiicr who carries despatches',^^ \\ \ tj J'tseu
vim^ i\\\, a letter-carrier', J^ l\>j
||J i'anr:;' 'nia tih, r/ horse-keeper, fruiii
fang', <o /c< gro (om^ to grass); JjX -}- Pv fii"g' yjin-; tih, a goat-keeper.
27 Many atljectives combine with ;^ pei' and -;;44 hii', cAz-s.?, to form
nouns: as ^Ij J^^^ .t'sieii j>ei*', ancestors; P% J^ wan' jK'i', yw«/o/-s;__L.
^i' sliang' pei', seniors; ^} iff 'lau pei', ancestors; aged perso7is; p^
^^ 'chang i)ei*, elders; j^; ^;I4 ngoh lui', bad perso7is; |ii: 9|^_ 'fei lui',
bad persons; |rJ -;;-^ .t'ung lui', o/'</ie 6a?«e c?««6'. These expressions cor-
respond to our usage of the article the with adjectives, forming a noun in the
Generic jcords. Many words when they enter into citini>onM(V< l)ass from
a special to a general sense. Some examples will be given. The words J^
.c'liang, a j>jcce o/" [//•o?Oi(/, and i^ .tNu, head, lira used after nouns and
verbs to fonn compounds, in the sense of a phice devoted to any sjiecial pur-
pose; thus nl.j i^ 'ma .c'haiig, a place for horses; 01 Mj ^^M *^''i' miau'
.t'eu, at the temple; J'JL J^ ,hwang .c'hang, co77i7iion grouiid; )v; I'^j fah
flnJ ]}^\ k'iau (cMi) .t'eu, at the bi'idge; place 7ienr a bridge; ^f X^ 'k'au
.c'hang, place for holding exam illations; lj'-\i J^ chan' .c'hang, battlefield;
The words |—I 'k'eu, month, and | .imn, door, are used in conipomids
istrate's qfiice;^^ \ \
kiau' .men, mode of instruction; a religion; (Jj |—
ly, euphonious suffixes. This occurs when the specific term is complete in
Substances in the fomi of leaf take after them the word VP poh ; of small
-»
-j^ t - -4-4-'
I I
fragments, i^ ,cha and /^ sieli: of dust, 7}^ moh, end; of shavings, -^^
,hwa,/oz(;er6'; as in ^ :J'"|^
, kin poh, gold-leaf; %f^ yVI f^ih poh, tin-foil;
^i ^6 '^'^'i
V^^i ^' 'i'^^d frame (in the north 'wei lien ,tsi reed blind) ; J^
^ B^ fan' ,cha, /r«^?»ewf'S o/cAarcoa/;'p J^ ^(ll
j" shih .t'eu ,cha 'tsi
small pieces of stone ;AfYi ^^Vxi^ \Ro\\, sawdust; %'il TJC fieh moh, iron
flings ;^^ 4^ P^^^'
,hwa, shavings :7\\. '\\^ mub ,hwa, 2foot? shavings.
ing placed after the nouns to which they belong. For example ||jj( \>}L fiin'
lib. rice crumbs; u^ J^'ma, p'ih, horses; fjy([ ^^ 'wan'chan, china bowls;
iii Itfc t'ieh .t-iau, an iron fiaryTp /t pu' Y^'ih, pieces of cloth; (^ J^
shih k'wai', pieces of stone ; ]Hx A^ 1"'
'V^^^ pl^V boohs; /jj 7P lib '])en,
an almanac;}^ JL '^^'^'i
(0 P^j " ^^"^'' /J tL. -tau pa, knives; /jj \u\
.fiang .kion. ?-oow6;^^ n" ^^uh kien', things; J^i !|},t:|!J ^c'he 'Hang', carria-
tItu ^. ,to 'shall .c'hwen chili, hoiv many boats? /j (/ ||>{c hh (lei) .t'iau,
rib bones;
combine with tlu' wunU ^\ ,tiin<j:, cast; ^] ,si, wcsf;]^(:\ .imn, fionth; 4u
ju-li (l>ei), north; /£^ 'tsu, hft; -^ 'veil, ritjltt; H'J .t-.sini, t>e/orc;i^ lieu',
behind; _j, shang*, above; \ liia', bifoiv;^^ 'li, wllhln; /y wav, without.
E. g. /|' [III ^^•'ti' luieu', Mf outside. .Fang however is loss used than the
otheis, and many V)f the |)ossible combinations of the.ve words are not em-
the material of which individual objects are composed. Sueli olyects are
compounded of matter and ibrni, and the names wliich they receive are ai)-
l)ellative nouns. The suffixes "X* tsi,^ .t'eu, 7Q .rV, found commonly
witli ap])ellatives, are also sometimes used with material nouns, asin)^* -j'
,sha 'tsi, sand; 7\\. \}Ji
muh .t'eu, ivood; ^ -f- ,kin (ch) 'tsi", (/old.
selves. Thuslll{:il 5"2i i";iii' .Yi,ahaf: ]^ .ho, « river; —^ ^-l^ /fC yih
,k'o shu" muh, a /rte ;i*|nj ,kau, a tvooden or baxiboo pole;/ } -^ ,tau tsi"
35 The names of trades and professions are also embraced in this class of
nouns, as ^^ ^- pI; "»''»' ,f*l»" t»li, <' reader of books. Relative nouns
ditVer from those callnl appellative, in having theideaof personalitvattaclj'd
to them.
llfj MAXDAIUN fiKAMMAR. PART II.
36 Abstract nouxs arc of two kinds. Some concern the funii, situation
side; |,p 7^ 'tien .ri, a very little, from 'tien, a point; "/y 5^ wai' .t'eu,
the outside)'^ fp] Ic'ii' (c'li) liiang' (s), the direction in lohich he is gone,
from k'ii', to go, and liiang', to face an object, or to go toiuards; j\^ t\\
.hing clnvang', appearance.
'ki ,to ,k'ing (light) cliung' {Jieavy) how much iveight ? 4^ g- ,shen
tive changes its tone, as in y] -£^ 'pE Jj^ 'yen k'ung tsai' dai, ivhen you
have time come again.
38 Some abstract nouns are the names of mental qualities, and the im-
material objects of thought, i^rj. ;^'(- ,ngen 'tien,/rtyowr ; ^"jh j^'hauc'hu^,
goodness ; ^^ uX •7^'^^^ k^^S « <^«^'«e ; Tfe 1x .k'iuen (.t's) .jen, authority
^ ,
im
gt li? reason; /|_
>f—
^
jtr?!
.jen ngai', Zoye ;
/^X^
yj
I
//IJ
III
,fen jneh,
sense and retaining it in common use. j{^* )|1'^ ,liiang ,fung, (,feng) country
customs ; ^ j\^ .liang ,sin, conscience ; t& t'FJ .k'iuen ping', authority
o//-; i^> /R\, chi' k'i', a man's disposition; -fip .[^ tuli ,sin, a bad heart;
l%i 7Tsl M^^n l^'J'j j^opular notions; pjx ^^ ,fung suli, custoriis; 7^ 7,H
,kwei ,kii, proprirty^ ?E.shen k'i', a likeness ; fJie sonl;^ gl 'k'i .t'eu,
verness ; \iji ;^(, ngau' k'i', a jyroiid air ^±, ; ^Ivl .k'wang k'iS/oo^7m?-c?mess ;
40 In the preceding expressions, many material words are used with ab-
stract meanings. E. g. )i|L ,fung, wind; "lyj ping', handle: tRI k'i' (c'h),
CIIAI'TEU 4. niFt'KUKXT KINDS OF N()L:N"S. 117
vapour ;7^M\t''u instrument /or draw infj circles ; %\j ,lvii, iuHtrumtutJ'or
(frawimj a square ; /^ ^^^''> '"''; >L^ ,»i", /<c«;7.
41 On the otlur hiiiul nuiiiy wmils of an abstract kind an- often iisul in
])arts. ,K'ung^^ enipft/ space, in "j^i l^|^j 'j^ .li.-u Hang k'ung-, (in the
north 'liang k'o k"o-er', leave two spaces. The primary iilea in such words is
alistract, and the concrete sense grew out of it. When the abstract word is
a verb in such cases, the tone often changes in the concrete, see /|'^-.mo, 5»i|{
i" W tt M f^!l! ^ i!'^ y^i ''ifii tsai' ch<-' 'li ,to -sliau ,shen, what is the
g. ^iji chung', to cidtivate, in /J |> f^Jc f'lj( Vi\ f\ i{i\ na' yang'chung' fah
j»uh tui\ that mode of cultivation is unsuitable; ^ 'H,
— " j'^ -J\'- J 7;
veu' shi* yih
'
yang" lung* fah, that is a different way
*
<>/ acliin/ ; j\^; 1'^- ?j^*
'"'-4-
. ^'^L -/- ' j- 1 f>
^v; 'tsen yang' 'tseu fah, which irmj should I ijnf^ Z, -\] '/.| I J'lnu .mei yeu
c\\Q.\\^ c^\\\\^, there is no stamliny room; ^\:,\y^ I 'A -I.- fj 11 /'<i ts.i]-
.shi hou* shang' 'yeu inai c'hu*, in season it can be bought, (not used in the
north).
breast; breastplate; f /[c 4 fan' 'tsi, « spy, from J;^ fan', /o invest i/jate ;
Pg 7\^ c'liaug' 'i^en, a song bool', from c'liang', to sing. The reason why
the verb precedes in these cases, is that it makes the f()llo^ving \vonl s])ecifie
and species precedes genus, or else that the following word is the object which
it governs.
4G One, two or more verbs when alone are often construed as substantives
e. g. 'mai mai', to buy and sell, in \i'.Ji /y ^-^i ^ tso' 'siau 'mai mai', he
skill to lose): -^"J ^f .hing .wei, actions; ^-f^ l\[^ Fl^ 3^'' .l)'iau 'tu c'hih
,c'hwen, licentiousness, gaming, food and dress. This is the order of the
c'liih hoh .p'iau 'tu, where P^^J hoh, drinking, takes the place oi' di'ess.
48 Transitive verbs with a noun after them, followed by 0^ tih are em-
ployed to designate agents, as in f/jf- -^ H vpi^n' sh'r' tih, a manager. Such
examples are both compound, inasmuch as the verb and its object retain
their meaning, and derivative since tih is nothing more than a termination.
49 The verb also becomes a substantive, when it stands as the subject of
the syntax.
.00 Skx. Tlie distinction of male and female is expressed by the adjectives
men . 'Nil, wln'U used for ft daxujhtn', as in ^3: A cliili 'nil, a niece; ]/]\
_5\ ,sun 'nil, a (jrand-ditmjhhr^ retains one of its meanings in the Ix.ok lan-
means /(L'i«rt/<^.
51 Gender Forwinged animals, tlie words llL|t ,t'si,/('mf<A ,^ .hiimg,
m(de^ are employed. Animals tliat walk are divided into if-<^ 'p'in./ewtrt/e
1 X '»•'"> '>n(ifi\ The words ^^ ,l<'ing, mrde, Ti}^ mn, female, aroused for
all animals. The words 'J% .i'lin, female, f^Tl'* tjsimg', male, ar'> applied to
swine only. The words '^J^^^k'n', fejnale, and^fe shan', male, are ai>plied
to horses only.
The words ,k\mg, 'mu, are tliose most commonly used in convei-sation.
'Ej: Ij.y mu .ki, a hen; ^ tJ-IJ ,kung, ,ki, a cock; ^ 3l<-l^"»?^ •^'^"n^ «
100 If; ^ 5=Jt^ 'mu .hiung, n she bear; ^ ]\'i ,kung ,chu, a hoar; l^'- yi
mu 'keu, hitch; 'Dj- {\'l\ j_E inii .liu .li, a she-fox.
Nui/iher
.men, jmjtils.
I J ]
i^ ^: ^)|; |:|[] ^^ Hlj! yen liang ko' ,shan .yang tsai' na' li
'yang ,sheng 'li, there arc two r/oats there kept alive from charity.
,to, ^^ ,t<) ,to, Jlf '^ liaii ,to, many. Tims, ^^'f< /^ iill^ W J
cluing- .jell "kiang .In ) "liaii, tli'ij all jjroposc peace) ^|< /V "^ >[j J
^lli cluing- .jeu Invei' kieir 'liaii ,t'a, tlccy have all met him: ^ y\^ '||nl
J
JK ^;-|1 /V 'yen 'ki ko' fei' lui' .jeo, ^At^re are some had men; 3(^ ^ ^^
i!i^
"'12
J 'liaiijto ,])ing .t'au 'tseu '\vA\\,very many soldiers ran away; il^
till jpiiig shah "liau, (he rent ivcrc kill by the enemy.
jjl aval affixes are |:'jP,tu.'|.-.| Jciai, -^ .t'siuen, all. Thus,^ Q*|i
/£ ^Lj
/V clie' ,tu sin' fan' Jen, these men are all criminals; jj\* ^ /^ ^ ^-
gJC -^^ 3^J ^^3, ,sie .jen ,kiai 'ii wo puU tui', that kind of man does not
'liau tang' 'liau, the family have all been deceived; ^'^ ]^p ^^ ^^ .t'sien
,1u .na .lai, bring the money here;/^. 'JK A^ ^^ -jt^n .t'siuen puhyau', no
men ivant it; /V fi| TH va< -j^'^^ j^i'^i
P'''*'*
'^^'*^3 '''^''^ all fear me.
intheplwrul number. ^<. ^C /v ^K J j^'i^^ j^ia .jen .lai 'liau, f'/'C men
are all come: )\u flJlJ M J
-c'hwen .clnven ,k'ai 'liau, or \\s{ Jiu) ko' ko'
.e'hwen ,k'ai 'liau, or_^ ;^ chih cliih .c'hwen ,k'ai 'liau, tlie boats have
oil hft.
vers; "^^ J|i ^ m!;} .t'sien .kiiui wan' 'ma, many armies and horses; JOL
iij'j I- I iii^ '^^'"i -J'li •^''' I'Jii; the fve lakes and four seas; ZS, ^ >'> PtU
,sau ,kuiig luh (lieu') yucu', the {three) palaces and {six) o(h'ccs of the em-
jicror; Q [^ peh ,kwau, ^/<e ;?i«)if/ari';i.s'; f_-| TO -J 'I" 59^ l"i' ^^^^^ .p'ien
<]uial usage usually requires a numerative between the number and its noun.
r»Hl such sentences are so numerous in connnon conversation, that it becomes
cHArTP:i; 4. cask. 121
plunil.
51) Aiiioni;" other (i(fjrctivc jn'onnUHf^. wliich iire ii.sr(f with nuuiis ;is ])n'-
fixes or aftixcs, and j>art]y serve as jtlurai parfichu, are -f^' l<oli, every; i\\'\
,chu, all; y(}} lieh, rantfvd in order; ^l\ kii% </Il; 7^ /( ta* .tan, ~h
^,^ ta' kai', all, etc. fit'l p- /L iil ,fl»" wei' ,sien ,sheng, ///ow teachers,
or (jentlemeiil ^IJ IV. '|^ /L lit'h \\\*i' ti' ,hiiing, brothers! ^ J\ \-\\i
/S :Ui 'T^ ^^*^^^ -J^'" '^^^ ^^"" '^'^'^ y'^^g'j "^^ »'^<'^* ^>'<^ so; yC /L / V fil-
ial ^\ 'JpC ta' .fan .j-^n kii' ,kiai pnli fuh, evenj one refused submissiou
shi' 'kwei clui' till, the men of this place are mostly deceitful.
50 Other 2^1 ural suffixes. Tlu; word^ 'teng, ili: pci*, used as plural
particles, in the style of official documents, and in senii-collo([uial novels, arc
army., the people, and men (jenerally; /y jfC •^'ii'i I'ci', inferiors.
Case.
kia' .t'sien kwei', the price of coal and charcoal is hi</h;~f: V|'f fij ^Jl
/^^, .Invang ti' tih i' ,ki, the emperor s opinion. This particle also fre(|uent-
ly stands iM'tween an adjective and its noun, as M W} l\l, |^J hau tih
,tiiu^ , si, good thin ffs; ^^ IlJ/Vtsii- hwci' tih .ji n, the assembled
jH'rsons; |[ii | j IJJ/V ts.r ,k\van tih .jcn, ojiee-beariny persons. ,Chi
Gl The possessive particle is often omitted, as in [[r -/,- |' /vv shi'
kiai' shang' .jen, ;«t>M of the toorld; ./|' p| A. wai" kwoh .jen, foreigners;
'I' HA chung' kwoh .jen, a Chinese; ^\ ^A fei lui' .jen, men of
Ixid character; /A: ^ VlS ,chwang kia hwoh, agricultural ivorl-; ZT. pr
^ $1 ,kung tsiang"shon i-. the .skill of hnvdirraffsmen: Yi\\ ffl\ \
122 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. PART II.
.t'sien .c'lmii .jen, men nf fj/e former dynafity; -^ tHl /V Ik'U' slu' .jun,
men of the after a^/ey^ IIL /v 1^" ^'li' -j*-'"? ^''^'^ of antiquity.
Ci'2 The word ^o (dative) after words meaning ''to say," is expressed In-
several particlos as yj^.ii, M tui-.|n]liiang', ^ t'iS |:1| 'ii, ^-p .ho. if^
liwan'» ^f j"
f^: ^-^ -^"^ H'[> #f fM '^^'^ ^\"*' '''• till Jing' .lang .yen
'kiang, /say ^0 yowr 60?i; |/f» |p|] jX, /j>L pi 6/f in nF '"' liiang' Ar
jt'siu kau' su' kau' su', tell your father;'^ lllj jQ /V ri'feOT fip '^vo 'ii
che' .jen sliwoh 'hau liwa', I spol-e to the man kindly; ^Jc ^M illi U''J ^v
^ H^Aj'^^'O -^if* jt''«i till ling' ti' sliwoli, I said to his hrothcr.
63 The dative <f f/ivin;/ usually takes no case particle; the verbs to give
'fJ^ kih or kei, ^^ '\\, j9i^ sung', topresent, j^i "she, to give in alms, etc.
govern Loth the thing given, and the i)erson to whom it is given, without a
preposition. ^Xi 'I'fii WW uQ. ^W 'wokei,ko,ko che%tung,si, /j/iVe
my brother this thing. The jjerson usually stands immediately after the verb,
as in this example, but not always so, thus flj^ J!^* M})L P^keh (kei)'nifan'
c'hih, give you rice to cat, and ^'^ f|j){ |<p "^ kei fan- "ni c'hih, are both
'ting tai', lie presented two mandarins loitli the hall of highest rank] j^
6^ ^"Ei "J*
— '
IZE ^t i^ sung' ,t'a tih .ri 'tsi yihp'ih 'hau'ma, Ae ryaye
"^{{^
his son a good horse; p,^ j <p '^H; [:Jk ^-^ ji'j'J t'si' ,ni ,shwang 'yen ,h\va
.liu^, I present yon tivo peacock's fecdiicr.s ; }^ /J*
' '
r^C ^ H i"' ni
yih yang' ,tung ,si, / will give you something ; pK /JP iMI /V '
|pj /J
hien' na' ko' .jen yih ku- yueh, / limited thcd man to o)ie month.
C4 The words -^ 'ii, Jpnii 'kei are often used as dative case particles, af-
ter verbs of bestowing, and giving alms. j21r >v- /J r ^Hi" / ^ '
^^ f (1
sung' 'ii na' fu' .jen yih 'to ,hwa, he gave that woman a flower; pp^ |:I^- y,'^
A. is kiang 'u chung' .jen ,t'ing, / tell it for all to hear; ^.^j^- ^Jc n]
t'sV 'n 'wo yun<^^, he gives it me to use; xB^ ?W J^ /^ 51* ^"ng' 'kei
Tin- uonl .'iiran' ismmh used in Chih-li. In Pckins ^I< ,kon isals4j common.
ClIAI'TKK 4. CASE. i2o
with pa' to tahc flji JL in )';< ) — Jill A'^^ !'•'' 'tsi<-n ,i»-cli "liuu .yih
GG The words ,-f^ ,u, 7}»IJ .ho, J)|J liwair, fuj Iiian--', ^l^ ,K('n arc used
in tilt' s(^nse <)/'(tr/y-o;/i (r^AAtY/yc) with verbs oftiskinj::, advisin;^,-, etc \\\\ |,f|
r |li| hian^' koli hia' wi'ir, / ask of yon, sir'^ ^fe ^^H '^C BL /K —
'
^]£ ^]f- wo .lio ,sien ,sheni^ .k'ieu yih .nan shi', / ask/rom you, one thimj
hardtofjrant; ^Ji* ^ Im] fj\ \\\^ p^J wo km' (c'hii) w.-ii' ,ii tsieii' nuy'
(nei), / will go and ask my wife.
C7 The words |^- 'li, |'^ 'kei, ^t'i^ are used in tlie sense of/b;'((/«f /ye),
as ill iflj. ^Xi uV] 1ul ^^ 'i '\\" 't'sinn- .t'a .hii, uivite him here/or me; iX
"II!! ^^ W ^h -^ i^W^&T i:^l 'wo ,i.a slian' .ye 'u 'hiiit'ai'
.ye snug* I am
'liaii c'liii' '11, escortiny this mavdarin's son for the old gen-
r'i' /
wei- .sieu ^shenir 'niai .tnnu; ,si, «7i/ buying things for those two genth
men; |^ ^^:iii M^^
f|i^ /(VK 'Icoi olio' ko' 'kwa fxi' pan' ,sang
shi', /or /^/s widow I am s^iperintending the burial.
68 Along loith i.s expressed hy th^ words |pj .t'ung |'^ ,ken ^fl liwan'
and ^M ho or hai, for which 'p lioh is often writt^Mi, these characters In'ing
coincident in .^onnd in the nortliem provinces, j/ji |iij -(i_i JiL /£ :!£ iHl
Jf^ 'ni .t'ung che' wei' .sicn .slicng tsin' .kiivj:. you will with this gentleman
enter the capital : f^ ^ /h >f^ ^ S —
'ni .ho 'siau ti' k-'ii' yili
'
^S 'wo .ho
.p'eng 'yen kwang' yih kwang' k'ii', I am going a loalk with friends to amuse
ourselves; \/\l ^42 ^ IS] f T ^ 'ni 'tseu 'wo .t'nng 'ni k'ti', if you go I
go with you;^ \^ j}\i
ft'"! \ vil j'l ^ 'we. .t'nng na* ko' .jeu
which are placed after tiie noun, wiien the case particle with governs it, in
the sen.se of <of/eMe>'. The nnnicral yih, one, f<nind in all these phrases,
tives .t'si and .t'ung, are constniecl as sul)stantivi-s. The i)article /Q .vi is
conned, j^ # M T^ ^^ ^ ('1i^ ^ j" 1'^' '"^'^ -lien "tsi 'nu ,tu wo'
'sT 'li-iu the parents tor/ether icith the ch'ddreii icere fitarvcd to death.
70 Motion to « pZacc is expressed hy the Avords ±\] tan', 3B. chi', of wliich
the former is the connnoner word; the hitter bcl(.ngs rather to the literaiy
goincj'^ J!) M t'M tau' chc' 'li, to this place : ^l) %Z "j^jfl
tan' ,kia
tau"t'si
'li, to
to this place ;^ M ^1^' j^[| 'tseu chr 'na 'li, ?t7i«-e «rt; you (joinr/^^
^ ^ 2]!^^ pen' chi' jih 'pen, /te has run aicay to Japan.
The sense of /or, ms^eacZ o/,/or the saJce of, is given hy the words ll^tai',
/or: ^^ t'i',/or; ^f wei', for the sake of; \\i^^tav t'i', instead of;
SH ^C 'j'Vi 'Sv t'l'kwoh,kiataiMau,/or///st'02w?r?/ he lore suffer ing;
W^ y^ S/ "?^^ ^'"^ '^^^ loritefor hisfcdher;\\
*'^^' -j^'^^ '^^^'^ ^^'^'^
pfcr /v^ H"^'. .-=(:-^ tai' 'k'u .jon 'pin pan', inform him hy petition f>r these
l)v § jtang, hut oftencr hy ^j^ tsai\ at, to be at a lAace, before its noun
and by stvveral suffixes, ft Hl^ffl I.T. ^^i^'' '^^ '^' clni', m ivhat place do
you live? '^ V^)' 4 Jl ~t 1^ t^^i' i'^ '^•'^"i sl'iiiig' t^f>' hia-', 6'*^ down on
the chair- -^ '^C -^ 11". ^<- tsai' ,kia puh tsai' ,kia, is he at home or
'//o^'' {\-
— '
i2!i: 7U Iti i
^' *'''^'' y''' ?l'''''i -^^ chan' choh, he stood on one
SiVc ItE '"^^ ^ic X» kJ' ^'^•i'" j^^i''' l^i'i.i?' fii' 'iii^'' '"' /'f>?'"' 6'/'^ honours her
parents; ^ H£ ,tang 'wan, r// j^A////; |^^ ^H J'ill 1' pii' tsai' ti- hia',
he bowed to the ground; ^ m^ P 13: t«!^i' ,hiaiig Ida' chu', //e lives in
the country.
ivtll; fe I'J- |11| i^J A. .I'U 'li iMU'u' 'yiMi.jcn, ///o-e arc men in the up-
per ?-oow; \\\\ \ \ \'±, \] /V T|'j .ya .iiieii 'li 'yen .Jen .f sin^r, ;„ //,,. 7/,f7;,.
«/«/•//? office there is an influence operatinrj on his behalf; ^(^j^ ll'Ir fr '^
-^N -llil <l"i t'luii; 'li 'tseii pull ,t'uiig, yon cannot go by that lane; ^\- fj'j
fp ^ q:j|( nX ^l»"i' .t'.sirif]; ,cliiin«; 'yen .ynen kii', Mere is a cause for it in
(siuoko) 'kwting, in the metropolis the population is widely spread; ^/J '
p
/K. ML -c'lif^u jchnng ta" hvan", in the palace there is great confusion ;]^\^
h V /jl .cMmen shang' .liang, it is cool in tile boat; j[^ i V^[ Tfxjjsin hia'
from, and is less common than the others. 'Ta is i>ui<'lv coll.wjuial. Tsi^
is scarcely used except in comhination Mith .t'snng. f)(; 7JI) \'±^ ^'^.t^sun-'-
'na 'li .\a.i, from lohat place are you corned ^}\^ ['4 i^'' ^tv.t'sung,si .yang
.lai, I a)ii comefi'oni the western ocean; -f J j]'\* ('|j- ^^ ta Ha li 'tscu,
74 Instead of prepositions, verhs are used for the tn-sfruuHnlal case. They
are such as qp .na, to bring; JLijP'^ ni -tsiang, to take; )r} ynng', to use.
They represent our \vord loith, or they connect the agent with the instrument.
^ nt T^,5n IJ W* j"-i kwen* 'tsi .lai 'ta i)'o', breo/: if open with a
^ ^
club; |ij I L '^L llli "'i .t'siang .lai ,chah 'si ,t'a, he pierced him
ilcad witk a sjK-ar; JLi 3^ J. I I'^JL If ^7 ,pJi chili kioh (chiau) hvan' t'ih,
toith one foot he kicked indiscriminately; jfi. J'I||( '}} J{il I] J mh .lien .p'i
shah till, he struck him dead toith a reaping hook; j[_^ h\\\\i ji -j- ij^-
.f;, J-j>
,pa .ma .sheng 'f-ji ,shwen 'luui. tic if with a Imnpai cord; n] i.|t X.!/ J
-^ yuiiL;-' pill "sio 'liau tsi\ he wrote with « ^lejjciVjTlT
'
— ^U Jj TI'X ^li
jjji .t.siiing vili .|);i .tan sliah si .t'a, liekiUcd himioith a sicord. Pa is most
freijuently followed l)y the object of the action, while na and tsiang mark the
iiistrunient. Pa sometimes jireccdes the instrument as in the examples.
The hook ])article 'i is also often used in literary collor[uial, as in }y^ yy}j
tor, or to the instrument of the action, is rei)resented hy \'^ pel" and M-j-
ehiau' or actions gimerally and JJ3{ .yai, when striking and imnishing are
si)oken of. The latter is ])ur('ly collo({uial, and is common in Chih-li and
Shan-tung. Jl f >C 11^7 T y^ii (ngai) 'liau fu' tih 'ta 'liau, by his
father he ivas herden; J/j: J ^' f||{j \]~^ ^ .yai "liau 'lau ,shi tih tseh
y^^ ^5 /^ pei' 'liau ,tau ,shang 'hau ,sie c'hu', F'-J- J] y etc, chiau'
.tau ,tsi, etc he was woimded with a knife in several places; f^ ^{^ Jjjr
"t mV itii' ^W W"] i'^'i" I'^ii -yt-' kiau' tih nion' ,shu tih, he was required
by the mandarin to learn to read. In Peking P^- eliiau' is the favorite col-
7G The vocative case is sometimes expressed hy pi) ii. after the name or
title of the person addressed. But usually no sign of the vocative is in use.
%ff? /v I^^J fir .jen ,a, woman! ^ /V r'J lau .jen ,a, aged man I The
character |iJ|j when reail is ,nga or ,ngo, hut as a vocative sufKx it is heard
a. The guttural initial is a recent additicm, as th(> change fn)m a to o is
also new.
a rr .strong.
CHAl'TKK. .3. UN TIIK AIXILIAKY SLlkSTANTIVES. 127
to the instrument, na, etc. and to the a«2;ent, pei', etc. The locative preposi-
tion tsai'' jiartakes of tlic nature of a sul)stantive verb, conihini-d \vitli the
sen.se ut or //t/r, as y\\ \\' ^<, puh tsai' ,lcia, hv is not <it /lome; y]\ fi:
])uh tsai", he is not here. The dative ease particles fff} kih, etc. are also
verbs. So also many of the woids for towards^ to a place, and front a place
The causative auxiliary verbs l'-|- kiau' andj^tlshr, have as nuich right to
auxiliaries, but the reader will be more likely to look for them among the
CHAPTEIi V.
with the ([uantity (^f things somewhat as adjectives are with their qualities.
This class of nouns is veiy much extended m the Chinese colloquial language,
where not only collectives with weights and measiires exist, but also certain
words aj)propriated to a]ipellative nouns; e.
^~^ -y^ yih ,chang
g. 'jf^ ^i^
choh 'tsT, a table /-Q, IM.^ ''' ^^'^i -"j (tfsh. There are about forty such
words, and of these arbitrary u.sage determines which shall be employed with
any nuun. Ko* |pi| the numerative for man, may in northern mandarin hi
used with any ajipellative or relative noun in place of the proper numerative,
Rome writers call these words numerjii particles, others cliLssitiers, others
simply munerals.
'2 NumlMM-s, demonstrative pronouns and adjectives precede the numera-
tive. yj p jji^ ^ na' chih .yang, that goat; -^u |H ^ che' ko' .yang,
a whole one; J^L |P'| /Lj ,tan ko* ,ri, a sinijle one.
128 MANDAi:iN GUAMJIAU. rAllT II.
and its noun, but this rule is not universal for men, thus it is proper to say
— ^^ '
yih ,t'sien ^ping, 1,000 soldiers; — J^ ^ - ^tP Hi ri" wan'
or three men.
Ipl ko', as in :ii 13 I ^^ ^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^"^ .t'sien, or ,san si' shih ko' .t'sien,
5 In this chapter, the following are the kinds of words which will be
They have no meaning of their own, when used with these nouns. Their
office is merely distinctive, and they may therefore be called distinctive nu-
The definite words employ are weights and measures. Thus we require a
new name significant numerals, divided into definite and indefinite. (3.)
Collectives are the names of the groups into which appellative nouns are formed
Q „ ^ .k'iun (c'h), a flock; 1^ x'hwen, a chain; ^J tui', a pair. (4.)
same manner as collectives, .ri T^c 1ra J£ jSan yang' tso' fah, three tvays
of doing it. From their signification these words might receive some such
name as modal nouns. (5.) Numeral particles applied to verbs. The number
of times that the action of a verb is repeated, is expressed by words such
the clock hfts struck one. These words take the place of numeral adverbs ;3(M
y^ ^jv ^p — |ti| ju ,kin .lai ti' ri' .liwei, I amnoiu conic for the second
time.
f) Wlu've ill Englisli we use tlic indefinite article, the Chinese say '
' yih.
CIIAPTF.U 5. DISTIN'CTIVE NUMERAL rAIlTICLES. 120
kion' yih ko' 'lau "liii c'luli .yaiig, / saw a ti<jcr vatinj a <juat. Whero wo
spoak ol" this (»r tliat tii;i'r, two or three tigers, tlie Chinese use not only a
])ronoun or nnniher, hut also a numeral particle following it. A list of the
j§^ 'ehaji, a smaU cup; numeral of lami)s, tea-cups, china trays, win,.
^>- \wl ki chan or ko- .c'ha 'wan, several tea-cups ; ^ 3u jLI cho'chan
.p'an, this plate.
'jj
^"
jchang, to sfrefcJi ; numeral of tables, chairs, stools, lips, bows ( ^
,kung)? silk nets Cl-'lJ ^{g kiuen' .lo),* T|7 f^[n\' ,ki, cottoji looms; ^*- !jjf
dan chairs.
chests, .shoes, eyes, hands, feet etc. ^~" ^^ ^-j yili chili .ki, a fowl; ppj
J^ |3£ 'liang chih .hiai, two shoes; ^ ]v] j2. |ij(j Uu"liangcluh.c'hwen,
encjaijc two boats; ^ ~| t^^ JiJ/ X-;'^ '}ii"{? ^^I'di 'ki chih .ngo, he keeps ten
^^ .na yih ,chi pih .lai, bring a pencil; pR \']i :k ^\ ^'i,-f liang
c'hu' ti' jfang, that place; \,X — p/ji ^j "j^ mai- yih clnr .fang 'tsi, ^jiy
a house.
^y^ ,chu, root of a tree; an old numeral for trees. Used iuVjC )fj\' J^.
±J •^'
JJ jfiiug, to seid; niuueral of letters and packets '
^fj- yik
letter.
-^;^ kia', a snj^port; used of eagles, vines, cannons, bells, clocks, machines.
' ^
-^^ j\^% y\\\\vi\\'- y\v\<^, an eagle ;hawk; '
tIc '^'lil
y'h kia' p'au', a,
roof timbers. — ' t'M tT "?* yih ,ken ,kan 'tsi, a pole;
—
'
' fk j^ t"|'
f—I 'k'eu, month; used of cofTms, bells, men, knives, ancliin's, water vessels.
—PX yih 'k'eu .jen, one man; ffi ^^ P TJ ^ M^ d'<^
yih 'k'eu
kien' han' ,shan, a jyerspiration jachet;y^ \\' fl^" Tyj 'ki kien' shi' .t'sing,
several things.
7^^ kiuen', ^o ro?? ^(jj; « chapter of a hoolc; used with fjlj- t'so -y
IpjJ ko', also written jgj and -^1^, used of men, cash, loaves, bears, tigers,
shu'. (I tree.
CHA1'TKU5. DISTINCTIVE NUMKKAL lAUTKTKS. |.51
f-Ji 'k'waii, onh-r; a hKirk: muncriil of mattMis ^]\i ^ 2\\. fpj „.^i
'tsi, a straw Jacket; Yv\ VB. M^ iS '^''^ng 'ling 'wei poh, /jyo reed frames.
or^i* /i^ .woi .lion, reed ciniains.
r'l .nu-n, (Ah>;-; numeral of cannon.PM :(§; J|f ^ij £ "f-* |"| A' 'I'd/
'Hang ,pien ']nu lieh 'wii shih .men ta' ])''au', on both sides ai'c placed 50 larye
fjnns; \ \ ''[({i i^c" %f Zll lU §+2 .vih .men ji'au' clnvang tell ,sau
vih mien' .lo, a t/ouc/; ~] [III jl'|"j i'\£ sliih mien' .t'ung king', ten brass
mirrors; ySl [HI U/ ki mien' ku, several drums; — []i| [_| ///f- yih
jL» V^^ '^ /<oW; « handful; numeral of knives, spoons, chairs. ^^H f [_j
7i "T* t'u'' 'i)a ,tau 'tsi, Mm a-;///;-; ^l1 5'i 7J >''» 'V'^ 't«'^''> '<^"i» "
pair of scissors;
—
— .
iL, f J J n' pa sholi 'tsi', two spoons; /JlML*
I Ml .
>" '•*
I'll -4^ ^T
']" na' shwali ttiat hair brush; 1"^ .t'iau
/l|jlj 'j)a 't.si, -xij, -fL* "S 'rlr*'"''
,shu. this book: 7\^ i>K X'^' V^^ cliang*. nn account book.
132 MANDARIN OUAMMAR. PART II.
]7C p'ih, to pvlr : numeral of horses, unilcs, asses, camels. i]y — |/L
Wij na' yili i)'ih 'ma, ivhk-h horse'/ — - [/k ISti'; 4 ^'^'
p'il' -1^ "t^i, two
mulcfi.
p\ 'so ("sho), ivhich) as in )y\ ^ 'so tsai', the place at wliich he is;
a jilacc ; numeral of houses and places. )y\ j^ "J" yih 'so .fang 'tsi, a
house.
Bh .t'eu, head; used of animals. '
i^ -| ' yili .t'eu .nieu, a hidloch;
.
IJ-3 SIr ^ rr 2)eh (pai) .t'eu 'ma, two hundred horses; ^ y^ §3
^ mai- 'ki .t'eu .yang, to sell several sheep.
tl^.t'iau, sprout; branch; contains the idea of length, and is tlie numer-
doctrines, etc.— f^
— ^H) yili -t'iau 'ken, a dog; ^ f^ f^ clie' .t'iau
])ei', this coverlid; ' JJtK 'iil. yili-t'iau-- chiang', o ra?'»&o?(7; Jp '
S^ ^ tai' yih 'ting ,chan man', he wears a felt hat: ffi ]|} ^^i ^'h'ang
'ting kiau' 'tsi, two sedan chaii's.
Wi Th |i| yih tso' ,kau ,shan, a high hill;^ ^: M die' tso' miau', this
p- jtsun, honourable; numeral of connon, idols. " ' -^( yvj /.'fj^
yih
ta' .t'siang, a great wall; Yv] Jl^ f'/X Ih 'litmj; ,tii pan .t'siang /^yo lyoo-
den palisades.
yj Ms, HN I@I '^^'^ -^^'^'^ P"^^ -t'^j -^ '^^ '^^^^ desire the tenth part of a cash ;
f^ W. 1^ /X. 3'^ l'"^i <-li"ili pail' -wen .t'sien, /i is not worth half a cash.
"JiL wei', numeral of scholars/ mandarins, and connon. JH. \]L /\, 'h]^
'wu wei' ta' p'au',/i'c' large guns; zi. \^ /C /\. ,!^an wei' ta' .jen, fh'ce
high 7nandari7is.
7 There are many local difierences in the use of thenumeral ]»;irticles. The
following are some instances of the nimierals employed with certain substan-
tives in Si-c'hwen, difterently from the usage of north China ; 'j|\^ I'^
yih chang' 'tsui, a mouth; '
||!|: ^f- yih .t'iau .yang, a sheep.
Significant Nuvieratives.
8 Words that express the quantities and measures of material nouns wilJ
now ho illustratetl, and first those that are indefinite. These words retain
their meaning, and conseepiently almost always admit of translation, which
is not the case with the numeral particles that have Imvu aln atjy discus.sed.
'jn ,t-hang, a sheet r/ paper. l['l Wl 'jR ?m'j IjH U{ ilA )m -f Van
'liang jchang ,kau .li 'chi tso' shan' 'tsi, he took two sheets of Corean j)aper
to make fans.
^ ,c'he, a carriage-load of anything. ZS^ iji ?\\. ^f^ ,san ,c'he muh
.c'hai, three wagon-loads offirewood.
iff cheh, to fold; a fold o/ paper, etc. jlj Ht \l^i A \\\ ]}\ ^
134 MANDAnix r:R.\MMAr.. part ii.
yung' 'clii tso^ pah clic'li clieli 'tsi, onahc loith paper a memorandum hook of
ei(jhf folds.
of loind hkw.
/'^ choh, tabic. i"^^- %X yih clioh fan', a table of rice.
^t ,feng, <o seal; a sealed packet of. 3: J ^K "Jt yih ,feng .yin
a heap of silver, ^ ~Jr yih hwei' 'tsi, a small port io7i of time.
'shui 'ye yen' jnih hia' k'ii'. he could not sivalloio even a mouthful of water;
^ti P tS ^ti. ^^^"^ j^'h'i" 'k't^u ^au' .ri 'ye ,mei ,k'ung, he had not
14 k'wai', a piece 0/ land, clutli, stone, tlesh, etc. — J/& ~l', vihk'wai'
^1?I k'wen, <o <ie«j); a 6w;i^?^e 0/ wood, string, etc. ||i| pR ^^\ ^^
GHAPTKn 5. SIGNIFICANT NUMKUATIEES. J 35
'k'wuu 'liiing 'k'wcn .c'hai, tie np twofiujtjotH of wood :i\\\ [^ 'i\\\ lllj "f*
'k'wen si' 'kSven .sluMi;i; 'tsi, hifdr/our IhiUs o/struuj; ^>yj; "^ -^f^ JJlI.
a (jraiii (f wheat.
[yjCi
.lieu, (I line or stream o/*tlaj;s, v.iiul, wjitcr, dust, smok*-.
\ 1
1 lull', a traet or stream of clouds, smoke, kind, water.
a'jt s of fiu(iar.
^Ui .p'iau, a cocoa-nut scoop. ^i||,V 7\\, yili .it'iau 'sliui, a scoop of
water.
A-Zr
Wj
.
,\^'i^'n, (t
. .
/-f p'ien', a piece of. fi -^^x >^^ yj'i p'ion' .yiin 't'sai, apiece of
cloud; /-f
"pj"
^^ yih p'icu' ,t'sing 't'sau, apiece offresh (jfvass;^'' /l
^-yih i)'ien' siueh, a piece of snow.
}iL p'ili, ftmnerly [/u p'ih, a piece of cloth 4()feet inlen</th. Sometimes
it is used in an indetinite sense. '
/ll T|J yih p-ili pu', a piece of cotton
cloth.
Jili] shan', a fan; to fan; a fold of a doi.r. \yI }^\}\ \ | liangshan' .nun,
folding doors ; ^^ /^j^j | |
,sliw;ing .slum' .men, a pair offolding doors.
"J 'sheu, A««(/; j" .{j^ 'hheu ,Hin, as much as can be carried i»n the
palm of the hand as in ^^ J|H yih 'sheu hiuch, a hand covered with
hlood. So of earth, etc.
jy .fai, tu carry (of two persons) a Io;id. j'^l '(j; 4^ yih .t'ai ,kia
,chwang, a load of marriage gifts; ^f y^ f^} jf ^j] liuu ki .t'ai shih
hoh, several trays and boxes of eatables.
rf/ tai', a tract of loud water, stnu'ts clouds ytc.
136 MAXDAIIIN ORAMMAIl. PART 11.
I tan', to carrii n
~~"
load (of one person). '
J3/ ^ }''» ^''^"' 'f^^iui, a
/] jtuii, hnYe; a joint o/" pork of several catties weiglit cut in a parti-
cular manner, i^ j/J» W\ J] \H «ung' "ni 'liang ,tau juh, I present you
with two pieces of 2)orl'. (Used in Shan-tung).
pieces of fringe.
a long piece of stone; ^Jv:^ ^^ si' -t'iau kiai' sliih, four boundary
stones, ^^ y^ f{|c A^ ^K ^^6' '^^ .t'iau muli .t'eu, ^/iese several pieces of
wood; Y\'\ f^ JlC B ^Bl 1^^"S -t'iau ,tung ,si ti', two pieces of land ly-
.t'sien, a chain of 1.000 cash. In Chih li* 500 cash are called 1,000. 100-
are 50, and so on, so that a chain of 1,000 copper cash, consists of 'Hang
tiau', or 'Hang tiau ,ching .t'sien. This usage does not extend south of the
Yellow River.
'Pp t'ieh, a 2iicce of jjaper; a card. 'Pp *iflf ^^ yih t'ieh ,kau yoh
yih 'tien 'shui, a little tvater: j^j 3!A' RjJ S|^ 'Hang 'tien 'ii'tien, two drops
of rain
* in Pekinc a new currency has been laicly introduced. One lian consists of 50 large cash called
*^ _1^ 4;^
when exchanged between
ten-cash pieces or tang shih t'sicn pa I WSo One of these yields
three and four of the common cash. About six tian' arc exchanged for one Mexican dollor or be
f "^[^ ,t*o, a 6a//, nmdo l)v winding. 'Tsi is also aj)ia'nilf(l. 'T'[i ~i"*
l;j: yih .t-o 'tsi sicu', a ball n/tli,ra<l; Y\i 'f\^ H3 t|J 'iiang .t'u i..-h pir,
i^ll tun', a meal of rice; a bcutuKj, scoldintj (with ] \ t;i)- *^ ' i{j,|l
^"f j J sli.'ir yih tiiir 'luiu 'ta, receive a yood bfifi/t'/; JH H}.!,! JJIX .sau
tun- fans '^"w '«<''^^« o/r/ce; ^/Ji / — itlU ^t 'IK "J^ xg'ii 'I'^i" yili
l\i. ,tui, a heap (>/' earth, etc. y\ ifK j^T ^b ''''i" j^'^' !'''•' ••"Iiiii, .'^''.t'"
'ho, collected a mass of internal heat (as tVyni running fast); y^ |W] Tr):
J^ .t-seng, a stonj: a fold of cloth /[^ I^J i"^ 'kieu .t^seng .leu, a buil-
diny of nine stories; y^ ^^Ij^^ '^]\ hau 'ki .t-seng 'chi, sevrraf thick-
nesses of paper.
\l\J t/\ch. a Joint. |yJ UP ^''\\iuv^ tsieh ,H\\n, ttvo sentences of a book;
/'[^ .Willi, a pill, as in /•{_, ^^ .wan ynh. )nedicine in the form (f pills;
'
^L ^h^' yii' -^^'i'li y<^>i» (yiiii')j «i^''^-
n/j: wei-, ^o*^e, kinds of medicine, food, etc. ^ 7^ '^ 1^ IJJ. '^^ 'yen
'ki wei' .liang yoh, there are several kinds of (jood )nedicine.
^^ chan, « small cup. i/lichau-, (in Kiang-nan) 90 li; (in north China)
JK c'hih, a foot ^ 14 ,'aEng. inches fur cloth; 12 English inches for land and
138 MANDARIN Or.AMMAR. PART II.
a strol-e of the dock; and hour.Yr^ ~^ liiah 'tsi, a small box. (^J/Oiieh, l"^
~Jr 'liwei ts'i, 'hwei ,ri (hwiir) aii instant. v[g.hu, atea-jjof, or wine-pot. i^vi^
huh, lOfh part of a hau }i]'\' huh, a measure offive 'teu. (i jih, day. [I'iJ!:
,kang, a large water vessel. ^^' M^''^^o^ " watch; 5th part of a night ^\
k-eh, quarter of an hour. JX ,hiu, a ccdty or li lb English. pj|"k'ing, 100
oneu of land, /^kioh, a drinking-horn, 4th of any thing; tenth of a dollar
(in the south). >i£^ kiiicn', chapter of a hook, n koh, tenth of a sheng in
ing pan. g^^ .Ian, a basket, j^ 'leu, a hamper, ^ti 'li -3- of an English mile,
6000 S'|uare feet or 240 square. ,kung. J^^'miau, a second,^^ .nien, a year.
^.p'an, a plate or tray :;mi^.l)'en, a dish; &fm?^.•^^peng', a7i earthern pitch-
)Xi p'ih. 40 /t'<'^ of cloth. ~Jjf\\u'-, two feet and a half; used in measuring land.
T^t shah, an instant (southern) nJR) shang, aforenoon or afternoon.\\^ ,shau
catties in the north ttt shV, a generation. P^ .shi, an hour (two English
hours). ::^p ,siang, a chest, /f^.si, 100/7/ o/'r/ .haw. ^^^m' a year. \\
, tai',
* A iiiiilil. is (lividod iiilo yili 'keng ,t-ien, li' ,keng ,t'ien &c. It is counled from night fall
cnAT'TKl:. .0. COLLECTIVES. 130
wcng*, large ivater vessel, ilyjl 'wan, a small Ixisin. ^^yrli, a leaf of nhooli.
/J yueli, a month.
10 Of these words ll-J^' .sill, |i jih and /] yuch, often take ko' before
them. .C'heu ,'j^ follows .shi" wla-n ko' precedes. 'Tsi "Jr follows |^| jih
time. .Shi heu' H^" |f/^ is also used both abstractly for time, and for a cer-
tain time, as in 7jP li^d H-J- V/^mx' ko' .shi lieu', at that time.
11 Ko- Iju] is the common numeral juiiiielefor all these words, when they
are used as full substantives: e. g. tln| m|^ yih ko' 'wan, a rire basin.
The words Tgi kwei' and ^J^ .c'hu, also take ^|^ ,chang, and -f^ 't'un<;
and :^y ,siang also take j^^ chih. For the five-feet measure of length, the
words pu', jkung are used together with ||Li| k(j'. 'K'eu (-lis a numeral for
Collectives.
come'f
I
pearls ; ,^. ^ i i
'^^t ">•»' 'ki c'hwen' ,king, he read several chains' length
„ prayers;
of ^ „ -
, m
. .,
»'
'•
.Ci> i 'R '\\M^% c'hwen* nien ,chu, two cJiaim of pray-
ing heads; |
\ j
i
^cA Xyi shih c'hwen' sliu' ,chu, ten chains of nnrabc ring
heads
(.1!IJ
fu-, </ pair; a set. \[\ |l1!J %.\ ^ 'Hang fu' tui' 'tsi, two pairs of
140 MAN DA IMS' GllAMMAH. TAUT II.
Q'inr/s:
— ' \iy] ^I||li "J yili fu' .sheng 'tsi, a pair of liorters' ropes.
//zi
\^ .hang, a rank, ^7^
i'l^l
'BJ 'Hang .liang liing' slur, two rows of
^ .kiiin (ch), an army. |T^ J^ ::^ £^ "ling ,ping ,san 'kiiin, he led
jj^
^ ]^ i-kn' tsi ,i'eng, breeze oUuind. j^ )Jx Mi JE 'Hang 'ku tseh
(tsei) 'fui, tivo divisions of rebels: ^:i /J^ ^1 ^
,san 'ku "mai niai*^, three
.1-eu, (I. raft of timber; ^\- J/p ^ J ^-- pah .p-ai chuh ,kan, eight rafts of
bamboo: ']" /V '
'
l}\ •'^hili .jen yih .p'ai, fen men on each raff.
of build inns.
#4
^
"^
•
^ ^ ftff: ttj:
n?l
,shwang, a pair. 3£: $3: "7^ yih ,sliwang .liiai tsi, a pair of
4i\
yili pell jcluuig yili ,ttui' ch'i, 100 sheets make oiw parcel of paper.
^^ t'aii', a cover in (J. "^^ ^;. 4< ::^yih t'au' ,i .shang, asuitof ciothcs;
1—1 iv f'J ''1 flrs'i'' t'au' till yWi \)U^ jiilni, a book ill foi(r covers (ouch
'j^fz
t'suh, a troop of liorses, etc.
— '
^^ /V ^ yih tsuh .jcn 'ma, a
troop of men and horses. Used in 7jC )fpT Iv^*
\i^ till', a i^arty offive or more soldiers. PH P^ ;i>X ^3^ zfe Miang
tiii*^ shah .c'heng yih c'hu', the two paHies fi^tyht at one jjlace.
l)iili .c'heng yih tiii', those two doors do not make a pair.
Ill wn, a company offive men.
13 Several words signifying, kind of, division of, etc. aroused with appel-
i>K P'"') division; streams of icater. \ 5C yJ: j^X /\, yih p'ai' 'fei
Hi at kind of custom.
^|{( 'chung, a seed; soH of. ^^J. ^»ij[ /\. -f^^ che' 'chung .jen lui', this
soH of men; 'JIM'!!- ^ I-H 'na 'chung ,tung , si, Ma< sor< f/^Amj/.
VHf lui', (lei*) ^"'«f^; »o'*^- );i', y^ yih lui' .jen, men of one kind;
^^ -;;li cjt fj'j Hang lui' shi' .t'sing, thinus of two kinds.
T'-)}c yj^ng', A-/?/r/; model. Hj. y)^ /\ ^]]-\ che* yang' .jen p'in. this kind
of man; ]M f^ I'Vj f/}: 'Hang yang' .mu yang-', two kinds of models; iQ,
TtIc pT 1':^ -jf- rhe' yang' 'ku kwtii' shi', this kind of strange ofair.
Jiu. ^pJ^"' rcjwoyc; separate class. i_t ^ilxC /^ elm* ,p}in .jen, this kind
Ic'iinl of trade; :tfi ^M "^^ •1'1 ^'^^'' y^^^ Hiang' shV" .t'sing, this kind of
thiit(j.
If ,kan, stem, ^tli 111 ifl^ ^ ^^ t'"T A,t'a .men ,tu (,teu) s\iV yili
These words may be described as tlie mimes of classes, into wliich appella-
tive nouns may be divided. They are also most of them applicable to ma-
terial nouns. They are applied to nouns in classes, while the numeral particles
are employed with individuals. They might be called modal nouns. Tlieir
syntax is the same as that of the numeral particles, and they are therefore
placed with them here, but they are also sometimes used as full substantives;
to turn over;y^ t'si', order; :(g. ,tsau, to meet with; iflfl i>ii:n', compktelif;
tfe B 1^ "^ rIT l^l' ffi ^— '^v(. 'ijdng kau' su' 'ni 'liang t'siS I have
already told 7J0U twice; ~^ J
'
'
^^ k'ii' 'liau yih Vsing^ , I have gone
once; ihu i^ /K i^d' r!) t'si' ,fan .lai .ho i', what are you come for this
tsoh ,sliang 'liau, tJiis time of trading I have been disappointed, j \ '
P
fE 't'^ y^^^' .hwei lieh', go out once to hunt.
]\ '^ ~i^ ^ 'ta yih liwei' 'tsi .ii, ccdch one net offsh.
'liau ,san liia', it has struck three times; |j 'jffik Zl P 'ta ,t'a ,san
shili Ilia', or 'ta ,t'a ,san shih, give him thirty blows.
etc. i-Li J /Xl :u_L ({[.I'ljuh 'liau 'ki ,tsau jclieng, he has gone out several
times to Jig/if; |:| liji — 7sL 'P'!^
— .Ui j'li J'eii yili ,t'ien 'diwcn yih
jtsau, the sun in one day goes round once; i|i|ji
J
' —^ " 'chwvii 'liau vili
14 There arc some other substantives used to express the extent to which
15 These words are also often placed in juxtaposition with the verbs or
abstract nouns to uhich they refer; ig. i^/j (yjjj che' .c'hang nau', this piece
of disturbance; yf\* t)^ fl* "'"i' .c'hang shi', that piece of disturbance :\iA-
CIlAI'Tim VI.
Os Adjectives.
-
ill M -XX
^
, - I
rlclr. 1^ jlifi sliili, vmptii^fnU: JHl 11^ kwoi' tsien'. honoumhie, Jium-
f/ood, had;^'''i\i '^ ,hi niiliS few, crowded; p'jl ^t,/f.c'heii ,siii, stale, fresh:
^ "jS}!* 'k'li .t'icn, &/«cr, siueet]/J [gi| ,fi"ig -vuen, square, round: ^^
shall- ngoh, virtuous, nncl-cd; '\K I'li k'wai' tun', sharp, hhmt; v^^ |;S
lian<? ieh, eohl, hot; W 3^ -c'lii sul^ •''•^o?(; 5'?i/cZ.-; 7^ n* ^1 )-^]L t'ai'
D'iii'r .li hvan', peaceftdt disorderly; © "M $4 fe fu' kwei' .p-'iu tsien',
ric7i and honourable, poor and humble; '\%\ Y) J ^'i p^ 'Ian to' .k'in 'kin,
lazy, dilifjent.
and hard:
«j>;-?:(///^ ^
^^ ,slie 'c'lii, extravagant: Ip^ |}|l ,k'ing .liien,
negligent and leisurely: Tx. iS jkeng cliili, resolved and straightforward:
)^ 'i^. 't'sien poll, not profound ^(fg ,t'sing ,sieu, fresh and beauti-
: ^
ful Xh j/# tan' poll, thin:
: ^
%^y 'k'iau miaii', c?ei7e)- «72C]? ingenious;
/^> § .ii 'lu, ignorant and stupid; ^^_ |q| ,kien kii', />•???.
to form compound words. When the substantive stands first, it qualifies the
fies it. ~k IJM fa' 'tan (liver), brave; ^^ Sjkung (just) tau' (doctrine),
iust- /h ?J^ 'siau (small) k'i' (yvii^(.'\), parsimonious ; J^X, ]%, ,wei ,fung
disi)Osed.
'k'o .lien teh 'hen, very lamentable; >(t ^ 'hau siau', laughable; fj.j "^
c'huh .k'i (.c'hi). wonderful, rare (c'huh, to come out to view). ^^ ^ .lau
k-,iu' (/r. >v.sY. ov),frm, secure; n^|t filS! ,k'ien jang', (to yield to), humble.
CHAl'TEU 0. ON' ADJECTIVES. 145
second word of a compouml adjective. V |j i|'j ^I'J 'lens: ,t'sinf^ A'mv;^, re-
,kau ,Un,s-wtit ; (ijl fM'^ yin-' j.an^^' {n staff) pang', hard; -^^ ^)i
TT. IE. P'i^K' eluMig' clieng', even; \^V \y^{ \\,{ 'nwan ,lni ,hu, ivarm ; %U
1^' ?;4' J^i^^' ^1''^' *^^»'^^ secj/jv; IM I^ ^ I'^^'il' jl»» .'1""? comphtc; V^
j^ ,t-.«^lncr 'c-lm -c-hu, distinct; iji^ ^'^/J
,kan ,sau ,sau, drjr, jJjL
4il' ,'):'l!
of three adjectives with a negative j)article are filso in use. TLi Ji It". ^^
jkwang .niing cheng' ta', ilhistrious, upriyld and great : *Jo -J ^^ ^
jt'sung .mingjui' chr, inteUiycnt and ivise;~A\ jl L M ^i^^eheng' chih .wu
,si,correct, upriyht, and impartial >h: ; ^f* ^ $3:^'^^'^"^' -^''"^^ P»il> •^^'"oj
'wei 'wei k'uh (c'h) k'uh, secret setise of bring injured: /y /y niT inT
.t-u .fii. s^yy^u/;
'siau "siau k'i' k'v, narrow-spirited;^'lj\ f/llj j[^ i^^.hu .hu
^^ 7RI ^'i ,sheng ,sheng kv ki-, angry: j^ fi fit ;tS-^"lianS
.Chang 'yuen 'yuen, distant, i^^ ,'j'
7L 7^ *^'"o' *^'"-' ••^^^•"'- -J^^^ii'^S
der at; wonderful: j^j {\\\\ to correspond to; op[K>site to. jilting: {\\ ^J
'] u,
hwoh tung', to move; moveahle;V^ Vi, to die; dead; as in ^l^ '
si .ni.
a dead bullock.
9 Appended particle. Tih Ij^a rhythmical particle is ].lac(Hl afirr adjunc-
tives. When they stand alone, it liaa n predimfirr for<«', and wluiu they are
followrd by a substantive it is a connect ice.^^\] *\^ II Jb' hai' tih, dnug, rous;
14G MANDARIN GRAMMAR. PART II.
H ~^J fl^ Si' ,fan.£r tlh, square; fl fj^ ,t'su tih, }ar(je\ coarse; ^^
[J-;/ T'^C T" •t's'^ 'cheug tih yang' 'tsi, mi a?t orderly manner. When tih
Comparison of adjectives.
Comjxirative.
ing mo7'e; (2) by verbs expressing increase and diminution, contraction and
expansion, etc. [3] by placing after the adj'ective certain words meaning a
little; [4] by using the verb 'pi, to compare. [5] When it is obivoiis that
comi)arative, thus ^Q. |M /v ^(T clie' ko' .jen, 'hau, this man is good is
taken to mean this man is the better of the tioo, if two men are present.
11 Adjectives are placed in the comparative degree by prefixing adverbs
[colloquially .hai) still. The verb/jffj ,chia, to add, is used after ,keng, yeu'
and tsai-; -^ yau', to desire, to need, after tsai' and .hwan. The verliJLi
the others. ^'j> '^-f ^^ .^g- ^J 'ni hau' hioh ,keng .yung i', if you are
fond of learning it will he easier; ^ IJW oj' H!/ ;keng ,cliia .k'i [c'hi]
a more virtuous man; ^^ //D^ PK^ jkeng ,chia 'wei 'hien, more danger-
ous; -tO- ll»''l ^^ a/D 3("J' ^'^it'' ko' .jen yen' ,chia 'hau, this man is still
kf vvj \% 'W J ^«'^i' 'l^'^^i tih mull [.mei] 'yeu 'liau, there is no better;
J^ T^' li- ^'i^ ti^ -"lei 'yeu tsai' si' teli, there is no finer; 4^ ^^
-Hr^ r J tsai' ,to ,chwrtng puh hia' 'liau, more cannot be stowed away;
S 'W ^? U^ liwan 'yeu 'hau tih, there is still better; i%- |& M. W
i'jC yau .c'hwen .hwau yau' k'wai', 1 want you to scull still faster; ^ J^
CIlArXEU G. COMrAUI^JON OF ADJECTIVKS. J 47
ill FI'J )L J,< ^ mi kill- 'pi .t'sien yen' kwei' the itricc of rice is much
hiijher than he/ore.
12 For thu double comparativo, as in "the more, the better;" fj^ yueli,
to 2)ass over J or yneh fall are used; and occasionally ^fnf^ J^ yih(i) iiih, and
Ei^ii', more. ;|[ji \}\\ ;|S "|l( yueli .lii.'n yueh 'Ian, the more time hehus,
the more lazij he h> comes : /{^ ^ /!|k /? T yueh , to yneh '\vAn, the more
it is the letter; ^ 'f^ ;j^' 7/ pij yueh 'yen yueh ,fang pien', tJtcmore
you have, the easier it is to live; /(S ^ i\]X ^ yurh .lai yueh ,to, the
more come, the more there will he; ,^, f |'j yj 1(1^, :\\\\^ ?i,^i'' jtsing luing
u' .c'hun .sub, the j^^^cr, the more comphte:^^ jfj l^, ,f^ u'sin' u' tub,
the more conjidlmj you are, the more firmly you loill be convinced; /v ^*
T^ W ^ i^» 0^'° "* .c'heu ti' ii' chai', the more crowded min are, the
no)rower the land they occupy; ^B M nP/ %' ® ?l ^3) 13 yueh full
tuh jshu yueh ftth .ming peh, the more you read, the more you loill
understand.
Yueh fab and yib fab, arc also sometimes used, where the comparison is
simple ^ A &J ^
.
iifc sban' .ji^n yib fah ,to, good men greio more
numerous: ^ ^ fi M ^f
f/J» BiV J '»i yau' sih 'wu yib fab 'hau
'liau, if you wish to ^iracticc the military art, it will be better; ,^> ^* ,^
bik I M M ^ iii*^^' jSbu yueh fah 'tung teb ,to, those who read binder
stand more.
The particle ,7\ ,u, used in books for com])aring, is ixlao sometimas heard
in conversation, as in [Jj 'jC MX TV i'v ^C ,shan 'shui yingSu.ho 'shui,
crease and diminution, -j^ //iJ 77 1^1 ,to ,chia ,feuliang', make the weight
gi-cater; i}^ '^ \\^ J^ Wj 'M M '^-lii'-u '^^liau 'ni ,sin tih .nan kwo',
shuh
—
'
(or c'heu) 'siau 'liau, when washed
,k'wan yib
it will shrink; /y \^
^ ^ [j[:|
wider: ^ i?p;
— lA" ,to ,t'ieu yib 'tien, (uld a little more :
^
j'^l f:^
148 MANDARIN GRAMMAH. I'ART 11,
{^X /r ^ ^'^*^^ ^^ '^'^''^^ ^^'^' '^^^ ^^^^^"j "^'^ "^"'*^ 2/*^^ ^'^'^^ ^^'^ number of
'-a little;' to adj.'ctives. JEH ^ ^ft 'twan ^ieji, shorter; ^7^ H|5j
^
,fien k-i' ,tsing ,sic, the lueather is finer V^ ^' '
Ip yL> ^'^^^ ^'au*
^'—
;
yih 'tien a little better loolcin'j; "7^ kwt'i' yih 'tien 'tsT, a
.ri, '
i^P
little dearer; -jg ^Pj Ij'^ |p elie' ko' tsien' 'tien, this is cheaper; ^U 7C
— '
1p TQ tso' ta' yili 'tien .ri', make it a little larger; /\. ^ J,P 7Q
ta' Hang' 'tien .ri, a little more generous ;-^ ^?/^
'
*P /(j yaii' sung
yih 'tien .ri, let it a he little looser ; j/ii "^ ^-p tso' .c'hang yih 'tien,
15 The comparative is also expressed hij means of J[j 'pi, and sometimes
the help of this word, the adjective in the predicate is in the comparative
I^L 3^^ M-;/ J^ .t'ung till '})i sill tih kwei', those made of brass are dearer
than those of tin: ^ /\^ JL P T A. ?^. ,kiii ,t"ien 'pi tsoh ,t'ieu jeh,
to-day is hotter than yesterdai/: 'j{ti Xij ^% 5("j' ;t-a 'pi 'w.) 'iiau, he is tet-
more honest man than you; tJc JS] JlJl| J fit /IS t{& ^ ^ JlP flli
'wo .t'ung ,t'a kiau' liang' 'k'i .lai 'tsung puh sheng- ,t'a, if I am compar-
ed ivith htm, I cannot surjmsshim-^^ f^ ^U fjlj" H j-j [j^J f^ Sljche'
ko' 'niau ihiiui' .t'sien sliau' till 'liau ,t'ing, this bird sings better than before
y\\\&\i\[\, this p)iece is one foot longer: j]\) i|vi| [1] lilj i^ 'na ko' ,shan
The Sitjicrlatlve.
exceedmyli/,too, too inuvh; (2) by using the urdiual niDubtr ^/ li' yih,
Jirst, or the phrase ~| yj shili Sen, rid ire, before the adjective; (3) (>t/ the
verb ^ /(•/', witli a word meaning extremity, or .severity, following the ad-
4]>^ ^ 1?! 1^ che' ko' .c'ha yeh 'ting kuu', this tea is the best: \\j\ Ty
H^ y] M 't»'J5 t'l' till lil' l''"JgS ^'«'Z/ (/'-'-'((i stremjth : ^JP f|/'l A Hi
[jli Vl^ 11 J '"^ ko' .jen 'ting .ncng 'kan tih, that man is exceedinyly able.
tso' miau', a very large temple: fe J^ -'J^ ||-J ciJJ i[l: kih .shen ngau'
]^ tsui*, exceedingly. '^ .^1) ^ [| J ^jS _h ***"'' 1'' ^'<''' *>'' .hwang
8liang', a very imperious and exacting emperor: ^[j^ 3sT -1^ ilii ^sui' 'hau
pub kwo', vei-y good, without a rival; ,^. ii'V ]f3C yC jiip*'*i ^i'" <^'i'" ^'^S
4rc 'hen, severe, an adjective in j^(j ^t< Jiinng 'hen, vivknf: as an ad-
'hen .k'i miau' tih, very strange and wonderful ; ^^ ]l\c /C tsui' hen ta',
///a crime is very great; -Jk ^/|: II J ^l- h.ii ,shen tih t.-ing, a very deep
well.
'^. uli n^i 11 J / ^ kv.ai' 't'i nnen* tih .jen, a very respectable man: A ±^
is u>ed with \^ a"* an iutensitive suffix, as \u ^l^i" tch .hwang, v^ry tired.
150 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. PART II,
^%T li'^n- f/ood. hero usod in flic sense very, as in English a fjooJ many.
M% "fCon^J^ ^ i25)^)'l<an,tojVh'tsi(or'hauVhi,t'ien)
.mei .Uii, he has not come for several days; >(:f y^ )jH x"liauta' 'tan 'tsi
^ 'lau, old, 7vl ^'^' U^'cai used witli the sense very as in Mj ^ J^
'ma 'lau ,kau, the horse is very hiyUyX, i-^j ta' ,kau, very high.
.Man a particle very, for which there bein<r no character, ^M'.inan is used.
A southern Avords ^^' "^ 0^ /V man' .c'hang tih .jen, a very toll man;
W~hW}M^. m^^n' ta' tih ko'- .ii, a very large Jish.
y\, t'ai', very; too. Of these meanings the latter is more common. AT
'/g Q-Jfe
t4- yfc iWj che' ko'
jnl t'ai''t'sientih.t'iau .U, a very shaUoiv river;
3B chi'S to arrive at; the highest point ; hence highest; most. This and
the two following words are less colloquial than the preceding.
§5 ^. §
3£ /Pt-hi"' .jen ngai- tih .liwang lieu', a very benevolent queen; /^ $
r^ 3:1 y^ ,t len 'pen chi' ,kau chi' ta', heaven is originally most high
and. majestic.
very
"&
little.
s^t^nS "^'ery.
^M "ff /J"* Hh liaug' shen' 'siau, his strength is
\vy
y^/^^"'"^ ^ '
^^' y^^^' the first, is also used as a superlative
I >7/ tiJiih ,fen, ten parts; as a superlative, ear^/'ewie^y; ten ^tarts in ten.
In exi)ressing proportion ~\' "9}
and comparison, parts of ten are used.
CHAPTKK G, THE SUPEULATIVE. J
.-,
1
Jlj fflj shih ,iou .liu<^ li', extremely clever; | — ^y" \ f J' ,slr,h ri'
centences i'onned with jk ,hen 1'^^ hwan^ and 'j^ kili (chi). '/i^\] '^ j|f
^[\^ li' hai' toh 'hen, very severe and violent; fj]|i J^ 3tc t'sni' teli 'lu-n,
tired.
tImJ -^ liai' p-a' tih li' hai*, uery much afraid; ^/^ 'f^ ^'IJ ^ .t'eng tch
^^x kin. close; tight; is used m the same manner. ^;^};^ ^ j^ ^-* wen
jtang teh 'kin, very secure, (kin is a southern word).
The verb -j^ kwo', to pass, with the negative, is also employed, ^'f' yy\
The word '^ tsui' usually precedes; as in JJv "gf ^\ ||ii] tsui' 'kMi puh
kwo', extremely wretched; J^ 'h' 'T* iS- ^''"'' j^^i""© T^^i kwo*, very fra-
grant.
The word (j"^ till is sometimes used instead t»l" ^%JF teh, as in the following
examples. \}i '^ [J^J jl< k^vai- loh tih 'hen, very ,jlnd :
"JV^ ^ ^^^ Jlv:
,kau til' tih 'hen, yer// ///'/// tind great ; ^^ .^ly H J V^ <yen .cheu tih kill,
very much grieved; yj;'\ W] ]if ^^ ,8in ,8ien tih kiJi, very fresh; \3\ \] J
^"'ij
1^ ,hiniig till li* hai*, tTryy?e;vr. In some ex am])les tih and kin change
places, thus we may hear \>;^, ^ ^^^ [j;J ,wen ,tiuig 'kin tih, ver y secuve;
'kin also occurs last, Jf}\ |t)j| U J ^^ jeli nan' tih 'kin, very bustling.
23 Some of the superlative adverbs follow the adjective which they quali-
fy. They are kih, 'kin, and shah. The latter is never a prefix and is ex-
clusively colloquial. "^ ^\^'\^'nV\\^, very wretched \^^ tSE .t'eng kih,
hcavii] 'A-lt ^^<» 7Q .11:111 'kill .ri, vcnj hard; ) Y\ ^^ liwali 'kin, very slqj-
pt:ry; fe '\'jt ^]v% "c'liano; k'wai' shall, vev)/ (/ladi^, '\'K fjj^ .liaiii: k-\vai'
shall, very cool: H,^ Ii'i ^?: iiwaii hwoh shah, very warm;^.ji jgf ^f^^ ^^
jwaTi hwoh "kill .ri, very elasfic.
24 The sense foo is expressed by y^ t-'ai', ,1^^ feli, tny. kw.r', aud ^jl^ j"
kwo' ,ti. T'eh, a i)urely colloquial word is nut uncommon; as in 7j\, ]1\t
P^ Al\i »^ ^^^i^ii lit!^! tili t't-'h kill, the water floivs too fast; ^Xi ^^ ^
/f\ ^ij t'cli kwci" 'mai ])uh 'k'i ('c"hi), it is too dear, I cannot afford to
hny it; TJC ijK mV y>"v :t!2. ^^^J^ii 'chang tih t'ai' kwo', the loater rises too
high, or very high: -^ l/S kwo' jeh, too hot; f^ ff^ :i^ fcj( sing- .t'sing
kwo' ngau', his disposition is too proiid; f ^1 ) 1;^ -tl^y r^ ^t'au 'tsieu kwo'
.to shah pull ,wan, the rebels ore too numerous to he all Icilkd; 3^ W^ :i!^
"Town too tall; but as Ix't'ore observed, too and very are but slightly ditferent
in Chinese grammar. ^ Ifi fl^ ^Vi "^W^ ,hwang ti' tih shah fall
kwo' cluing', the emperoi^'s use of ca.pital punishments is too severe; ^pC h^
61/ ^ )£ ^ ix l^i'^^i'' jshu tih ,kwei 'kii t'ai- ,k-iug, the method of teach-
in'/ is too lax: Jl JJ yj^ y^ .wang fah t'ai' .yen, the law is too severe;
^ /^ ~'Z ^5^ l^f'li ,kwei t'ai' ,sung, his ride of teaching is too lax; Ij
|
,/C y^ JW jl^'^'i ^i'^ t''^^" sheng', his liver is too much inflamed
in the south; i^ffj ^ ,kau ,to, much higher; /JC ) § 1^ :^ 'shui 't'sien
tell ,to, the water is much shalloicer. These expressions arenearlv the same
in meaning as -jft i^ kwo' ,kau. -}I^ )^- kwo' 't'sien, passing common
height and shalloioness ; /v J'Q ^'J ^ |^ ^^--jcupi .t'sien ,to teli ,to, men
ore much more numerous ihun Ixforc. Tih^J is also used for |^ teh acir-
CHAin'EU G. NUMBEUS. 1.53
cunistnnce which seems to shew that both words are merely connectives, and
that the comparative power is in tlio position of tlu; (lualityiiit^ word. Tiiis
remark applies also to the various forms of the superlative coiitaiiiiii<<- fjh
anJ teh.
2() Tliere are some negative forms wiiich may Ix' noticed licrc In ^^
^C '''I! M l>uh ta' 'li 'hau, it is not very good: — |{;|'| ^ ^J" yj), tien
puh 'hau, it is not at all good tliere is a change in the extent of the com])arison
or of the intensity asserted; otherwise the negative is used with the words
already given, without change, as in ^^ >( J M^'A P^li 'hau, stif/ worse.
For further illustration of these and similar forms, see the chapter on adverbs.
and with distinctness by adverbs and other words, as in the case of "^
.c'hang, long; ;^ ^ .c'hang ,sie, a little longer;^ f^ ,keng .c'han'-,
longer -^^^ ^ .c'hang ,to or .c'hang teh ,to, much longer; ^K ;^ 'hen
.c'hang, very long; Ifj ^ 'ting .c'hang, tlic longest. These varieties in the
times as much; and /J ,fen the words for decimal parts, as in -^ ,21 yJ
,to ,san ,fen, three tenths greater.
Number.' •.V.
28 Chinese numbers when written have the same syntax with adjectives,
and therefore may be regarded aa such. They precede the substantiv<' they
(i>ai) kwo, the Jive kinds of grain, and the hundred kinds of fruits: ZL [H.
7L T -r ,»"» •li^^'^i l^i'"" (^'^0 'til w'^n, he has come back several times. Phra.ses
not placed before the distinctive numeral particles, but before the substan-
tive itself ; e. g. ^ y^ |il yih chih ta' .c'liwen, a large boat. Thus
the syntax of words of miiubor differs in colloquial from tliat of adjectives.
si', foiir,
6
'u,Jive,
luh, six,
t'sih, seven,
TT
A pah, eigh t,
'kieu, nine,
shih, ten,
^
'
shih yih, eleven, _
peh, humored,
^ ,t'sien, thousand,
"I /v IV yueli sliih pah, the 18th of the second month ; II]"- |'| z.\ ~\
32 The word p^ ti', jiroperly meaning order, is used as a prefix for or-
dinal numbers, as in ^^ "U /p^^ ti* t'sih 'pen, the 7th volume; i. e. in t>rd( r
the senventh volume. Tlie original use of this word is still ]tres('n<'<l in a
j)hrase both literary and colloquial, -yvl ^r t'si' ti', oriler.
33 In naming the days of the month, the word '^ ,c*hu, Jirst, or bet/in-
ning, is })refixed to the first decade, thus ^JJ "I ,c'hu shih, the tenth. ¥ov
the second and third decades the cardinal numlxn's are used alone, thus ~|
34 Of the months, the first is called ic yTj cheng' jiiuh, and the 12th'Jl|(
35 The cycles of ten and twelve are used to denote years. They are '|^
3ljt'n, ;7^ ,kwei; and ~J^ 'tsi, jj^'c'heu, ^ .yin, })\i 'mau, /p^ .c'hen,
The year 1855 was ^ *j|J yih 'mau, 1856 p^ /K "pinj; .c'hen. The pre-
36 To the latter series are attached the names of animals; viz. \]}];\, 'shu,
9. ^1?- .hvu, monkey. 10. ^-!j ,ki,/u/6V. 11. j^ keu, (%. 12. l|*t
,chu, pi(j. The years counted according to the duoth'uary cycle, are said to
37 The use of numlx-rs as adverlw may 1k» observed in the following in-
}t} ^ > ill k<>' yili ko' 'tseu c'liuli .lai, one hy one theij came out; f]^] ^p)
y\i IP 1^ ^ ^ii Miiing ko' 'Vnm^ ko' sung' liwei' 'tseu, two and tioo
vih e-li\v(.'ii- till ,1u hwai- Tkiu, the chains are all broken one hy one; '
J^p
i\^^$-%,^ yil» P'-ii yi^^- -r'-^i ^''^ ;C'heng kwo' k'u', the floats
^\\
one by one ivere pushed by.
separation and union. ^lany verhs and adjectives are treated as abstract
I f'A ^^"in' 'k^i ,t'sien ,t'sieu, ten thousands p>ast ages and a thousand au-
tu)n7is;a 1n Q VM V^^^ (V^^) ^ V^^^ -^^^b he submitted to him and obcT/ed
him in all respects; Q -^ ^ peh shi' ,t'ung, all his affairs succeeded;
u1 -^
^'^i ru r*^^^ y^^^o'
7^^'^'*'^ 't'sau, all kinds ofjlowers and grasses;^
myriads of horses. %
40 Small numbers are used in many phrases to indicate change and diver-
sity. y\\ ^^ "b "v -^^ /jArpuh yau' t'sih 'sheu pah kioh, do not put out
your hands and feet (to stiike or trespass); xT TO ^^ ^^ t'sih k'iih pah
,wan, '»aany windings; JH ^[^ .^» j^^'i j^i'i •'' ^S ^'^^ ^i«s different ob-
jects in view.
41 Small numbers sometimes from the nature of the case imply universa-
lity, as in 13 f S 'S!- W i^' 'lifii ^cln nui' (net), luithin the four seas;
through the whole ivorld; \L\ Jj -O ^ sT' ,fang ,chi .min, the people of
oil day fill evening: H^ -^ RlJ yib In' .e'han .t'sieii. he proceeda
s un-
CHAl'TEll 7. ON THE mONOLXS, 157
hitterupkdhj on the way: [R] ^^ yih chih 'tseu, icalk utmight on;
Itn ^1 '3K yih hi- .p'ing ,Mf;aQ, prosptrity through the luhok journey ; ''^-
*
J /k /i ^ yili kSvjii- .rY 'tseu, walk together; — ' J^ ^ ^y, yih sia
,chueu nien', with his whole viind bent on it .[^ ,§* yih ^siii yili
— ^ o^ "T ?R
;
i', the same mind; ' y»h .Hen tuh liia' .hii, read it down
connectedly; ' '
'^$^ \^^ 7(2 yih k'i' uien' ,wun, he read it connectedly till
he had done;' 3£ uil yih ,s1r*ij<j; yih shi', hin whole life.
42 Separateness and diversity are indicated l)y JyJ hanf,', two: PyJ f^
'liang yang- (kind), (///ft7r«^; pf] y liauo; hia-, «/>«/•?:: f|^ '£|£ j^J ^^
'pai tsai' 'liang &\\\\, place them, apart; T^\ii YH i?H yQ"©*^^' t«^'' 'l\An^
.t'eu .fi, jnit them separate: Yv\ \)^ tlj /\. 'liang yaug' tih.jeu, he is a dif-
ferent man /^ Yn Til Hv 'yen 'liang ciiung' tih, they arc of two kind^s.
43 In the view thus obtained of the extended iist^ of these words, they may
er l>y which they express various ideas usually belonging to adjeetived proper,
lo pronuuns nr to adverbs.
44 Yih is and adjective for e.vaiiipie, in '^J \ in .V6ic, the whole. When
sameness id expressed by yih yang'-, or yih ko' yang* 'tsi, n uiim«'i-al and a
substantive together coiTespond to a pronoun, idem, the same : JtJ Jj(iu 'liang
ther, Inl "3^ yih .t'ung k'ir (c'hu'), go together, the numeral with the
word that follows it corresjiond to the adverb together. Yih has also an ad-
verbial siguitication in /^ yili ting', certainly ; 3:!)
)'^^^
^'^"S '^^
CFIAPTFU VI
Ox THK Pr.OXOUN.
1 The i»ronouns vary mncli in the south eastern provinces, and eveai in
some part*} of the region wliere mandarin is spoken. Tlw nimilxjr of priuii-
158 MANDARIN GUAMMAi;. PART II.
Personal Pronoims.
2 Tlie words used for i\iQ first personal pronoun are^^'wo (colloq.)or 'no-o
[read], P^ ,tsa* or Hg-.tsan [in Shantung and Cliihli .tsan in Peking .tsan,
and .t«a], 4%'ngi^^ ("sed in Shantung and Chihli). The phu-al is formed
by adding in^^en; t^fe ffl IS ^ S" 01 it^ 'wo ,men .hwei .lai tsai'
.t'siau 'ni, ive loill come hack and see you again; 1^ /ylj ,\^ ^'.'^
^ m
pieh ,sin .fan 'wo, do not annoy me [my mind); ^fe l^n \% i'5 "T wo
kih ['chi or 'kei] t'a' .yin 'tsi, I gave him money; "(tfi \f\ 'jtC X ^T
[njt'a' ,men yen' ,tan koh 'liau yili .liwei, they again ivaited for a time;
P@ ifl ^S % Mi ill ^ t'i ^^ :t£ ,tra ,men .mei 'yen kien^ kwo'
che' .yang ,kwei ,ku, we have not seen this sort of custom; j|li |j J ^ P^
_^ t'a' ,men t'i' ,tsa 'mai, they loill buy it for me. In Peking it is common
to use 'wo .men, 'ni .men, t'a' .men, when the singular is meant, as tsan and
tsa which properly mean, lue are used often in the singular for 7, me of the
two sounds 'ngo and 'wo for ^xl I 'wo is new. The initial ng is assigned to
3 'Ni '\^\ you the second p)ersonal pronoun \B i\iQ ^ome Si?, ^ 'ri, for-
merly pronounced 'ni. When the reading sound changed, the old pronun-
ciation was retained in colloquial use. The abridged form 7dFof the charac-
ter ^ was appropriated to the colloquial pronoun, and ^retained for the
reading sound. In Peking ^^ w\ '"in na' [also written 1>p |f^] 'ni ,na']
is used respectfully for ijou. Prcmare says iJJ'jen is used. The dictionary
of native speakers.
t Usually heard in the first tone because it is without accent and therefore in Peking prefers
Ihat intonation.
CHAPTKU 7. PERSONAL IMiONOI'S'. [gj
4 F<^r the thirdptrson tlic old word |[l) ,tji' of/itr is tin- oiuuion man-
darin word ivad fa or t'a the old book wurdtJ lor the tldrd ])ertsoii \r A and
1^ .c'hi, arc much usod in the sonth eastern dialects, At Canton^ -.kiii jg
5 Tiiere are several other sufhxes for the jjlural occaHionallv miwle upe of.
They ^ ^ § are .c'hai, 'teng, .t'san. These words are nsed in letters,
iL rJ' H;/ ^'J /t '^^" "If" ^'^' '!"*" '^'^i 'pi '"• tih ,t'siii,- \-liu, our vo-
lume is mare clearly printed than youra; 'frj f)\j ^J^* f] J
— ' j-^ ,|l/'.
'fang full 'wo tih yih yang' .mu yang', it is like mine; [i|t
I] J ^j ^^
'ngan tih 'raa puh k'wai*, my horse is not swi/f. For tih the hook jiarticle
^, ,clu is sometimes used, hut only in the higher or .wen li j3^ ijg collo-
quail; e. g. ^ >^ h^ ^f fiP ^E il^ ft*'^vo .chY shwoh lian tsih tsai'
tuh jshu, what I say I /ike is a scholar's life; ^^p ^j^ r -^ ^xl f^ -^
'^*'
1ul ,fei 'wo jchi" shi' 'wo puh yau' 'kwan ,t'a, it is not my affair ayid 1
7 The case paiiicles em])l(»yed with substantives, are used in the same
manner with pronouns, as in ^ jfli llil IJ'J ,taug ,t'a mien' .t'sien, />//orr
his face; ^\ -fj; Mil fjC Z^ P»di yau'hiang* 'wo k'uh, rifo )wt come weep-
imj to me; |/J> ^l' JHi u^i 71 'ni .ho ,t'a shwoh .ming, fell him plainly.
pronouns, some word is appended to denote place. ^J^ f/(; f{li IJ |>
f^ jf^
'wo .t'sung .t'a na' 'li .lai, 7 am come from him.
lir/fexice Pronouns.
9 The reflexive proiu)un i^ p| r|^ t.>r ki, ('clki) or |f | :^<. tsi' ,kia, or
1(39 MANDAUIN GRAMMAR. TART II.
g -i^ |(}i t«i' ko' ,rX or sometimes 5^ j^ |£ 'clii ko' ri. Thus g g^
i{J' T 4^ S: tsi' 'ki t'so' 'liau 'chu i', you yourself were lorong in your
lill Q ^ -t J Jta jt'* *si' 7^^ shang' 'liau tang', he hiniseJf has been
deceived. Tsi'' ,kia seems to be older tlian tsi"-' 'ki. It is common in old
10 In fixed })hi-ases, the syntax of which is that of the books, tsi' and 'ki
are used alone, as in Q i^j ^ Ha tsi' ,shang ,shen 't'i, he wounded his
oivn body ; J^ /v T^'J Cla suu .jen 11' 'ki, injuring others to hcnejii one'6-self.
lone, and is placed before and after tlie verb. Yet 'ki and ,kia are frequent-
ly appended to tsi' in such cases ; f^ l\K tsi' ,c'hi tsi', ^e cheats him-
12 The reflexive pronoun takes after it the possessive particle tih, and the
other case particles, like nouns and other pronoims, but the pei-sonal pronouns
are usuaUy prefixed: 0i^ ^ \^^ g 2u i^tsohjih .ho 'ni tsi' "ki
often omitted. ^5» M^J M -'L^ T^ iS '"i til^ -^i'lng jSin puh hwai', you
will not lose a good cooisciencc; itli jij 5L /C ,t'a tih chang' ,fu, his fa-
ther-in-law; ^ $"^^ W. -^Jf^ '^^'0 jt'si ,kia (ch) li' 'yeu ping', my
loife is ill: ^^ ^^ J '^^'O f'u' 'mu .nien "lau 'lieu, my parents
are old.
Demonstrative Pronouns.
14 The comm(»n demonstratives are ^ che', th is and jjy na', that. When
apidied to appellative nouns, they are usually followed by numeratives; ig.
^^J ? ^ W^ '4X J
che' ko' jih 't«i puh .neug keu' 'liau, it cannot
CHAriER 6. IN-TERROOATIVK PRON'OONS. \(]l
t
be (lone to-day; ?f|> fPl A 1\ n/ll tf'j JM na' ko' Jon puh 'kian^ .t'si'n-
'li. that man does not attend to reason and propriety : ^^ jj/ij ||j [^ |I' -
Eh 'M clie' ko' ,tunp: .si kiaii' .slicn ,mo, n-hat {stJn's-fhinr/ cnflcd? ^J
|j'
i'fij
IB i!i m:v- .twan tair 'li, f/,af ilortrhir : -£f 1% }^ ~)/ (•]„>' k'wai' ti'
1.0 The personal jn-nnouns are often used in ajii)Osition with the Jenion-
stratives, as in |l!l :iTi 1p^ A. t'a che' ko' .jen, this man, and tlius become
themselves demonstrative^.
16 The particle jpl ko' is inserted after the'denionsfrativcs li.-fon' any ob-
jects, whether they have a special numeral nr not; j]H ||h| 'j\^ I^l/ilj
[]~J die'
ko' 'shui .hien tih, this water is salt; 1y\> |lnj ^^ IJtj niv ko' .c'hai .c'hwen,
that wood boat. Che' and na' are sometimes used without an intervening
particle; iQ. f ^!J fj> |i-i| chu* .c;hiau ,ciiieu ku-, this bridge is tirm.
^
^
18 These demonstratives are used iu fonuini; adverbs of
che' 'li, here: 1]f
SK 1^
^ na' 'li,
^^^*^
there; :tn, J)^^
l-dl r-^
>Q
})laoe: e
19 The book words ^-^ ]x\^ pi fsi, th(tf, this, are used t«»gether in the
seuBeon/iis and that, as in \-\^l PJ [lic ilti Iti] '^ bang kwoh pi tVi
jSiang jcheug, the two countries this and that contended toijether :
^^ jjr ;V^
^^ shwoh 't'si tan' 'pi, he spoke of this and that: ^ j[^ ^ f^* dii' 't'si
chr ,pi, ^) this jtlae*'- and that. T'si', is also used \\\^\^ J {[J, t'si' ti', here;
and in ^* fJ jjtl i 1: '"hi 'veu t'si 'li, how can this be?
20 The t)M form of ill clie', was ^ 'ehe; K'ang-hi quoting th(^ ij^} [JVl
'
'mo,'
.lai, icho comes'^ %^ A .slnii .jen, ichat man? Jf f\^- \fi ^ %^ ^-J
na' .p'ai .leu shi* .shui tih, whose is that monumiintal arch? jjy 'na,tvhich'!f
read 'no, but in colloquial usage it retains its old vowel a. So ^E .na, the
verb to bring, in extensive colloquial use, has also through that circumstance
kept the old vowel, y*} .ho, an old word for 7ohat, is used occasionally, but
it is not purely colloquial. Persons who affect a 3J ^St •^^'^'^i 'li; (literary)
22 Of "^ j^ .shen 'mo, ivhat? the old sound was jlm' 'ma, hence j^
jira' is used in some old books. The old sound of \\ .shih was je]i. Pre-
mare gives examples of shen' without 'mo, as in Jf\ ff-X -Xs- ilil ^^ B^
m\\\ 'kan tan' ,t'a shen' tih, / do not dare to say anything to him ;
'
j "[/p
^
fejr 0^ ^- ,kan 'ni shen' tih sh'i', what docs it matter to you? It is more
common to use mo. The omission has tlie air of a literary affectation.
or is us(!d only for rhy tlunical pur})OBes, as in ;i3. ^ ^f^ che' ,mo yang' or
chc' ,mo ,sho', in this way; i^l' il^ '^^'^^ 5^^o or 'tsen ,mo .chu ^ how?
iJV j^ T^ iia' ,mo yang', in that mode; :lg, j^ che' ,mo, in this way:
i^^ f^ 'f'llC
tsen ,ino yalrigS in tuhut way? The word )j j men is sometimes
used for K'mo in the Chihli mandarin, rj //on >.i -:>i*> t ';• -!
* In Peking shen' 'nio, or shen ,ma (with words changins their tone) ami shih ,ma. Shen
says Rang hi's dictionary formerly pronounced jin' or jin, both in the lower series. When ? be-
came sh and tlip word took its place among the mandarin tone classes II and III it changed again
in PekiTig by a new tone law from II to the hia p'ing, see Part T. chap 5, in paragraph 2.?.
CHAPTKU. ."J. RELATIVE rilONOrS'S. JF,'^
23 Tlio comparison of ^ 'tsiii [old sound 'tsim] with oho^ and na'. In
yyy \& used tor 2? '*•''*'"• ^^ is spelt 'tseng by rrenuire, and itj bo pro-
nounood in smne jmrts. But 'ts^cn is mon> correct. Sofne 6t1ier WorfJrt in feti aVo
shin)).
24 'Ki 7J<^ several, how 7r) aiuj? one oftheindetinitepron<»un8, is also used
of nrtOfH
25 The phrase ^' jy , to 'shau, compounded of two adjectives 7Wrt»y,/r?r,
also asks the question how manyf When in an indicative sentence the de-
rived use of these vrowls is readfly undorstooJ, as in |x n3c ^^ J^ r\\\\\\
shwuh ,to 'shau, he has not said if they are many or few, \. e.hotamany. The
interrogative use may have grown out of this.
The common inter rofjatiue inthenovt\\ for "how?" is^'to in the tone/tt'a
wliether ^^ is the ])roper character for this word. Shang p*ing is the tone
U8<xi when 'shau ^^ is added, ae in ^' ^^^ /^ ,to shan .jen, how many
men?
Relative J*ronou7is.
2f) The inb^rrogative jironouna I)eGOini' relativn in the answers to the ques^
tinns which they a.ik. as in the following cases. y^ ^ yfji ,t'a shV .shui,
who is he? %f /E liU^ P"^' huui teh shi .shui, I do not know idkd
-f^ Mtc
htik; "{^ ^
'^ [-I-J 3^ 1} .t^u'.tung ,si tih ?hr 'mk6%w%ich is
»'
f|/«|
"
,1110 kill' .t'bien, 2vhat is its price if -^\ ^jH ptr j^^ ^^ jiuli cliili .sheii ,1110
.t'sien, it costs nothhuj', i^v ^'"^ n'r WAi 't'*^^*" y**"?;' 'ki<ii (cliie) .shwoh, m
?/;/ia« loay is if to be cxplaimd; gxi -^^ 5n ® t^C M- fJX. ^^i^voh puli .lai
'tsen yang' kiai[chie] sliwoli, I cannot say in what ivay it is to he explained -y^
0^ ml ^^ '<^^^ -^^^ 5^'^^ ,hwa, ?<j/ie72. rfoes itjioicer'i /f\ T^P ;;^ ^^ /-J
f If: :tiit 7H ^^ H^ piili jChi slii' ,8aii yuch 'li .Invan slii' 'chi .shi, / do not
Itnoxo if it is in the third month or when it is; Jjy
'
4;^ /V f'|£ u^ p]
^ Ip is ^ V "fi yi^ '^10 jt'" 'li -t'^'ii 'yen 'clii ko' tsiir hidi till, m
that company of men hmv many bachelors of arts are there? 7N 7^ i?R
till, 1 do not know exactly how tnany bachelors of arts there are; 'pj ^'
J^ $IfO /^ "pE 'yen ,to 'shall cliiaii' ,fii tsai', how many chair-hearers are
there at hand? ^IX ^^ [p) ^ ^^ nnih 'yen wen' ,to 'shaii, I have not
asked hozv many there are? ^ J jf^ ^|h1 /v .lai 'liaii 'chi ko' .jeii, how
7nany persons have come: ^\ T^r* -^ ^^ ilBl jnih ,chi 'yen 'chi ko', I do
not know what number.
27 Where we use a relative pronoun agre(?ing with the nominative of a
verb to express an actor, it is only necessary to use a verb with its object
follon^ed by till. Tih represents the particle ^che' of the book style. The
latter word though found in some of the south eastern dialects, tis in that of
except in quotations.
28 It will be seen in the ensuing examples, that tih is also found in the
absence oi )y\'^o,(\n Shantung sho) the word Avhich regularlv introduces a re-
P^ tih is the only jiarticle to mark the relative clause. This is in fact an
extension of its possessive force, as the modern representation of ihe genitive
particle -^ ,chi. The relative clause in a Chinese sentence has a fixed posi-
sessive case, including a verb with its object. TST A fife M %' ^ /K
CHArTKK. J. liKLATIVK PRUXOUNB. 165
P4t OO 'ff 'k^i •]<-» shwoli .wt>i slmir 'chti ,t'ien kian«];* ,che peh .siang,
Me ancients said, that on those who acted well heavtn would send down
many hlessinqs. In inaTidiirin this <niot.uti(>n would b;, pT /V^ j'j^ hZj ^'
pX
'till ,f'ien
1?)(^
van*
ri} fill
Tli<'
Jon ,Hlnvoh .wei sluur
sentonce ^\^} ^ Gi
^ .wii null .c'litii 'clic, woiild 1)0 in mandarin Jx ^ "1^ fW lT 11^
mull *vni ]»u!i tso' ,kwau till, Mere t:;ere 7io7ie who did not take o(fice. The
ohl 5xi <L T?<' y^ '^^''^ ,chi .liwai .i, my thouijhts, would hi- in colloquial
^Xi II J S .S»
'^^'^ ^'•^ jS'"^' 'siang.
"^ i§
29 Further examples are such as fl^ ^\ ^ |]|] ^ j| 'yeu .t'gien
tih pull 'k't'ii .k'ai ,siau, those who have money are unwilling to spend it ^^[^
W i^ Bj /v #<- c'hih .fang .t'sien tih .jen ,kia(chia), ^7i0.9e/)er5on.9 who
live on house property; ^ jT^ JQ 0^ 'yen ti' 't'u tih, those who have
?a«f/;p|ij ^ \]i] UJ ^^ tlllkiang hioh wen' tih yau' siau" ,f'a, Mo.sfi
who have learning will laugh at him: ^ l]j /}£ -^ ^^ /V lai tih sh'r
30 The book particle }y\ 'so often introduces a relative clau.se after the
t.sau* tih .fang 'tsi shi' ,kien ku' tih, the house which I have huilt is strong;
"fill Bi % Vi] Av ipJ ,t'a '80 .wei tih shi' X'^nv^Jhat which hehas done.
31 In all such sentences 'po may be omitted, as in y^ J^* 0-J x
A^ tPJ -'^ jtVsie tih .wen ,chang puh ,t.sing ,kung, the essays which h
has written are not good compositions.
other words; e. g. ^ }y\ ,kuug 'so, a public 2)lace; Jy\ 01 sho t«ai', a
place] )y\ )J/» so 'i, thtrrfore. A .wen 'U phrase often used, is j^; tf: y^]
^ clur tsai- ho '80, where do you live? Another is \^ ^ fj" fTj fffJ
/£ ^- ^ 5^** '^^
-^""o *i'^ »*" ^^^^'
i^'^ '% "^^ ^"* Mictions are Just and be-
Distributive Pronouns.
33 The words ^^ koh, -t^ chnli, ^ 'mei, every, eacJi, are used as dis-
tributive pronouns. ^ yv ^ ^ 3l .Q' kok .jen 'yen koh 'chu i', each
man has his oion opinion; ^ -^ [^ f^J p| 0^ ^i5 koh kwoli 'veukoh
kwoh till liwa', each kinydom has its oivn lanyuogc ;
-fj' -^ :^ f ^' koli
'yeu koh j&x\^^, every man has his ^iecuUarities;^ /V 'g* Q ClLkoh .jen
'kwan tsi' 'ki, each man attends to himself; iK J^ -^ ^ /l)^ >(^ chuli
.t'iau shi' puh shun' .sin. each of these things failed to please him; TfP Q"|'
E 0V 9- ^ elp] ^ 3^ _t na'jkien.c'hentihshi-'chuhyihjfiau
tseu' .hwang shang', that traitorous mandarin's affair was reported in every
particular' to the emperor ;^ g ^ Hi jlj tK] AL 'mei ,t'ian .tanj
jk'ai tsai' 'chi shang', each particular ought to he icritten out on paper : ^
*~^
.^t v^ chuh yih pien' ming, let each matter he clearly exp>lained
;
^ i^
tu
j-^ .^
I I
r-j.
'
^ ,
'mei .niep c'h.uh .men yih t'si^ every year
.0 ^ 'i
I go
"f
,
out once-
'
W^ T^ 1+ ^T ^U" 'mei yang' .t'sun 'hau ,sin, in every thing keep a good
conscience; ^ :i^ -\2 7\^ mei ,feng t'sih ,t'ien, every seven days. Koh,
also has the meaning all. Chuh. means each in succession. Tliis word is
always.
Indefinite Pronouns.
having an inten-ogative particle, shen' ,mo and .shih ,mo, are used in the
.some matter: T5 M* )S dfc .^ "Tmuh .shon ,mo .k'ung .fang 'tsi", there
CnAPTKU 7. INnKFISlTK PROSOrSS, l(!7
t« wo empty house; ^
5K W/b y^'^»
-§1- [i^;
\\\ ^^^^ j"^o si"' •^"i •"'• ^"t-^"
rt/<y /t'//er c'07«r/^ ^\ lu f^i TSt ]^ pull c'huh 'c'lian .slum ,ino, it dwa
not produce an ifihiuti] y\\ ^' \\' ^^ pnli ,q^\\\\ .6\vi\\ ,\i\Q, there U no ijreut
miatuke; ^ "Ck" Jfe "^ ^'i^:/ ^''Ll "I'^i pI^*'" .i»o t''hVh h<>h .ni, have yofl^
hought anythimj to eat? ,J^! ^j^l f/ix "^ )i^ 'sianp^ .shcn ,mo tso* .shcn
Vsdon 1)01^ .\a\, sevei-al aged 2^(^'ffons came; '^ y^ \y^ ^ i'^ 7^ ^
jjy m 'yen 'ki ,k'o 'Ian shn' nmh tsai" na' 'li, tlicrc arc sonic old ti-ec&
there.
che' and na'. and in the comparison of adjectives, as expressing a weak sup-
eriority. ^^ ^T i'.Z ^ ji^i Ifljj .sh<'nf]f i' .mei .sie jeh nau', trade is not
brisk; ^ ^v P^ )-^ ]:} 'yen ,8ie D'hlili mnh 'yen, is th^ere amjthing to
eM or not^ J±[ xE i^ Jl "W ^ ft xu k«fv' l^ai' tsiangr shanp^^'yeu
38 This use of tlie word .sie is also found exemplified in the phrase ^f"
The same words are translated n liffJ,' heffer. wh^n tlior form the predi«ito
of some noun, at? in ^ p "^"f "^ TQ .kin jih 'liau ,sie .ri, to-doi/ lam
better. ,Sie also follows ^ ,to, as in [^l 1^ ^^^ j''2t
mai teh
])uh ,to .sie ,r'i, I hove not bov<jht ranch.
— ^ 5^
by " '
'tien ,rl as in |j'^ ^'^ {{i Y'!t ^ yih .sie .ri .tsniit: 'yinp >
mnh 'yen, there is vot tJtn least trove nf it; ^ ^ j^li 111 ^* (5^
/T^ tJX '}'<*" y'^ j^'*" •'^* J^**'^
'^'^ ^'*'
-'"'"o i^'liwang', there is a little appear-
ance of vulgarity in him.
40 jSie also follows verbs in tho sense smnr. a little, with or without
kion' ,Hie k(/ ,fiinf]^ (^"Sii?^) 'f^'i^'^gj hc^ heard 80inc tittle rumour ofif;]^ ^^
S #1 :& "il "6: M t'l! .t/(i Tartar* .si^ko* MmA\ ila\' .Ur^^'Vuhrkept
some gohl-fsh in a Ixtsin; jfe tl^ S tf S ^^i^'J ^9! ^^ ^ l5^ ^j^
f^ ,t'a tso' ,sie eheii^ ,mo .hu 'li .hu .tMi tih shi' .t'siiigj lie did admc foolish
thing.
Adjective Pronouns.
41 Thc3 most cnminoii adjective pronouns used in the sense of all. are •0p
jtu,-:^ .t'siuen, "^ ,kiai (chie). They form tlie plural of substantives as
already explained. The substantive to which they belong forms the subject,
yih jsin, / thi7ik they are all of one mind,; ^<. ^ pK T5 yih .kia (ch)
.t'siuen pei' hai', the whole family s^iffereA;^ \\\ WP ^ t0 "({ji ^vo
shi' yih Mi, all men arc one as to their moral principles; /\ yC tp^ T^P
y^ ^ f^'^ ^; ^^ .jen ta' kai' chi 'yen shan pau' ngoh pau^, men all
43 There are several words meaning all, which are used in addressing per-
^1^ chung*. Lieh, maaxis aro-anged in order. p^1i£ .elm wei', r/erdle^
on en '
^ Ir /L chung' ti' ,hiung (s), brothers.'
44 The whole number, in all, are expressed by >To luflg 'tsung, :pk;;
t'sieh,
—^ yih .t'si. The pronouns ^P.-tu,^ .t'siucii, ar^sometimes
used after these forms; — IS ^ M fe til^' y^^ '^siujg ,tu shi^, che'
yang'. the whole of them arc so, but they are also often used themselves as
4a Tlie sense iv/ioevcr, iclmti vci\ is t'xprtjssed by }\^ .fan, nil : y\. /[j
ta" .tJin, in gene ml ; zK. \'W tii* kai', y\, fiv tu" ,tu,xC ^ U" slnvai',/C
jii, t'*^" 'f'- 'ill meiiniii^ »yjo« ///c ichoh^ iti. f/ejicraf. yvC ^1a /v 'L^ K,^
SJl 0- a/; -g ^ >< M CL ta- ,ti ,j.n ,sin ,clu 'm liau' .kun-'.miu-
lu' kwci- .ri 'i, (jenerally Hpcakiny men's minds are fond of Uterary reputa-
tion, riches and honour, nnd these alone; y^. J\j V 3c ^ ^^ |?N J-il ta*
.fan niuh 'yen chc .t'lau li, among nmnhind (jenerally this doctrine does not
UKiir ,su yair .twaii .fang, all men in their behaviour shi>)/IJ J, i' ri>ryerf. The
phrases .fau, ta' .fiui, aud tiv kai' are colloquial. The otliers more properly
4b' The verbal })hras('s.^ j]\j ])uli ,ku (,(lni), not restraining, not limit-
as you please, according to your convenience, are used in the sense whatever,
pronoun then becomes relative: ^^ -jlj/ ^, p^ \)\\\\ ,ku slii' ..shui, whoever
it may he :\i'it^
|5{J ^^ 0^ 1
1
or matter it he ; y^\ f PJ ^^ J^ prdi ,kn ,to 'shau, hoivrvcr many there be;
tivo. When the noun is not used ko' or tih is found instead; ^ }\] -(iJ.
/v ^ ^'t //'J H:/ p"h yiujg' che' .j.n yau, kiau' pieh tih, do not use
that nwu but call another; ^ /j\] /^ y.-u pieh .jen, there areothers: /y\]
shr yih ko* tau* 'Ji, that tJf another matt- r .^^ /l£ ' ||i'| /\.yeu' shi'yih
ko' .jen, that is another man; y-j ip'l {"I ~j' l^j- 7t"^ling' yih ko* jih
170 MANDAKIN' lillAMMAR. PAKT II.
'tsl tsa'r .Ini, the equivalent to L/ j-i -f^- ^ Icui jiii t.sar .iai. nn anothrr
40 ,Tuu. fiinf/lc. aii«l tub. olone. arc used in an ailjeotivc and proiioininal
"j^ tuii ko' .^ jau
sense, as in Q^ ||VJl "tsi. iJrI ko-, a person (dour: ^<g
g— '
yV tall tsi- yili Jen, owr- hij hit>i.st(/': ]'$ Ijf. fjS] -j- j}^ •],] .tan
ko' tsi' .lai, r/rc 7/oM ('o?»p rt/<i»e/'^ilj ||i''J ^^ )-[•. xE [J-| Jl tnli ko- 'tsi
clur tsai- ,shau sliang-, he lives alone on a hill. Yih ko' 'tsi
— ' '|[ul ~J^,
~)() ,Tan, i^aloue, andj /|]^ ,ku, Hinyle. an' used in .'^oinc jilnases, as in
yih .jen. a man alone; j/J\ iili ip- -^ .-kii ;kii jt-sui .tun, solitary.
51 The adjeetives u.->(h1 in jdaee of jiroimnus are numerous. For the jxn--
fxonal pronouns / and thou, there ai-c in use phrases such as ^ 7C "lau .fn.
/r ^ '-"iiiw ti'. 7; ^ /L '1:'" -Inunu^ 7C "n/ ^-i' ,k<\- 15/ ciT ?l^f> -ko.
yC ./% 1f^' .hiung, /"Li 'S* .hiung ,t-ai, 4^ /L j''" -l^i'^^o (^'«'^'cro/e>«#i/-o-
this place; '^ .kin (cb). the present. Ten. means f7//.9, usually in refi-renee
to place, and .kin this, in regard to time. /\^ tjlJ. /V "inii ti- ,jon, n^itine
of this plaee; 7l^ p| ni-l 'l>^ii kweh InxTi', Mn lamfit-afje of this count r// :7p^
5.'5 For thu reflexive pronoun self, ri?r;/, oirn. is mneli used,
>Jj^ .t-siii.
jy*</
^ili J
'
.t-sin 'sb.n. irith ,ny otcn h<ntd: aH |k ^M -t'^i" v^'H ^''H'"
ehien', ?r/VA my otan eyes I saw If: ,^'Ji |-l I'// l^'lij .t'sin 'k-eu ,fen fu', ht
.">4 For the IiitiiTo'^Htiw hoir /iKi/tt/f c^ J/ ,tj» "sliau. iininij, fiw. ftir
,'),') Fit tln' jutssfssive /«//, tho aidjritivcs nscJ un(k*i»r(.fiatiiiij. Tlu-v uj"«
ll\<; tsii'ii". chfajK i>oor\ ^^ .Imii, coA/; |'|LJX ]»i% sjtui/t, vu/f/ur: /y sijiu,
snm/f: iji fsmi, roarsc. \)j^ y^-\- tsii.-u- ^;i^J;^^ iiiji juxw futnilij iiavie; ^^
''^ tsi"ii- .ininj;, ^\2 ^ tsicir tsr, m^ nnnir] |')(jx f;(J; pi' sinjr^ rrnifumilg
:jl.*i
I j .liiiii incii, ///// JunifK': ^; }]\] .liau .kinij (tlioni). //«y ti/yr; /|^ --yj
'siau .ming, ;//// fuiiuf. /y ^^ siau .ri, mif son ; /J^ yv^ 'siaii 'k"iiien
(tinni// floy), iiLii Kvh : /J^ J7|J 'siau .smi, my t/rouifson: /j^ 'jj^ siau .t*n
{ifoiw little sclinhir). /:-4- ~:i^ 't"sau tsi*. ;//// ikiihv, -^ ^p| "f sun .luiii"',
The words "^ slu-, rotfiu/c; and -^^C .k\:i,/</)in/)/. are also used t'nr //<y,
'"" •
r^f M-^
•'^^"'* ^^'" '".'/ !/"ffnfjer hrofhcr: ^ ^j- shf tliih, mfj nephew;
?i /ii'^
''^"' i"'i'. "'^ >/<>nn'j( r atJ<fer: '^7 fi^ she" ,t*sin, 7//y nldtions; "^
H- shi'- .slicng. /;/// sisfrr'.s .so/,; ^- j;|[ .she- .f'\i. 7»// srhohir\ ^C jX. 'l^''''
i'\i\ nil/ j'o tin r; ^Z /l_^ M\a .Wwiwj:, rtif/ clt/er broflter ; :^C ^1| .kia ".vau,
uiy'eJder hi'othry's wi/e : ^C '([1 .km 'tsir, tut/ ehlcr sister; '^C :jj)f .kia
arc fiiiplnycd. Tiiey urc J,'?C kwei". 4j^ ,tsuii. hoiiounihle) ^j .kaii, /"''/A;
-^ lii>^'*j .'/""<', Jm/initrot; '£ laii. (VJ: yC ta". y/Vf?^; J^.^J Jf.J"
ku.i" tu
^K Tffl k^vci- ti-, //oM/- iKtfive pfavr; ^ ^^- k>\"t'i'^ sin^'-, what is yourfa mi-
hj nnmef ],'( /X kw.i* ,k( ii;; {waieh), your mje ; p|] kwei* kwnh. //"" r
eountry; 4"- !(;|-. .tsun sin;;-, your J'n mily u(i)iie: Xy- }/\. .tsuu .kiii;,', //<,
-^'^
"j/« ;
-%p .tsim tsi'. V'M/r )i<i,iir\ p,/j '^ [
.li.uj sin>;', your fmuHy nnme;
*J?J ml= •'^'^i f*l«eir. yoiry f/'/i . j^ij -^1 -kail .iuIm«x. your uoin<;''^T Jjl liii;^'
rheiig-, yuur iri/'e; ^f Xf- V\U'4' .tsiin, your /other; ^ Uplirii;- .lan^'. your
son; ^ 7[\ lirii;- .t-jui;,', yttur mother: ^y ^V !»"?:' .kurii;. your son; -^
jX liui;' nil. fh 5^^* liii-- iiir,ii-. yoiir (lau,jht,r :
^ ^'^
^V li"g* 'sl^-ni
172 MANDARIN GUAMMAR. TART II.
jchiiiii, your son (addressed to ])ergons styled 'lau .ye) ; ^y ij^ tj^. lino-
.p'o .j/o, your f/randniothor :~\. -^ ta* .imw^, your name; /C 5yC ^'i' l»-u',
your literary name. So also "Q* 't'ai, A/V/A, honoured, is u.sed in p:|* -^
jt'ai .niiiij;-, y/02*r name ; i^i* yl^ jt"'ai hau', your literary name.
'pan .hang, your shojy; ^ j]j' 'pan ,elieu, your boat: ^| i/j/^ 'pan liau',
57 Shang' _Ll upper, and \ hia', hiver, are used ie several conipuuuds
CHAPTER VIII.
Ox THE Verb.
1 Verbs arc simple or compound. The former are single words, such as
/'Ih shun', to submit. The verbs in the following phrases are examples of
Formation of Compounds.
Co-ordinates.
kii-, /o grrjcfe, ponder, and/car; ^^ ^' pj/j; J|'j ^jji; ,kwan k'air .t'siiiu
jt'sai shi', to look at, gaze upon, conjecture cbouf and make trial of: ^v^L )1jir ili
,yeu, to loundcr <diout at leisure; p|$ jlj ii'J* flfffl 'kiaiijL,' sili 't'jiii Inn', to
study, practise and discuss; ^/; lyfei ,t'hi p'ieir, /o deceive; i^ J^ .lino-
deceive, iu .|^\ |Ji^<j ,c-lii .man, ^o deceive and conceal from; |[\ ^ jc'hi
5 "When a verb is tlie object of another transitive verb, the latter jjrc-
cedes: n J ,m 't*au yen'^, to provoke dislike; 'rf] ^ t({^' p'a' ,sieu 'c'hi,
to fear doimj ivhat is slinriuful; ^f ^y\ tseu' ,siau, to report the govern-
ment expenditure; \{^ ^X 'li"r^ kiau', to receive instruction.
vestigate; JT fei iiP. (tT ll'ti) "f'l k-oh shuiS <o */rc^; ivhilc sitting; (in
the north 'ta 'tur) jj j[_j '*:^ 'ta ,pa shi', to live by one's wits. That 'ta
governs the latter word in all these cases, andisnotco-ordinate with it, seems
probable becanse it froverns kieh, a knot, in j] Jflp 'ta kieh, (o tie. For
we hear J J |tJ IP'l 'T'bi
';> "lian-j: kn- kieh, fir fid) knots. It is also used
he cannot use the counting board; j 4 ^j' ^ 'ta ,shu .slun, to stretch one's
body, for shen shen yjiu 'jffi |ip 'Jx siraighfrn the body. Hire also may b<'
placed phrases formed by ^J 'k'o, may, and another verb, as HJ |[^ 'k',,
l>' a.', formidable; where as will Ix^ .sh«'wn PJ 'k'o, Iwcomes a mood particle.
6 Verbs placed toj^etln r, two or thn-*' in nnmb<»r, may l)o all oxjiressive
motion is an clement in each verb, the order in which they stand is that of
174 M.\NI>AUIN (;R.\MMAn. PART II.
-^ 'p'aii Iv'ii', ffo {running) ; %^ ^j^ 'tscu .lai, {iccdldny) conte ; ^. ^^' .nu
k'iii*, take mvcnj.
7 When tljp verbs do not contain tlie idea of'tinio, tlicy ufL.-n stand in the
relation of species aitd genus, the fonner as in the case of snbstantives standing
first HSj .^fj t'cng 'sie, io ivrite out a fair copy ;jy ^,uj .c'han 'sie, to copy;
pJl i^ hu' shng', ^0 escort for protection; f]^- -j^ ,kiai (,clne') sung', to
instruct by giving directions; glli ^JC hi tin' kiau', to give instruction ; a|£
and sup2)ort;J\^ ^ .p'ei yang', to attend to and bring up; ^ ^^vj ting'
tso',^0 w«/i-c to order; T/JC iSx 'pn-u tso', to maJce goods by contract, (south-
ern phmse).
action beginning, and another time or tlie action conchuled, tlie Latter stands
layt. )$ l^nl jt'i^'n 'pn, to add and make complete; ^f J^ ^^ shah shang'
.lai, they came onjighting; |pg §^ 't'sing tso', jilease sit doivn ;
^\i^ ^ 't'sing
'k'i, please to rise; |q l-U 'tien hwa', too'eform by instruction; jt/C ^U ticdi
'si, he has fallen doicn and killed himself ; ^ ^^ k'u' kwo', I have gone
there. To these examples may be added conii)onnds formed Avith ^jp Inng-',
ISi lung' liwai', to meddle loith and injure; %%^ ^i ,shau ,tsiau, to cook a
Anx'tUanj iror(fs.
(r roups, of two.
tion. When two verhs stand together, one being the itrincipal word (and
nsnally transitive), imd the other auxiliary (and intransitive), the former
'f^ teh, to (Jit, t.r BJ till are j-.ined to a few simple verbs, as
\Mt 1^'liimu
(s) tehj^o hiow] he aware of; pjQ ^^ Ki' teh, fn rcmemher: ^ ^ jtMllg
teh, to hear of; t3? fj^ 'tung tih, I understand.
^ kien', (chien') to pa-ceive, often expresses instantaneous meeting, and
separate acts of perception, as in iffi, ^ ir kien-', ^* meet', ^ Mx -^ven
kienS to hear of; iJjf >2i P't^^^g- kien', <o 7>ie€< ?f;<V7/.
use<l in expressing single actions generally, jis in gQ Ski' choh, <o remem-
Im-: TJ ^ 'ta chnh, to atrike; i^^ ^ 'siang choh, to think of\ Wt ^
t'ih choh, ^> AvVA-; l-Jtlt ^ sliui* ulioh, <o go to sleep; Jj^ ^ chan' choli,
to stand.
l)uh teh, it omjht lutt to be done. This test fails in a very few cjisis, as in that of
1 1 Some auxiiinries yivc direction to the action of the verb. The verbs
employed for this purpose, are such as Jlshang*', <o </o uj),]^ kwo*, fo j[>av?»;
r shang', to pass; above; on; snpcribr; j!j( J^ .pan shang', <o remoffi up-
wards if Yl] Jl 'pu shang', to 7ncnd; to compbf,-. fiJJ Jlto' shang', tojnle
^'P ; :f^ pai shang', to put on in order; ftij; _Xl .fuug shang', to sew on;
176 3IAN1)ARIN (SRAMMAI:. PART II.
I hia", hcloiv; to go hclow: inferior: \]L \ ,1a liia', to dmio dovm; \r\
:(^ kwo', to pass hy ; past; ^ ^^ 'tseu kwo', to ivalk hj; J|ij :jlW .yau
^iH, t.siu', to enter ^^X 3^ shah tsin', tojicjht one's way iii:
"x ;TMi-;^l''-^''^
\\\ c'huh, to go oiit;^^ {Xj .na c'huh, to bring out; XrL U4 .lieuchuh,
Ip^*- 'chwen, to turn; to turn round; jiBJ f t'^ .hwei 'chwen, to turn hack;
IjItJ 'Pt^ ^'"^^ 'chwen, to turn over; ^}L '1^ ,1a 'cliwen, to pull round;
^|l] .t'sien, before; front; an adverb or adjective is used in the same man-
ner as the preceding verbs. So also "^ heu', after; behind; e. g. i/[> li'Q
HO ^X« It^ i^ ''^i 'p'au .t'sien 'wo 'p'au heu', you tualk before and I will
lualh behind; rt^ -f^ t'ui' heu', io go back; 7^ HlJ'tseu.t''sien,^oacf^7a?^ce.
These two words however are less common than JL. shang' and \ hia', not
being used as verbs when standing alono in the colloquial; whereas Hand
P have a full verbal power, as in _J^ ^\K ^' J shang' ,king k'ti' 'iiau,
stand up; ifSx ^ tso' 'k'i, to begin doing -^^W 7t£l jP^^ ^^'i' '^ begin re-
moving.
.t'ing chu' 'Iiau, the work is stopped; ^%, ]^^ ,c'hui ]»a-. to finish bloiving;
\hi wl2 ^so' paS to finish doing, not more commonly y\ Jffx inih tso' cease
doing.
Of the words that denote the co???^^/e^/o?< of actions, .Avan and shah are
7J2 -^^fi"' to end; to finish ; comphte ; ^Pp y^ liiiii;' .wan, to have done
^^ shall, ^> cud; oriji;inally tliis word i.s tlic same Avith 7|\^ sliali. to kill;
Mff tsinS <o A7-i*«y fo a7i end; finish; (coinniDii in tlic north ),)j||j ^^ inieli
tsin', to finish the destruction of; i\X i'^. ,slicu tsin', to finish gathering in.
f$i .c'lieng, to complete; HI ^ ^ftji Jj)l ,kung ,tu tso' .c'heng, his work
is completed.
JlJ tair, ^0 ayrivf:. at; to; as an auxiliary verb and intraii.sitive to arrive ; j^
±)j .-^un^' tan-', arrival of prresents, or of an escort; ^.m ±0 ,liii tiiu', to ar-
rive; TT^ 5:0 -^'^i tau", to come to.
restraint: ff|> J J 'pang chu', to tie i/;):$p( |3: 'f^«i chu', to lock up; ]^\
jit .Ian chu', to resist; imjjcde ; 'lj* ];£ kwanchu', to govern and restrain
k li k'au' chu', to rely upon.
^t'ui tiau', to push aivmj ] jfi V-^^ 'sUo tijur', to thioio (Lwaij.
The foregoing; three words completing the action of the preceding verh,
might he placed among co-ordinate compounds, hut they all admit of the in-
sertion of teh and puh the positive and negative particles, and therefore may
risen too much (of bread-making) ; 7fi ) 5{i r® 'shui "cluing kAvo', the water
has risen too hi(jh;y^ \>^ pj5 -^^ t'ai' .yang shai' kwo', it has Icon sunned
too much. Kwo' qualifies verbs here just as it (jualities adjectives, as in ^/L
^^ shuh kwo', too ripe. It points out that there is excess in the acticm or
quality of the noun constituting the subject of the proposition. Tlje verb
^\^ 'si, to die, is used figuratively to express the violent effects of actions.
P^ j^U <^'hang* 'si, to sing a person to death; :^{, y(^ ^{1^ k'i- 'si,t-a, to he.
H^. ,ying, to conquer ; PXl ^t|| 'tu ,ying, to win a game; -J J ^^ ta .ymg,
to iviu a hdttle.
Ir. :shu, to he defeated; i||'l \\^\ 'tu ,shu, to lose a (jamc; if*li Ijiij;: chan-
shwuli ting*', to say dt'v'uhdlij\\\^ TL '" '"';-,'? /<^' advisi' iqton and dicidc;
^Ty^iL^t- -'il-T'iJi
...
«^ rest.
ting*, fo
'-A ^'^
;>/«(•<•
^i3( sluihj /o kUI) Jinn: fixed : |i>£ ^j^ slnvoli sliiili, speak decidedly.
tfte thiny has been discussed and determined (ui. It shoiilcl hv. obsi.Tved tliiit
that ^suhstau^'. })iecod<'S and uccideut follows, and tliat the action which occurs
'^JjL e-liih fan*, to {e<d rice) dine, or breakfast; ^^f ^j .k'i 'mn,, t<> ride (a
horse) ;\3]^
•Pa -di*
-^ tnh ,shu, to study {books); ^
*^* *^'*
-f^'am Wi\ to to rite (char ac-
Iciist in trauslatiun.
To such exami>les may he added .some formed with^ 'yon and 3i|f .wu,
or Ix "I'lii- 'i*^
rj 'ffi yQ 'y^' ^•''i''' •>% ^'^ "" .'/"t>«^;i x S ^^"^' ^'^'^'j '^
M «y^ j/oo(/.
18 ^h\n\ adjectives follow fcW^s to limit the extent of their action, just
(ch), to loalk )mir; ^J J^V.v hur. to beat to tatters ;^% ,n shw>h .ming,
'
/b y \}\'\ i'^i .li'» yih ting' yau' ,k"ai .kIipu. the river must be dcc/M-ncd;
^'M v^ 3>^ ti li^in^" k-'aii' slin' k'an', to look at horizontalhf ami per])cn-
diculai'Iij ; jr. ^yj clion«jj' 'sio, to write chare cf era in fall: /y ^ij's'xiwiWv^
i^^ 1S 7Ci ^ tso' .wan pih, to finish doing; xQ, W(i -^ *sau' .c'heng
do it well; ±fi .75^ § pih (pei) 't'o ,t^ing, to finish safely: n^ ij" ful
shwoh 'tsi si', to speak distinctly; 7J J^ ^J ,fen ,kiiin .viui. to divide
equally.
22 The words yfi -Lai, co7?ir, and ^' k'u', j/o, are added at pleasure to
the auxiliaries of direction and motion to indicate the direction of the action.
^W' TK hwei 'chwen .lai, to come hack; *:j' |E1| tK 'clnven .liwei .lai,
to turn hack;
paration: p|jj p'jl 4it /N ,k'ien Jang' 'k'i.lai, fo yield politely to; J^j j^
^ .yang 'k'i .lai, to sp)read out; ^® jfe tsf>' 'J"'i -l^i^ '<> ««^ down-}^Z
*hI 5R ^'^^i^ 'l"°o -^^h io collect together; 0X bfl "^ «'^»' jk'ai .lai, to
separate.
23 ,TSiANG ^^ ahout to, is inserted often between the verb and the suffix
^^ 'k'i.lai;asin J.|!i tI^ fe 5|5 chan' ,tsiang 'k'i .lai. to stand up;
^M ^ y /Qi ^T^ k'an' ,tsiang 'k'i .lai, he began looking. This usage is not
purely colloquial in the north <>r in Kiang-nau; it is found however in man-
darin novel*.
CHAl'TKK 8. AFF lUMATlVK AND NEl.;ATIVK GUOUI'S. ly |
'Ki C_i >-•'•(/', is soiiu'timi's used in plarc of tho second tsi' in four- word
jilirascs, as p| j^/ X^_^ \\\i tsi' jslmiii; ki mini;'', /u r/yjo-t; o»e'.9 ownii/'r;
tsi* heu' 'ki kwo', <o ftc grieved at one's own faults.
Sonictinics tlie second ^ ts'i* is omitted entirely in li>nr-vord idiruseseuii-
structcd iu a literary manner, as in j'^ y}}\\ fj ,^IJ pah kien' tsi* 'wen, f<>
2^ (Jroups sueli as u)L -4^ yi sli\V(»li pull .niing, you doiud say efearli/ ;
7l2 1^ M4 tseu teh c'liuh, jjou can walk out, we may regard as being o;t-
first, and is followed by \^ teh or -^ ])uh, for the atlirmativo and negative
respeetively (copula). The last word a verb or adjective (predicate), limits
in some way the action of the i)rineij)al verb. Tims in f]j ^\ ^q \\\l ,(hjiu
pull .cliau ,t*a, / cannot fnd him,, chau expressing the success of thiv action
jchau, to seek, is put in the negative by means of pub, not. When the ob-
ject ,t*a, him, stands last, as in the example, the words jueeeding form ma-
nifestly a compound verb. If as often happens ,t"a is placed second in the
sentence, tho original character of the verb group as an independent proposi-
tliat tlie action is ] )0ssible for him (absohite or natural possibiUfij) or tlie con-
traiy. )^ |^ ^f^ 'sie tch .lai, he can write characters; Wg /f\ -^f^ 'si
pull .lai, he cannot write; ^^^ y\\ yfc nicn' piili .lai, he cannot read ; \\Xj
^\ ^|sl sliwoli pull .lai, he cannot speak; ^* y\\ -^ k'an' })uli .lai, 7 cati-
not cure; "^ y(\ ^ hwei' i)uli .lai, / cannot do if; \^l% ^\ J^ 'han' puli
.lai, I cannot call out. The auxiliaries jjj -^ c'liuh .lai. and _L. ^|v shang'
.lai, are used in the same sense. j(7p ^\\ Jl ^T^ nien' i»uh sliang' .lai, he
cannot read ;
^* y\\ tu ^|v k'an' puh c'huh .lai, I cannot see it.
action or the contrary (limited or moral jmssibiliti/). The word /C^ 'k'i,
to rise, gives this sense. Jp yj\ J^ .t'ai puh 'k'i, we cannot carry it; -^
-^ ^Ei yau' imh'k'i, I cannot vcntwe to ask it ; P,p yy\ /^ .p'ei puh 'k'i,
ttl c'huh, ^ kien', J 'liau. Verbs of 5^nZ:m<7 and seeking take choh
(chau); those oi thinking ^m\ perception take choh, c'huh and kien'. J||j| \^
^^ p'eng' tell choh, he can he 7net ivith ;
^" y\\ ^j k'an' puh kien', I do
not see it; '^ y\\ t^j ^I'^^'t'i' p^di kien', / did not meet with him; ^^ 'f^
up; upon; -^ kwo-. ikihI; IPtj*- ehwen, turning: \j\\ .\vii\, away from. Each
CllAPTKR 8. affirmative: ANT> N'EfJATIVE (JUOri'S. 183
of tlieso words pn'dicntos of the iiction that it can or cftiinot Ije perfornud in
its own piutiiuhir tlirfttion. ^3 .^\ _\^ jcii puh slinng', /7 will not take a
ihfc upon »V;/J^ \\ r t'oh ])uli Ilia'. / cannot fake (thi.t clnfJn'nr/) off";
r*^ -y' I . ,
11/' ijn -4-
SDi 1^ I . *'^i'
P"^' shiin;;*, i/ou cannot put {this hat) on; ^ily, j^f "i;* tsin*
nnrtli 'chwon puh kwo' .hii, ^^ y^\ j^ 'p'lui puh kwo'. I cannot walk past
him; 'Js 1^ :iM 'ts^'^^ **'^^
•'^i»S «^^*^ ''^ enter; J^ ^T .t^'^uu ].uh
Ilia', there remains not; Jl \^ -^ shang' teh k'ii*, it will yo up; %r^ yf\
[LL| 'cluven })uh .hwci, not able to turn. In the north lai ami c'hii ^fv "2^
are freely added to these expressions.
tion, hy help of words cognate in mcaniniJC, viz. ^j] tuni;', to move, J 'liau,
destroy, etc. that the action can or cannot take place. ^^ ^^\ ^) ,\.h\\ \)\\\\
tung', it ivill not move for pushing; P^^ j^ ^J] yuu tcli tung', moveable by
bitintj :il\4 ^\ jj chan' puh chu', not able to stand; j^ \\ jH: .Ian puh
chu', unable to resist; ^' yf\ jx 'kwan puli chn', unable to r«/e;fll]f ^\
jX nai' puh chu', unable to endure; ^^vti
yf\ /]>i .t'au ]»uh t'oli, finable to
€8cape;i^ ^\ J niieh puh 'liau, not able to destroy ;^^'- |^ j 'kiai tcli
'liuu, it can be (jot rid </;IllJj" y\\ y nai' puh hia', 2 caAinvt endure it; ^^
y^\ J ])a* puh liau, cannot do without.
to comjdf'fr, an»l ^, , shall, md, (southern) (as in f ji 7I, , kieh shah, end).
t\' ^^ J^ J ^""o' P"l' .c'heng Man, he cannot complete it; i[!y l\f ^7C
nien* teh .wan, he can read it throw/h; \;\l ^\ ] tso' puh 'liau, he cannot
complete if; j^ y{\ J .hii jnili liau, he cannot come; Pj^ yf\ J .hoh
puh 'liiiu. he cannot erase from drinkinrj: ,,7^. ^ Jf*: ni<'n' jjuh jtih, Ao orn/-
ni>t finish reading if; ^!|i ^\ ^* rliung' ]»uh tsin', it cannot be (dl sou v :]p)i
^^ ~y H"/.
pull sluih, they cannot all be interred; ^X ^^ 77»k^li<ili l"ili shall, they can-
35 By ^ kill (.clii), to reach to, arrive at, and ±\\ tau^ to nrrive the
fact that there is time or not for the action is exproBscd. ^v y\\ JX. dai
puh kill (.chi), there is not time for it; |/Ji' J^ /^t pan' teh kill, there As
time to do it; -^ /f\ J)C 'teug puh kill, / ccainot waif. ^ .^ JlJ "kaii
not for the action oi' the verh. l|^ lif r koh teh hia', it can be placed
inside; JjX ^ \ fang- puh hia', it cannot be placed there; j[^ JJX T^
y ,sin fang' puh hia', his heart cannot be at rest. K'ii' -^ also follows,
as in jp)( yf\ \ ~^ tso' puh hia' k'u', lie cannot Jind space to do it.
37 The word -}jW. kwc' indicates that tlie agent luill conquer or be defeated.
1J 1^ lis,
'^'^ tsli kwo' he can be conquered by blows; ^f- y]\ iJli^. picu'
said: o^ "f^ ^£'i teh ting'', it can be settled by talcing advice. The words
'1*7**
S -t'i'^g M^^^ !3^ S 't'o , tang, ^o/x',/xe J, have the same force, as
in pjl): -^ i
7"*
^ 'kiang puh .t'ing ,tang, he cannot settle it by talking.
30 The ver^>si5| 'li, to control, ^X ^^^'^^ f<^ ^"''^^ ^ 'si, <o t?/(',;58 yi"gS
to ansiuer;]\\^ 'lung, to come together, add their oion meaning io the verb
they follow. n>^ y\\ y^ K.hwoh puh 'li, he icill not attend, to ichat is said
to him:j] yf\ ^u '^'^ P^^^i '•'^^'; ^'^ ^^'f''*" "^^ ^'* coidd not be Icillcd ; \^% ^
jrjf^ 'han puh ying', to call without receiving an answer; t_i 4'^ jM /N
hoh puh 'lung .lai, cannot be brought together. The auxiliary 'lung with
/li^ 'c'hi, to raise up, might also bccht^sed among the auxiliaries of direction
or motion.
40. When the verbs ^ 'yeu, ^o /i(/w, and ^J^ muh (.mei), not to have,
form groups wilhj^ teh, and some other verb, in such grou]is a fact only is
asserted and not a possibility. -^^ 1^ 3^" 'yen teh ,c'liwen, he has {cloth-
ing) to put on; Ix r^f ^'Zlt ;^'^*"^ t*-"^^ c'hiJi, /<f ^c^s• nothing to cat: *l-l
ClIAl'TKIl 8. GUOL-PS FOI'.MF.I) I'.V RKrFTITIoN AM' ANITI IIKSI.S. 185
yL ^ tl'j )'i 1^ m yih 'ticii .11 sill' .t'siug mull tdi iso', I have not
uuytlnnij at all to ilo.
tion, that it can or cannot be performed to the extent or in the manner in-
dicated by the adjective itself, gjf ^^ tuh puh .tsiuen, he cannot read
it through ; _)/. ,^\ [0] lih puh chih, he cannot stand ujyright;
fj^ f|} jffi
shwoh teh 'man, he can say it in full; ^{ y\\ slli kwan' puh ,t'un", it can-
«o^ 6e conveyed inside; j^> ^\ ;|^ 'siang puh t'eu', hecannot think it com-
pletely out; ]SJ MW i^C ,«huiig liang' teh 't'o, it can be made secicreby
conference.
43 Often in these groups there is nothing said of possibility, but the fact
only is asserted and denied that the quality in the predicate Ix-lon-'s to the
fers little; %?j ^\ TJ 'sie puh .ming, he has written it indistinctly; t},
44 }>huiy single vrrhs 'Alii rcjicatedj iiii\]}}\ \\}^- .t>i.iu .l\siau, look; j^','^
Jj^^ mo' mo', r«6;[['jl: [[•)[: t'iau' fiau', to Jump; \^ U\^ hoh iioh, drink.
45 Transitive verbs are often repeated before the word they govern. \j^ \j^
186 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. PART II.
}\v}i'fii 'hi 'Ucn, to ivash the/ace; |^f-j \}f\ j[^ ,k"'ui ,k''ai ,sin, he is glad ',
ffl ffl IJS pi' pi' 'yen, to shut the eyes; Jfi ^P li^ t^J^i t'ai .t'eu, tolift
46 The verb.s ^^ k'an', ^o see, commonly, and Pj 'k'o, may, can, occa-
sionally follow a repeated verb in a tentative sense, ^.ife \\}}--^ ^] .t'siaii .t^siaii
'k'o, let us go and look; ^pg ^J^j '^ ,t'sai ,t'sai k'an', fry to j/W5s;g!e^ g^
-^ jt'ing jt'ing k'an*', listen and try.
47 The verbs r^ pa' to finish and 9;r k'ii' (c'hir) fo ^ro, are used in their
own sense after a repeated verb, as in ^\ Y-iK RlI lii^^i l^i<^h jjr', res< a ZiY-
*?e ; ^ ^ 5* k'an' k'an' k'ii', go and look ; |^\ t^\ ^ ^^g hieh hieh
k'ii' pa', go and rest a little.
to talk
f=T
and laugh;
r_t. X^.
Jffjj ^ S JiTlJ 'c'hwai toh 'c'hwai toh, to think of; \f\
50 In other cases, the transitive verb and its object are both varied. The
verbs and substantives must be co-ordinate in meaning. J^^ 5M J Wl /^
.yau .t'eu 'jiai 'wei, to sJf((ke the head and wave the tail, i. e. boastful and
extravagant; ;^ 7\. Tl< Jill yuen' ,t'ien hen' ti', to murmur against
heaven and complain of earth; W/t. 7C ^ Jul -^^^^^ j*'i<^n ,hu ti', to in-
voke heaven and pray to earth; j-Q ?^ Jjil-I ^ t'oh ,t'sin lai' 'yeu, to trust
^ffi wu,-^ )>uh and ^*z. niuh, for the negative with a verb or substantive
y^^ ^-^ -y* f-*-*
jj7i» j^» ^\ iiiy
following. nien' nien' puh wang', to think of tvUhout for-
(jcHiwj; fji\ ^ -T^ 0" yuh .yen puh .yen, he wishes to speak but icill not.
i'^jK
'
W'k I'i^'^i yil^ \i\i::\\, wait a little; ^ '
' -^ 'teng yih 'teng, wait
them an object or not. The verbs in the following exami)les are transitive.
.lai,
Mnl.
come, are few; thus
-rryi -jt-r
^ tso', to sit is transitive, ini'ff}' "Hp '^
~-^-* ilJj
'''^
T'*
XSL 'J<
'
'jK 'i 'tsi tso' 'man 'liau .hwan (hai)yau'yih ,chang, the chairs
are all occupied and one more is needed.
55 A verb often loses its transitive potver by being repeated with — yih,
take a little walk; Ijj^i ' i/l!l chan' yih chan^ stand a little; 7^ — ^
kwang' yih kwang', (jo out/or a little amtisement. Many verbs Ix'come numeral
particles by taking numbers before them; e. g. ^.pau, to wrap; a bundle;
l\Li rV^, f*^ ff'^^'c hold of; a handle.
tm', to do; to be. Thoy are negatived by prefixing ^^ jmh. not, which is
188 ilANDAUlN GKAMMAR. I'.MIT H.
the particle of particular denial (coiitriulictory), as ^X. '"^^'^ ^^ t)f general de-
nial (contrary). ^ ^ ^WB^^M lii'^"' ^^'i' ^van' slian' till .t-'eu, filial
2nety is the chief of all the /t AM virtuc.<<: ng. TST Q^chc' sli'r kill 'k'li till,
this is very U7 for innate; ^ X, jfii ^lli U'J "iy- I'^i^i tsu' ,t'a till fu' 'nm,
they do not act as a father and mother; '\Xx \vi A— i li^va' tso' .jen 'ii,
^ \^\ i^k ^ -K pell sing' ,tu sin' sliang' ,t'ien till c'hili 'tsi ku'
tso' t'ien .min, tlcc people are all the children of high heaven,
sbiS he loho is a man in the world; $$ TcxS IP 'clnven ,pei tsoh 'hi, his
sorroio was changed into Joy ; ^ I'p zh M^ '"^yo Uoh' elm i', I am master.
The book particles Ty 'uai, -zY is, and ^ - ,fei, it is not, are also used occa-
shi' .jen yiih, virtne is the laiu of heaven, lust comes from men's passions;
jkwan consequences are not slight.
nil ^71^ ^r ^§ hi- ,fei 't'sien, the
sense. So docs ^ .wu the con-esponding book word, which never takes^
'veu after it. In southern Fuh-kien -^ u", have, is the affirmative, and^
.bo, not to have, the negative. 3C ^1-^ S5 ) ^I^ I'n* '"^i 'yeu liau
mi' c'hiS his parents are angry; ^^ ^^j& ila tsi' ,shen 'yeu kwo'
The locative verb and preposition, xE tsai', to be at a place, at, \>^ also
(JHAI'TER 8. DIFFERENT KINDS OF VEUH8. lyj)
^^ f^li tf: ''JP ^i '«u f'sih ku' Hell hu' ,tii tsai^ mi- 'Ii,/fe or six
JT It ^ ^{i"tachangSkeng'hau, ^o/y/^^/s^,e«e>•; M W 4^ ^^
'mai mai' puh ,t'ung, trade cannot be carried on.
y^\ :ili3, 'hau puh kwu', cannot be better than. Tlusc groui»s serve instead
of adverbs to intensify adjectives, a*j in jrjj^ ^Ij:
4'!) i^ ,hiung teh li- hai',
59 There are three chtsses &,' nn.r'Hary verbs used re8j)ectively, to connect
the cause with its consequmcij (rrru^rtf/rc), the act with the instrument (in-
strumental), and the actor with the object {passive).
60 For the causative %(, kiau', to teach, is used, j"^ ijj ^ ~{^
^(f
190 MANDARIN ORAMMAR. PART H.
^ ^vC \]}j, )X i^ 'iii flic' yang' piili 'Imu kiair 'w.. 've nnih fali. j/on by
hehaviiKj so ill cause me to feel difficulty; i{ii y^ |yjj| ^X 5x. -^^ f^ti fiX
Ql^ll ,t'a t'ai' nair' kiair' 'wo ])iih .nenpj shwoli liwa', lie ions so noisy that I
could not speak; JK /JC ^ 1{!i 5^ ^ cliili .k'ieii kiaii' ,t'a tuli ,sliu,
The corresponding book words, are '\% shi"-, to cause, and qi liugS to
command. In coll()(|nial usage tlioy -wifli ^, 'je, to provoke, are also some-
times heard. 13!^' llli /fv^ ^\ '^ "^shi-, t'a.cliung, shell s]ieu"k'u, cause
.hai .r'l .men puh hioh 'han, causing the boys not to learn to do rifjhf.
cause, -^fr ling'. Premare remarks, that 3<! jkiau is also used erroneously
for ^itl^iau'. This has arisen from the twofold pronunciation of ^X^ in read-
ing when used in a causative sense, viz. ,kiau or kiau'. The dictionary 77,
J^ 7G iH prefers the former sound, but the latter is more common collo-
quially.
times JJ£ ,yai or .ngai, whicli reflects the action of the preceding verb on
the following object. y^J |<^ /s. J,C\.iningpei' .jen ,k'i (,c'lii), to he openly
insulted by others; ^!^ f' T llli mil ^ J ''^^'o chiau' ,t'a nau' fah "liau,
injured.
Kien' ^^ to p>erceive, which is used in the books like /r^ .wei, to denote
the passive, is also found in many colloquial phrases. >[[j ;)^ kien' hiau'.
CHAPTKU 8. niKFERKXT KISPS OF VERns:. 191
G2 Tlio uistnt mental auxiliary verbs arc ^ .na, to hrinf/;i^ ,j>a^ ^o take
Ao/(/ <>/;
/hf ,tsiang, to fake hold of. Thoso words admit of division into
two classes.
.Na with the verb /tj yun-jj', ?o^?«e, are a])pH<'d more properly to the in-
strument of an action, ^r. f] Uj\ ]y '^[l fl'^ .na shih .t^u tsah 'si till,
he was Jcilled with a stone; ^ 7] 3w j'X -na ,tau tung' chang', he took
aswordtoherfinficjhtm<j;n] fit; JT j^ rung' kwnn' 'ta 'si, he took a chtb
and heat him to death.
Ta JL Cv^ in P»^'ki"g)j and Tf^ ,tsiang, are nsed to introduce the object
before the verb that governs it. tL Jl A. ^\. lt\ ||h-J ,pa shang' .jen
.lai ,k'i .man, he deceived his superiors; j\^ ||li r|'|f'] ){^ ^4 ,pa ,t'a 'k'wun
'k'i (c'hi) .lai, {take him and) fir him up; ifL flii viV] JR ,pa ,t'a 't'sing
Aa'u invite hhn to come: 7]^ tlli "f J ^^Q -^siang ,t'a 'ta 'si, take him and
heat him to death ;i[_j I'h IIUJ I ^ ?t"^ A^^ 'tsa .men tih .na .lai, take
ours and hrinrj it; jL W ^)l U^ \vi SU J£ ,pakieu' ,kwci 'kai tso' ,8in
fah, take the old custom and change it for a neio one ; J[_^ jj si* JJX HF
,pa hwoh ki' fang' hia', he set dotcn her tvork. The same word 'im but with
the second tone means to hold a city, or to carry from one place to another'.
,l)a hiau' pau' fu' 'mu, recomjiense your patrentahy piety. In these cases
,pa is properly instmraental like^^ .na.
63 Auxiliary verbs placed close to the verbs tiiey f[ualify are either pre-
fixes or Ruflixes.
^<", HI VA 'l^'o 'ij *'*^.V. «s '" ^ ''^* 'k^o ngai', to he loved; lovely. 2.
Prohibitive, \\i ,lii. u. /;!] .pieh, j |v ii>i .hicu shwoh, r/o not say ; y^\ ^
puh yau' in ^ ^ j] jmh van' 'ta, do not heat him. 3. Potential, U^
.heDg, physical powry; ^ hw.-i', acquired power. 4. Willingne>;s, ^
192 MANDAUIN OUAMMAl:. I'AIIT II.
shell 'lunp: .lai, to coUcct together. (The northern jjcople omit .lai) Separa-
tive ?)l* yfn 'c'hai (t'seh) ,k"'ai, to undo) take down. Words of completion
and cessation, ^^ *}i nien' pih, to finish reading. Resisting and destroy-
'^„^ |ij|^|
U .liien cliu', to limit; resist. Reflexion (middle voice), ;;^;X
H ^ tsi' shah ts'i' ,shen, to kill one's-self (in the south shen is omitted).
Direction and motion (in all eleven words, if H'J -t'sien and -f^ heu' be in-
cluded), :^ al^ ^T^ -ua kwo' .lai, bring over. Past thnc, iHu. kwu-, j^j"
Modes of Verbs.
64 In many cases the mood is determined entirely from the sense, and has
no particular sign. Thus the indicative and im2'>erative are often only dis-
tinguished by the personal pronouns. E. g. ^jj ~& IWA '^^'o 1^'^^' *^*^'' ^
ivill go and do it ; i ^» ^W '^^i k'ii' tso', f?o yow j/o a^id do it ; aft ^/k
I Im tbi Itil '"^vo chii' p^a' ,t'a, I fear him; chii' pV is used in the same man-
ner as p'a', to fear. Bo pai- p'a and p'a' are both employed intransitively
for to be afraid.
senteuce. The picstnt iind past conditional are botli embraced under
this
rule. So also is the present and past participle. The word ''conditional' is
here
clii
kwo' clic' jtsau'jhiang 'li ,tu .lai ,k-i \\v 'wo, if I pasn over this time
it
I
shall have all the neighbourhood couiimj to insult me.
Conditional sentences sometimes take as a concluding jmrticle f'l^ nia 'v IS
in \\\ ri!!j
HR f|: -^\l ftji
ii,'jj
jTR
^4 -f^ ,„i ,„, y,„. ,„.„„„ ^,^,,^ ;;a
'ma yau' wane:' ^i. as for yo\i, you tvish to go east, as for him toishes to
lie go
^^st; \^ )'-§ J """] A. Hl^ ;^>^ J jili loh 'liau 'ma ,t'ien ,tu ,hei 'liau,
by placing f\ pub and j=f tcli, with some auxiliary verb correspondin gm
meanini? after the principal verb. ^ ^^ Jf^ kwo' teh .lai, it can pass:
/f\ ijiy^- lung' pub 'chwen, it cannot he made to turn; ^i^ ~^ )^ .hwan
pub 'k'i, / cannot find means to return it.
The auxiliaries ^ bwei', / can {have the skill to do), and \j^ .nen"-, can
{have the power to do), also give a potential .force to the verb wliich follows
them: ^ H ItW 3C ^puh hwei' tso' .wen ,c]mn^^, I cannot write cssat/s;
suited in meaning; viz. IM ^ 1^ ^(^^' V^^ *^^j ^ «^'^ ^"^^^^^ '^'"^ ^ ^^^-
wo^ i. e. ?yow?rf that; \^ ^ f^ ^X -V^ P^^^i "^^S ken', [^ ^ 1^ ,pa
puh teh, loould that I could; Tk HS Hb OX lien' puli .neng keu', zyoit^cZ
^/itti. Hen' means to he vexed. ,Pa is used of the eyes expressing desire, as in
'k'o yoti may or ^^ pa', aiid so conclude the matter; 3|^ 3F9 ,t'sai ,t'.sai,
aiiess- ^7 ife shah ,t'a, kill him; § fl* Hj k"'an' k-an' 'k'o, look at it;
j/J ^ ral '"i k'ii' P^^S 2/0^* S'^J ?X: 111 ^ t^ '^vo ,menc'hu' pa', let us
o-o P£^ c'hih pa', eat {ivithoiit another ivord). To hear k'o is very rare
f^jg
•Pa is common.
The negative imperative is formed by //IJ pieh, ^ JlU puh yung', ^
® puh yau', )}!] W: pieh yau', I4C ,hieu, to stop, or ^. moli, as in \7f.
uiA jhieu kiau' 'yin sliih 'yeu k'iueh, do not cause provi-
WL ^j\, f^ ^n
sions to be luanting; ^ ^ ^ / V puh yau' ma' .jen, do not revile men;
)j!) W^ i^l' ^ & ^pieh "f* kiau' 'ni 'lau 'tsi,sheng k'i' (c'hi), do not
make your father angry; ^ j^ g^ ;^nih yung' tung' k'i' (c'hi'), o?o «o«
he anarv %\\^- ^ uXj P^^h yau' ,to shwoh, do not say much; //IJ yl\
1ltJ J§ pieh puh tso' hwoh, do not cease loork; ^^ 1|Sx llji ^ moh tso'
Many of the negative and affirmative groups may be considered sentences, con-
taining a verb in the infinitive as their subject, d^ /7IJ /\. f|^ ^pj ^y
•^ ^S toh pieh .jen tih wuli kien' puh shi' 'li, to rob the property of
others is not in reason; fH ^ © ^" ,fei puh 'k'i .Jai, he does not hegin
to fly; ^Q '^^ tu 'sie puh c'huh, he ceases to write; ^ .-^N iJ_j tK tau'
as in yf\ iM^ ^f P^ih 'k'eng (in the north 'k'en) mai', not willing to sell it;
^ ^ M> ^ p^i^i y"^"' ^' ^^''^'' '^^ '^'^^'^ **^^ ^^*"'^ ^^ ^^-" H cL -^
CnAPTEH 8. PARTKLKS OF TIME FORMIN'O TEKSF.S OF VERBS. 195
'W ^ijj- t-siiii,' yiieii', also take yau' after tlicm,whicli'k'c'ng does not.
un d. ^ili tl- "v jt'a tsai' 'k'au, he is he ing examined; yji '|'c I|J i':*
^Jt p'li' '^^'=^ ^''^ .yuen kii', Me cause of the family s declining; __^
Sfi 'hJ ^1 ^'H ^^^^''^' ^^^^''^* '^^ -^'^^^ '3'^'" -'^^^'^^ ?^^^'> '*'' drawing there is method.
After verbs of liking, a verb is translated as a gerund, as in xf\ 3^* j^^
/o«f? of gaming; 3(T :'v^ i7Cb;ur' ,yeu .\\im, fond of saunteringfor pleasure;
& i£iK ^iB ^X I'i ,li\van ,yeu 'shuij/owf? of stoimming. Ngai' and hau*
are auxiliaries of tlie gerund, as yau' and 'k^-n are for the infinitive.
ly when the preceding verb becomes an auxiliary, because the second verb
then retains its independent character as a verb. Wlien the first verb conti-
nues to exert its full power, the second becomes rather a substantive than a verb.
72 Verbs are made interrogative by a])pending the particles "/tl .ni and
The interrogative is also formed by repeating the verb, with the negative
{\ i>uh before it. The inten-ogative particle n!(^ .ni, is often placed bt>fore
the nagative ))article; "2^ ^ '^ c'hir puh c'liii', will you go or not? ]p/
*vi ^^/b -T^ Ir n\ ^^^^ hwoh .ni puli tso' hwoh, do you work or nolf
puh siau' 'iii, I do not (or did not) laugh at you; Jit J/C 'fT lu ,};" t'si*
kwoS to x^nss: ^ iM. X ^'i'^l^ 1^^'<^' 'li'^^^j ^^^ ^'«* ?cani^ jY; il -}li5
J
.T'seng '^is used for the past before its verb. In tlie affirmative it fol-
lows Pf 'k'o, and in the negative ^ puh, or 7rc wei'. P] O^ 3:!] m ^'±>
'k'o .t-'seng tau' kwo' 'mo, have yo2i gone there? 7|C ^ nAi wei' .t'seng
shwoh, he has not said it; ^ q Mi .iM- T"^^ -t'seng kien' kwo', he has
not seen it. It is also sometimes used alone, as in J/p ^ J-IJ ,-i]S ^ ui
time longer; ilS T FR ^ -V'L ^S t"li 'liau niang t'si' tsieu' .ming
t'si', he knelt to him twice. 'Liau is not limited to tiie past*; thus in ^ /\
^ Ma im J -^ ^ phan' .jen ]>uh 'kan .man 'liau fu' 'mu, the virtuous
man does not dare to conceal anything from his father and mother, it is used
for euphony.
The negatives ^ •I'Z i""li 'yen, not to have, and ^J^ muli, express past
time; a? 1^^ Jl ® ^ iKl T Vi ^ '"i
^^l^^^'
-t'^" k'u' kwo' 'liau
future sense, but ].n'.serves its own proper ineanini; wif/iua or viunt irfj. !^
^ :?->r
^* ijIVL W^ .t-u puh van* k'lf 'k'au tsieu' j.a', //e (/ocs not icish (o
ticle before it, without any auxiliary of time. \^ ^ Jn '^''i l'>ili iai, he
iclll not come, or he has not come. It is also expressed by y^\ ^[|^ puli kitn'
it tvill not, preceding the verb with a connecting particle, as in /f\ j/j^ ^^
1^ it|:j ].uh ki.-n-^t.-h hia' -u, ^ Mi 6^ T HI 'J puh kien' tih hia' 'ii,
CHAPTEU IX.
1 Most of the prepositions are also in common use as verbs. They are
all more or less transitive in their nature, and as such precede their words
Few examples of their use are here given. More will be found in the chai)-
\M l-J dB. .7C 7^ 7iZ 1i* tso' .kwaii chi' t'ai' 'tsi t'ai' pan. he rose in
office to the post of guardian to the intperiai jjrince.
^ 'i kill, with; the surne as /)C kih, but less familiarly iised.
i^SM
l^^
.lai 'kci 'wo chieh c'hii' yili .t'scng ik-'i\ come and take of a coverVul for me
7^
^
kih, arrive at; ivith. Ik. ^ kih (.chi) 'tsau, earhj ; ]X. P^ kih.shi,
«rnt*e(? af its time; mature; ^ M- 1t I'll^ a '^^o kill 'ni ,tu hNvei', /
and yon both can do it.
^^itai', instead of; to act instead of;\\ ^ tai' t'i' or t'i' i^i', instead of;
^^ J\^ \JM ^p tai' .jen shuh tsui", to redeem men from sin.
Yi 'ta, to heat; to lyractise; its use as a preposition from, is exclusively
colloquial.
^^
^ ,tang, at; in front of; is used in g jTj ,tang ,c'hu, at a former
tirne;'^ ^ jtang mien', Inforc his face ; g ll^ ,tang .slii', at the time;
fl: tsai', at a place; to be at; y^ H: 1jy -^ ,t'a tsai' 'ua 'li, at ichat
place is he i
^~^
jp ^" \ tE WJ pfeyi^i ko' 'lau .jen tsai' .p'ang shwoh,
an old man on one side said. Tsai' is used adverbially at the end of a sen-
tence :
tf |l 'ii '0 ^ fi^ )d!. 4 ,tu 'yen ,kai tsin' tih ,chung tsai', all
as in @ f)ii tsi' .t'sung,//om; Q ]}[, ^^ -iji'- tsi' 't'sV .wii Hhr', /Vom
M/s /iwie nothiiKj happened.
'f/l;
.t'sun'^, /Vo;/? (of motioii'i; h// (of diivctiof), as a verb tojoUow. "^jl;
^- ^ # ri'; >ll^ ^(H JlJ YAWi H- A .tVu„g l,iau' f,i' •„„, lil, .sin
jU'liui tail' i»ieh tih 'lau .jen,/Vowi reverencing parents, proceed to honour
ing). |rJ ini ^^ ^:\i .t'ling ,t'a .t'sang 'to, to hide icith htm.
to (dative of addres.sing). {\ |;ij- ^ "t/I f[£j |^ puh 'ii fu' 'mu ,siang
gard to "J ' '^ ,\\ sb'i', ?/^)0H this. This word is not j)roi)('rly colloquial.
of than, as in -j^ ^x yC kwo' ,11 ta', 7nore than great, very great.
it: ifl rti \ '! ^^01^* fe che' ,cliiiang ,kwan ,si ,kiai ,yin 'ni
depend upon, fj^ UJ ]}\^ lh;| ]>ih .yen 't'si In', you must go by that road.
The verlial use of this word is exemi»litied in \A} L_i f^ \\] /v yeu ki
I'vatitofiHlons.
fur tlic locative case aiv jjosf/jos it ions. Tlicv nn- pri-
2 The words used
prepositions are coiniuonly verbs. Tliese
marily adjectives, as the i.nr(Mling
adjectives when used as locative particles, do not retain like the prepositions
They become abstract signs of place, and are trans-
their original character.
or ])roi)ositions, according to the exigencies of
lated as substantives, ad^-erbs.
the occasion, as in 1l!l ^ _h ^' 4 T ,t^a tsai' shang' 'wo tsai' hia^
^ W^ ?!) Itll S
Us
^,twan
room.
'liau .c'ha fan' tau' ,t'a .fang ,chung, he took
tsieu' 'k'o 'i, loait till after a year and then it mai^ be so.
HF Ilia', below, as a verb to go down. yy\ ^ pifj |^ puh tsai' hwa' hia',
.na there; and in the compounds,^ [HI 'li mien', inside; f'|g i^ 'li
^J 'li,
H T^^ ^ y^
not in heart repent. j, ^.^ ^
P^ nui* (or nei), within: fE .} W ^^^^' ""i' '^^ 'liau 'ki
jih, he hid himself several days ivithin; MH -^'hu nei', in the kitchen.
'veu shih 'liann- .yin 'tsi, he has with him ten taels of silver.
]|fl" .t' film, before. ^ W] hioli .t'sien, before the temple of Confucius;
good customs of
^ k" -lai
anti-
tih 'hau jfeng sub puh wai' .k-in 'kien 'Hang tsi', the
furflior in the u>«' of tin- insfnmitutiil auxiliaries lor tlu- preposition ?<•////. aiul
in other nuKUs of s|Hvtli i\n- fn-fiit/i ,
Iirt/imi/. e.)-rcjtf. rei/drditK/. d/'tcr,
for, etc.
soineof which here follow:— Pj"; J /X! £/- J/i. <>^|'
g'l^ fij" .( Im liaii
In' 'mn 'i wai* >iini 'Ic'eni;, ej-ccpt fn's own fnfhcr ami mofhn- tcho ictnild be
3(T ^aV '""' ^-i"' '^'* .I<w;in .SI 'y<' j>nli 'hau pair, (t.s to fjoiiuf to law it in
mi nmmi\> d^
'lian 'yang .t'san ehih pu- tih ni
i^- \n i\i^m^^^±
.men ,pa.shen' 'mo ,c'hwen
mi::.;
.ni. cxcejitiiKj si/kn'orni cultivntiou and wravhiy clotli. froui ivhenee could
A. kwo' 'liang ,t-ion, after fivo dnys; ^ j^J^ \l\ .lien 'liang jih, after two
days.
\-
CHAi'Ti-:!:
On* AnvKuns.
1 A<lverhs nvr primitive or derived. The former are very generally sim-
ple, the latter com pimuil. Simple adverlis are such a.s }1|- tsjii', rrr/a/w;]:f3/ tsni*
vcri/. Worils applieil to (pialify adjeetivcH are usually simple adverbs. For
example ^^ ,keng. inore: jtc '»''"> vcri/; y^s^ fai". too. Adverbs of time,
9
an«l those uwd in aflirmation and negation, are usually primitives. They are
either .simple or compound; e. g. ^^ .t'sai or [WjlJ f>^ .kaiig .t'sii'i. jtisf now.
On rniipound
t ^\ilc> rh".
'2 Adverbs (lualifving verbs are derivtr«l from adjeetivenby repeating them
with a sulHx. The w..rds [fj tih,^* .cho y^j •''? "'"^ Jc '»«'»>*'* the most
common
)n endings to these group?*. ^^ ^C WV .l^'»"g ,k'ung till, 7*« oji ernpfij
^ ^' 6^'yuen 'yuen till. (^/,9/(.//^/.v/(T (ff ^I'liau 'liau 'li, lali }})] ^}H
6 fl|-1f
I'^'li (-P'^i) I'^'l' (-1'=^') ^'^1'
'"'' ra/;?;^^ Tji^ [Ij .si ,si till, sccrdhj; Hff
3 Simple ami (lissyllal)ic adjectives take the same endings without rc^ie-
4 Words not adjectives are used in the same mauuer, as in ij^' ff ^- f !{i
oiiimrpose, (in the north t-'e' t'e' ,tilf^ fj- [J^ ) where teh is an
teh teh 'li,
.5 Terminations less common are -^ .Im, /fS .jan and ^_, ,chi,^all of
,hin ,hin .jan, rejoicbujly; "tr "tT iv^ m ^"^"S -J'^^ ^^'''"^h '^y-
in the book language. Hence its use as a particle for adverbs of manner.
^/^?^s.
#/p^ ^(^inChihli),t'eupeiSc'hi(,cho),sc'a-c%;'^i'j ^ ^ ^ H^
J^ .minf ,chi puh yau' ngan' ,chi, it should be done ojicnly not secretly.
These forms with Z^ ^^^^^ heard in the dialect of Shantung are not found in
;|'|^ i^sluur ,fung jsiang amv^', favourable winds attend him; i[j
j||^ 1)Ji[
inattentive.
yj^ jr)j 'leng puh .fang, coldly
'
CnAPTEK 10. AOVKIUIH uT MANNF.H. •
^O'A
V i
t»i\ i .king, already.
8 The nunibcrs yih, o;/c, n^ I iuuu,', /u;o, combine with various words
joined together:
— ' 1^ yih liia^ YY\ 'liangliia^, together, aeparatdij
—
I
iofjether.
\\j .nien .nien yih yan<i;^ tih, year by year the same.
Numbers with nunnial ])artieles are repeated to form adverbs of succes-
sion. fR — tl?'l ^ tU ^ yih ko' yih ko' 'tseu e'liuh k^i', one hj
Between the repeated words when they refer to time, the verb^ kwo' is
ed.
'
— iir .jjn^
— ' |y^ vih .shi kwo' yili .shi, one generation after another.
When a number and its nuuK ral are repeated with an adjective betwe<^n
them or with the au.xiliary verl) JQ for comparing plaewl between them and
the adjective at the end, they give it the sense of gradual increase or di-
minution. — ^y\ ~/<^ — Tf'i yih 'tien ta' viK 'tien, little hy little it grows
gnat;
— '
Jy" |', /;
'— '
IQ' yih .t'seng ,kau yih .t'seng, hy successive la yem
it grows hlg'lu i\ or yih .t'seng JL P* X'^^ .t'seng ,kan.
Adiurhs oj Manner.
10 Adjectives are use»l as adverbs «)f manner with or without the suHixes
already described: ^ )\j ^(s S '^'^ }'""??' )»*'" j*^'j ^^^ thinks much; j^j
11 The uuxiliaiy substantives (see page 133) ofmaiinor, with vili, one, or
'liang, two, are used advcrhialiy at the end of sentences. ^>P ^X^ hj: y^
.ho fii' 'mu yili yan^^', the .toynr as one's father and mother.
12 The interro«rative advevh i^ .to, how? conimon in the north, as in
^/^ ^L .to cluing', how lieavyf is sdinctiines ii.^cd like our wuid how! -with
a note of admiration ^ yC -to fa', hoiv large it is! ^ /^ yv^ .to .mota*^,
Tlie words thtis, so, hoiv'f are expressed priucipallv ])v com])ounds, consist-
^^
iiig of pronouns and suhstantives, as :tQ, ^'^
4-?/*
ch(!-'
'
'
yang'. ^n.
^•^* TjV-
Wi ^
-yir
clie'
,mo ,cho, tsen' ,mo ,clio, thus ; \^^ ^^ 'tsen yang', hoio/ 'XII ]x\^ .jii 't-si,
means how'i or tsen' ,mo (clianging the tune) thus., /ti ji^» ,11^ P/t^ -f^hi'tsen
,mo .111 ,
is it thus? 55 6^ 't'^^'ii tih, ;^ ]S 6^ 'tsen ,mo till, how'^ ^iS
siangS # siang', -fjl] j| 'tausiang', '^U |U .ju .fung, tij I'lfW'ang fuh,
like. In purely colloquial examples formed from these words, the jdirase
follows the word to which the subject is compared. 3^P |pj rf-; 'f^f t^
WJ -j" .t'ung .hwang ti' yih yang' tih, the same as the emperor.
ta' ,kia, mutuoUii; ^)^ ^ ,siang ,shang, to fake counsel for/ether. yX ll'b
m TTJC riv liaiig' yaiig' ,tili, diferenthj; ^^ \^ \\\\\\ siang', not like] "^
^ U^ ,c'lia \uen tih, vrrt/ diferent; ^^ "M* iS pi'l» -t-'ha .sheii
,nio, not very di£'crenthj\ ^ TQ /i^ 13- r^ P"l' chicn'. shi* die' yang'>
* In I'f kin^', i)] 'kp" " <'»f"'ii "*<P'1 >«"' JS "">i' «s in j^ JH I^ <li'' .mcu ,kau, .«o /«i(/A_
Tliis is an iric^nlarity and i.s on«- of tin- insianrcs uiiero tlie I'ekiiiy dinleil (liHor.s from .stamlanl
nianilaiin. ^f^ Tft' ^Q. -CE XtL 111 ^^ 'we .cliii tau' shi' die' .men rim, I himc that it is so.
ClIArTKU 10. AnVKUIlrt OF INTENSITY AND giANTlTY. '^OS
it is not lil'dij to he so; 'K^ 'li T^ Veu' slir yili yuiij,'', that is differ-
ent, it is otherwise; y\\ 1'[i| ?K i3£ I'uli ..siiinj; .lai 'waiig, thcij do not
visit with one another.
It is nearly the same is exjnes.sed l>y^L i^ ^ ,t-'l»5i piili ,ti), niid y{\
l^j^ pull .li or ^ 0^ "I^J lltc ,c'lui till 'yi'U hiuir, it differs little.
placed before or after verbs. In the north nvo used e. g. to express the .sound
of fifes and other wind instnnM.ntsH»|{ Ul^[ A^i\ *yi\ .Huu .liau liau"^' liaii"-*'
soundimj loud; l^f. iiS S S X''^ y<^" jt^ng jtang, tvith prolan (jed i>om\Ci.
tE ^i. R ISt M'-^ jli^^i^ j«i^^" ?8i<'»> btaufi/ul. Four word groups formed
like these, and imitative of natural sounds are employed to descriljc those
sounds'^. Thus to represent the chirping and calling of a flock of birds Hp
'^ri ^11 f' il ,thi ,chi ,tswa ,tswa, is emi)loyed. Other e.Kamides used in
Chihliare sueh asjiljlj jl;|'j] )ij]lj l';|'Jj ,sh\va la' ,shwa la', the wind Jioivinrf on
rcfds: ^f^ jlj].'
i^^, W^ ,hi ,li many men walking with vaggager^^
,hu .lu,
i'jL" W\ ''M /^ ,li .'^^^^^"1 M, wind among pines. The tone in such ono-
luatojioeian words in usually .^hang p'ing, but sometimes hia p'in*'.
17 Intensitive particles (meaning very), are yC ta'. (after yy\ puh, not
very, JR 'hen, !£ kwai', %]' 'hau. ^ 'lau, j[j' -^ hau ]m h, ^ .shen*,
suffixes.
18 The sense too is given to adjectives, l.y 7^^ t-ai'. 1^ t'eh, ^ kwo',
vueh "iiau, the fuller the better. This indeed is the proper use of ;§)i yueh
and ]{V^> X\. They are employed but sparingly to express the single comjja-
rative.
'hen ,clu tau', Ilcnow it loell; ^R Wl yT?l 'lien tung' c'hi', he was very an-
^ chih, only ;
7s ^=]- 1|h| chili teh yih ko', only one.
vih .jen, not only one, or there were more than one.
EI 7L ^^ j*^^^^ ^"^^
P^^' jkwaug 'king, abont 300 or 400.
J-cL king', //iis/iCfZ, used for o«7y, as in _^ ,^1 M^ ^. ching' 'siang jChih
't'sau, he only thinlcs of eating straio.
jij^ hien', limit, is used Avith ^^ 'yeu, to have, for « little, as in ^^ |lj)
//<e least, as in^;;p ^^ -^ ^J ,sT .hau puh tui', it does not in tltc least suit.
)h\^ 'man, full; fully; as in -f^ ^^^ — jf - pnh 'man ri- .kin, not fully
two catties.
jL P"'^?
''' handful; about; as in 5C ?L<^'^''i"S' ' \^^: about \(^ feet f^ JG
OnArTER 10. ADVr.ailS of intensity and glANTITV. 1>1)^
t'suii^ 'pa, ahouf an inch; /]' j[_. Jviu iia, ahuiU a catf,/:f\' ]\^ HI fj'
Jfv (I J ?!<'" T^i ii" ;l<in Jiii till, ff/K>?/< ^ rr///y or two arc come; ~p i(|j^
F/fe ])!iS PMfAv/ Htt.M- ^\ j.iih, not, si;;niri('.s inrrcli/, as in^ "j^
^\ ^"^
I'd' T^ i^- 1
'
•^•^» •'^I'lJ' 1'"^' P'l' 'tsuni,' 'y.-ii "wii shih.fhrrearr more than
thiifi/, there mitat hejtfty.
half true and halffalse; 7n^ ^ /L^"'" } '1' J'Ji'i'' .n, //<e r/>Yfl/er part or
— X -p yu }''» ^«i' p'^'»' •»'•
JXHp'^S >-«</'t'>-; '"'i" s^««^' (/^'/m'; 9^ ]][[ )jj} ^ ..slion 'fi 'r/o ,nf^an
7c;?;o// tolerable health: \)] 'j^ &i1 ^v: tili ,slu!n<r p',)- ,tsieii, ^/<e
sound of
the fife is high and clear.
ix 'shau, /Vjy; not much; as iu>'^ % J*'sliau 'liau, not much of youdnesa ;
y" / TJ 'sliau yuii^', use little.
^1^« .SI, uniiic of a small divi.sion, used with yili and *^-^ .liaii, as in
— ,sit', a //7//r, is used in tlic compounds, ^J A»/ .sic .woi, a /////<' ; **P
i^t'I ,sir ,811, a little; as in ^[ :^^ "^ Jv.I/ ^j "^j^ii' .suliwci' 'sio 'sic tsT',
a little.
as in ^p( ^} Yj ^ ft' 111 ;>«« .wd 'yeUjSic hai' p'a', he fears a little.
yvC ta-. is used with the negative y\\ ]iuh, for not very. The particio
W!{-| 'li sometimes follows, as in yf\ TC^'^'j. ^T I"il» ^'i'' 'li Iiirif,', /^ ;> wo<
lyi .tan, .st«f//«'. is used as an adv<»rb for on/y, #{'«7///, as in .^\ J|/ ~~'
2U8 MANDARIN (.flAMMAIi. I'AUT II.
'f^ pull ,taii yili k<)', not one only; ^ S^ iul ^f .tan ,taii .t'a liwci',
filj] tan' kien' clieu' ye' ,slieng .yiin, puh kien- .vim ,cliung hia' 'u, he only
saw clouds coUecting night andmorning, hut did not see rain fall from them.
J^lj tail', to reach, after the negative y{\ pnli, means so much as, as in
^ ?!)
— ' I r^^^^
^^^^' y'^^^ jt'-siL-n, not so muvh^as 1,000.
tsuli, enough and^X keu', enough are used after y\\ jiuli not in the
/L;^
|g yih 'tsung, ^
|g kung' 'tsung, all.
^^ tiih, alone; singly; ^1 10 ^uh yih ko', only one.
"^ .wei, to be, one of the substantive verbs is used in some compounds of
\% .wei, only, a book word, used in the compound, ^% ^ifi -^^'t'i tub, on-
pounds, as ^ 8-1' y^'^i 'i^^^b ^ JM y<^'i^ luo, ^v4 15: yoh shus :h ^
til' yoli; $^ ^ yoh lioh, «&o?t^, of numbers.
Adverbs of Time.
ing here; J^ fjj 'c'lii ,c'l.'U, at the beginning ; (JJ Jiff ,c'hu 'shi, at the be-
ginning.
/j jfung, at that time; Just noio; Jj $j| .fang .t'sai,y?(6< now; ~/j 3£lJ
hitlnrtO.
"J7L l>i('ir, utjnc.-icnt; ijt (H l>i'''»- tsai-, u,>u:Vll ^^hi.ir ,kii,/^^* j5^
jtaii^ liinr, y/o/r.
l.hrast's, xf\ f^j: [^ puh ti-li 'i, ncccssariJij: M EL •>' '- <(ii</ (/lof dlonv.
;7 is (ilrcdi/// no.
^^' i^'\\\, fonntrlij; ^ )X^- s\\\ .'An, in former times; \.\ fj sili jVli. /„;•-
m^rl/f ;
"
ft; pirn-. Mru; fjii /l^ yk-xv sln\ M,.< //<c« />.' it; X^ jji [III ffj^
^'\<^
A/^ TIv/ itii 1'"^' 1'^' i)i('n^ pa', .lai i»iii shall .tM, //'//. ,/,„ v „,./ rimw hi it
-f^- tsai-, «^.n'// : j^j- j; [^^l T" ts«^' ^'i" >'•' J'^^" i^"- yo o//rr
//Jo/•f.
^ .t-s(.ng, idrc(fdy, /H(-fi, is iist-tl rt** «i ])artiih' tor tlu- past tiiiso. It ful-
PAllT
lilif
MANf'AKlN t.KAMMAn. 11.
''^'""' ^^ '""'''•
Tif .tsiuug, «6u»/ ^.; as in .W ^^^^''^"J=' -^^'^^
T ?f IPl ft* A tsnh fsien .lai "liau 'ki ko-' k-'cli .jon,
W ^[l
rr /('?<-'
he has written
H or,ain.
pronouns com1>ine with substantives of time to lorm
93 The domonstvatlvc
' na' .sl.Y, r.^ M«? time Jtl^^lJ 't^si k^:h,
a.hvvl.s of time. ?H^ Hf
g
;
compmmf
,ouncl
-^
^^^^ ^^.^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^.. ^^^^^.^ ^^^^^^ ^j ^ ^ j^^j^, .^^_^ ^^^^ ^^^..
nr
tbnr.
V t;,-ov; 'ire Viovrowed to form compound adverbs of time.
04 Several
,
..^*
,
adject nt^ <"^
c'hanji;.
.^
fO«.9««»jf;1^beu-, f(/i{er;
-^'
|
Ina', ?Wo«t';
^
Jf kicu-,
^'/t^i ,'!".
i^ m'ar; ifr
.,..,,.
t±I
ku. ««c?*e«^;^ k-'ii'
l^"- «;^'^'"-' t^.«,,m,
- " departed: ^ . 5^
y. .min^% t//r/A^;
.xu^.^^.. ,y.c
^c
77.
"'
kin^
.
^ to nuun,: ^ -tsau, efl;^// ; H'J -t'sien, he/ore; ^ VsV,
•
xi nfferivardo: f^ Pl ueu' jih, Me (Za// fz/Vc/- to-morrow;
•
' -J- ndL. HM 'ku ^iii .kicn. /// ff«c/V;/^ //?»e.v: ^^ ^ .ming .nien,
nn 7/ .niing .t-ien.
/o-wo>-ro?i-; ^,/| ^- .sin .men, »('?f> ?/ertr;
^''
fr.to Vik, mnny dm,.: ^^ ¥ '^^^^^ "t^-^"^ <>-'Vy; Wf B ? -I'sicn
Al.VKUr.S OK IL.M i: AM' I'lHF.CTlOM. 21 i
jj^j.j.,.,; li)
with lui".
cdrrespopding iurins
preposi-
^^-•'^^'O.vV/o^., or case particles answering to our Jocative
o,; Th.
ti.^H cnUr .Undar ^u-Y-A^'^^' -
^M-essed by ± ^^ shang' ,pien,
h ni .han.r .t'eu, X
ll ^^^^ ^^ ^'^"'' ^>'
_!;. pf^'''''
-V^^^^^^-
Tg innMf-- iS:
/^,A/and/':/V.an..xp..^^..n.yX'tso,
^t ti hia..
d-b
:^ y.-us w.th th. .nl.joined
%
i^^ pan' ,pien. T +
words f--sbH. 4^^!'- l-"- .,.,,, . „
and direct. on^ a.. A'J yicU.u .,.,,..,,/ ruund;
,
-.7 O.lur adverbs cf plac.
pLj'l^,] j//.] ,p .,.h.-u .w.i. "//'•"•""/• i^ "€ cl'Vh •-••". "'"/^ ^/-''7^V
* "•
5IAM>AlilN (iUAMMAK.
l'-^^*'^'
•212
^^:f ^ .sic 'tseu, icaU: vhlupichj; ])) ^ ^\^y^^^\ ,wan .n. ohf!qnel!/;^
forward. The words for north soutli cast and west are med in the
this thne
same way as in
^' ^ ^ehhi^^ ^tung-, cost of the metropolh:
also thus used, as in pj
M^J^^^^'
W Jii
,si, west of the temple. .Lai^l^ to rome is
by thejvord^^ <^i'
fvf ;t'so, with the ne-
yes. It is also expressed ^''^^'h
yf; ^ puh .neng, ?/o» c«»«o^ ^^ ^T"!' ting', ?Y is not certain; ~^>, ^
puh 'Chun, not certain; ^ M. V"^^ '^"""i.^-
^'^ '*' »^^ reasonable; ^^
i,uh to notmanv. Puh is sometimes affirmative, as when found in a sen-
an interrogative sentence).
the final particle being
spoken of,
^
iS ^ ^
'y!^'^^^'"'^; ';^'"
^h ^ H^
*j|^ l'*'^^''''"
-vi" 'tsi
'sion orr existence of things is
yuu iii? yen tih, //auc yoK silver? I have, or /s f/<cy(! silver? there is
one.
ClIAl'TEU 10. AFKIRMATIVK, XKCATIVR, ANO KMI'IFATIC rAIiTKLES. 213
3.'} OtliLT ncfjativcs horroioed from the hooks, aiitl used in soinc })liin.ses, nif
^|- ,fci, tlio cMiuivalriit ot .^\ /j^ pull slii', and ffH: .wu, tlic same as j^^
'f:] mull 'vt'U. Tlu'V aio sonit'time.s combined as in flit ^\'' /ii -j^- f')> f|"|
•clj' /j- -^^h 'f^'i «!»»' ytiu' 'iii .men ,cliiini,' liou ',/^ 'S </'«^ ijouinay be fuithfitl
and uprltj/it, and for that only.
?A Tilt' aflirmativo i.s dofinod more cloarly Ity cortain i)aili(U'S, viz. Jn
clu-n-Siili i.icnS Jjli/fitsieuS ]£ ^ chcn-' shr, it ,'sjusf .so;t^* ;§|: pi-u-
shi', that then is it; )]'/(] /^ tsieu' slii', that is it, if is so; f««j^ /J^ .t'sai
shi', that is it. Theso woid.s sometimes precede other verbs, asj;^ r'J pi<ii-
k'o, that then can he done. ^Jl^ tsieu', before oilier vt-rbs takes the sense ot"
one ai)plied to alHrniatidiis and neL;ati(»ns, the other to iH'f^ations only. The
former are such as i|i J^ pih king', ^ [[-_ shih tsai', ^^vj\ ^^' twan' .lin.
fji^ k'ih, with-tlL y^ following, as in {\P -Qii .^\ ijfjjc k'ili "ye puh .nan.
jl/i tsV .jan, .TfC ^^ J.en .lai, j^. ^ .yu.-n .lai, jjjl ^<^ .yuen 'pen, ^f^
These ])hrases are often prefixed to the substantive veil), as in |Jj^ /}S \'U
]vL i yC \<- \s [I Jyu<'n shi' ,king kiai' .mei .Hung sin , tih, this is a learn-
ing to thr inirhd.
38 That a thing ought and ought not to bo done, is expressed by ]»ii fixing
to the negative various words. For the aflhnnative are employed q:;^A -^•
tsung yau', jV) -^- ^vu' yau', you mvst. /Ji. -^'ting' yau',^>y /(/jwu' pih.
you must.
F«)r the negative are used ij\. kiuchj^v t'sieh, "| *
*J/; ,t'sien wan': '^'- in
214 BIANDARIX (iRAMMAP.. PART II.
"T" 0J -^ ^J jt'sion wan' pnli 'k'o, ccrtainhj you may not; j|^'| -J— !^
Hj twair .liu pull 'k'o, certainly you may not.
"^^ HI
39 Some adverbs prefixed to y]\ })ii]i are intcrror/ative. Tlie}- arc ]5>'*
'k'i, lioiu'^ Hit ^13. .nau tail', hard to he said; is it so tlicn'^ Tlie suffix ^\
)x(i pull .c'lieiig, is also interrogative.
CHAPTER XL
Ox CONJUNCTIOXS.
nect nouns.
•»
tnt.
2 Clauses are connected by means of ^^.liwan, still, and .liai, a collocpiial
pronunciation of the same word, probably shortened from an old form .hain.
'Ye illi also, is also used to join clauses together, in the sense even, also,
and.
'T'sie jEL and. further, is used only in compounds jfl -O- pi^g' 't'sie,
and further; ffo xL .k'iuen (c'h) 't'sie, under the circumstances. \vi] i L
.ri 't'sie, and further, by The .ri oc-
|h] _tL shang' 't'sie, if still further.
curring in books between tAvo adjectives, in the sense rtJi-of, is also expressed by
HU ±L .n 't'sie, as in ^l/fc fllj _LL )pj ,shen .11 't^sie ,t'sing, dee}) and
cle/xr. , Hwang 't'sie yL -tL i« used for how much 7nore, lohen further
A new subject is introduced by ^J^ -^ .hwan 'yen, and further, and -f^J-
is expressed by 'JP /£ tan' sh'i', or \^ :iI[U i)uh kwo', J' ^ chili. Tan' and
chih combine M'ilh various verhs, as with fipj 't'sing, please, in the .se.n.se /
iHAi"n:i; 11. on coxjixitions, 21.'>
onhj ask you to, ami \wnvL'jusf viilf/ T.tn* kicii- ]]_[ >[|^/« onf/j saw. Tliis
Our Wdiil f)i(f ill its liglitcr sense is more nearly expressed l)y jflj 'tan, on
Mt' olhcr hand, Jiowivvr, and ll'lj [\^ 'tan 'ti, ?h ///e end, hoiccver, and yet.
The phrases^fE J{^ ,sni .jan and /J\ \\W .jaii .11, althoiujh, yil, are used
to commence separate clauses. For J{^ [IfJ .jan .11, the jtln-ases ;/^ ^^
'kieu Icing', and Jl'IJ /^ 'tan 'ti, Aoia-yty, are also nsed.
4 Disjunctives. When two clauses are introduced hy cither, or, the word
^^ hwoh, or componnd y)l ^'hwoli 'che, is i)lacedatthe beginning of each.
The phrases yj\ ^, pnh shi', jj,y{] ^ tsieii* shi', //' it he not, then it is,
the interrogative .ni is used at the end of the first clause, and.t]^ ^ .hwan
shi', at the beginning of the second. ^^ \/\i i^j[^
^SL /H //'J /^ •'^I'l' ''i
On the one hand, and 071 the other hand, are expressed by ""^ ]']' yih
For the latter, nSl li*""? together toith, is also found. Pnh tan' ^\ jUand
nJi 'ye, are also used for not only, hut also.
•
.Ning ^ it icould he better
yau' tso' ngoh shi', it would he letter to die than to do luhat is lorong.
J Causal cojijuHctionJi. |a| ,yin, [aJ J,'^ ,yin wei', fy ^ .wei ,cho,
all introduce clauses with the scobc because. The word tjX. ku', cause, i)lac-
od at the end of a clau.se with ^^ .chi, tlic possessive particle before it, or
tS 5^ yuen ku', cause, with [J J tih, also gives the meaning hecanse.
G Illative conjunctions. W\ \J '«" i- ^^ iH^ ku' •t'.si,^^; f^ ku' 'so,
216 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. PART II.
Jy'i jy^ ku' 'so 'i, (Southern) I^j ]Xu ,y'^^ '^'^'h therefore, hecmise of
TliG Ji)ial conjunction that, is expressed by jy^ 'i, in order to, pn'Ccding
certain verbs, as \J^ y^j '^ uiion', hi order to avoid. A plainer colloquial
t ..r ^^ 1 •
The compounds, Kuj ^ 't^ang hwoh, "f ji^!j ifl 't^ang shi^ f ^j ^^ 't^ang
"^ 7H y^^^'^' slii'S is used in novels and means if, as in -^ /H j/p y\\ p
^JC "S yfiu' shi^ ni' pub boh 'wo k^ii^, if you tvill not go with me.
Tsieu' shi'^, jjJ/[] /i£ means even if, when commencing the first of two
k'uh .ri' 't'sie nau' 'ye pub yau' jang' ,t'a, even if she iveeps and makes a
noise yet do not listen to her.
phrases such as ffl ^P 'p'i .ju, J-t J^P 'pi Jib ll§ J^P '^^^'^
-j^b ^^^^^ P^'i'"
CHAFTER XII.
P^ till, the sign of the possessive. This word is also i)lace<l after adjec-
tives (as attributive) and verbs (as jn-edieative). After verbs it often has the
power of a relative pronoun : y\\ /£ ^Jc vOL \\ ] l''»li ^hr 'wo shwoh tih,
it was not 1 ivho said if /K U'J /^ A^ J^ .h^i tih .jen i)uh 'sliau. those
;
irho came were not a few. When it follows material nouns it chunircs them
into adjectivTS ^|nj f]^ .t-'ung tih, made of copper. It is also used couver-
tibly with ]^ teh after verbs. In mandarin books jjll ti- and J^ 'ti are of-
<^, is the book representative of the preceding word, and is used in bookish
(•X[)ressions in conversation.
o 'Liau J
is the sign of the preterite, and the past participle.
4 .jMen 11 I
is a jilural ])articlo for substantives.
f) Tin' //?/f// ])articles arc ll'}- "li, which is indicative and sometimes in-
terrogative. :jQ, yy /^ ^[^ ^'J^ 2j^ ^^ I'lll t^li^*' jfangshi* .ii'-ngwu' ptii
Till- words n'[^ .111. aii'l jii. witli "tjy .na arc also used as finals in indica-
tive sentences, as in^j<| 7^M -XIJ. •''/{' wo ,chi tau' ,na, T know it.
,La ^i and "\^ .lo, are used occasionally in Peking as finals in indicative
sentences. Thus /ii j iLsh'i' ,1a and .shi' .lo, for yes, it is so, are both heard,
as also /^ I'
'I
>-lii- ,ya.
.A or ,nga p'!j is used in addressing persons. '{^ /\. |^"J lau .jcn ,a,
old man I
6 'Mo ,^ is the r«^'>Toyrr/j"re of remonstrance. whil(l'j[^ .ni is that of
2 IS MAN1>AR1N' f;nAM>rAR. I'AKT III.
s(»und 'ma is freqiK'iitly heard in c'(tllo(|uial usage, and this new character has
been invented to express it. ]>oth are found in the Sacred Edict. }±fl'uio is
also used after several of the interrogative pronouns, as •ptr.sheii, etc. It is^
there also pronounced ,mo or ,ma the tone changing hv the law of accent.
"k'i, hoic!' H^ ;v5.nan tau'. After the latter, the phrase -^\ Jj)l puh .c'heng,
one who calls, intimating that he is heard, p'lj ,a (,o ,ngo) is also used in
'
Cho is used in speaking to superiors in the same sense as tlie last h is.
as used in Peking, |^ p[ff ,kwan hwa', puhlif, while the preceding is ^l\
P^* P/l ,ngai ,ya, alas! Premare has pg ,a or ,o for the second of these
PART III.
SYNTAX.
CHAPTFAl I.
On Government.
1 The rules for the relative position of words in a sentence are few and
fcimiile. They will be first considered in sentences of an luiinvolved form.
2 When a noun is united with unother by the connecting particlep^ tih,
Fj| %X 11 I il";/ )llS 73 peh shig' .men tih fuh fen', the peojjlc' s share of
happiness.
(•!IArrEK 1. INFLLKNi'K OF rOSlTIOX. 210
.') A<lj«"ctivos luvivik' their snUstiin lives. Fiv<[m'iitl\ [J^ till is inserted.
,kinLj .sliu. rurrrtf mnJ rJussirnl books; i.ij\^ n|'|' 'li\van|j; hwix'^/u/nc words
^^i ^ -W ffi ^J^ )7i' ffi ,kia cluing 'yell
, 'li:in- .tsnu lnv..li fnl, (f,,),
/>/ yo^O* JlOhUti IjnU hltVC two llviiHJ Jiuihllidfi, vj/. jiKfOlfs.
pdsitiou of the nhject. In x^ |{ii 4^ W'^^i^g' j^"'^ }'•'* P^^'i ,sliu, tjive
direct object. The most natural order in this case, is for the direct object to
fnllnw the verb, as is shewn by the necessity in the other two modes of intro-
ducing a case particle or an instrumental verb. But rhythmus often make«
the third mode more uatural.
»iiy ^K >n pl ^ .mingjih .c'heu .lai .ming jih ,tang, should grief comi:
fn-htoivoiv ht if he home to-morrow; \\^ /TJlang' yung', <o m.sc wastefidhj;
T^ ?? y*^ \M l/ii 5C i}!i n \r I'lili yau' ,chwen 'kiang tso' .wen t.so' ,shi,
are some; 'f/c '^^ iO* f^ .tsung ,kin i heu',//o//i this time forward.
CUAPTER II.
Very many words admit of being classetl under several parts of 8i)eech.
220 MANDAIUN GRAMMAU. I'AltT IJI.
That to ^vllic]l tliev Lclonii; is iisnallv Icmdwii from tln-ir ])Ositi('n Avitlioiit
difficulty.
The Substantive.
cifff tvalU tjjl^ I Ivh ~i^ .c'heng .men .leu 'tsi, toivcr over a eity gate.
mi I .,' . . ,
The Ailjeetive.
or witlumt 0"^ tih. ig. tM Jit T^ ZLs 1^ 'hJ <-"^i'^'^ yang' 'liau puh kien'
.tch 'yen, tlis Ichul of goodness is not Wcrbj to he found; )^ \Y-j ^ ^ f|||
.lio tih ,wan c'hidi ,to, the windings of the river are many.
?) Wlien adjectives follow transitive verbs they also become substantives.
/^ J 5m! ^^ i! I iWj -fang 'tsi kai' .to .men ,kau, how high is the house
telligence; ^^ ^"jh Mf ^^hioh (.siau) 'hau .wci shan', leai'n goodness and
do rvhat is good; \{i^ /^ tso' ,hiung (s), to act the part of ct violent man;
^ /Xs ^'^^^ jl'i"^ig"j to w.se vioUnce.
substantive: J^^ tAK ,shen liUi, light green jy^.^'v^.'^- f|^ i)\\^ ,cdiing ,c'hing
'sie, use a little less; »Tf'^J z^ t'ung' Ivuh., 2X(infally weeping; yC 'pj ^/J
*~-^ ta' 'yen ,kung .lau, he has great merit. (The word great cannot be
made in the translation to qualify the verb.)
*^r "^ 1^'^^' kwaii kul", ht eacli oiw attend to his otcii vffuirs; /j\] [j J -^
jiit-h till 'viii. others have it.
The Verb
p-liTib .c'lnvou 'ye .nan, tojiml/oodund cfothiwj in diJicnU ; ]l\jl Itp ^\ ]']
fill
%** v\~J l^V vK ^1^1^ ?=^l^ii ^i^^ -^^^^ \n^\.i\ the time of ntudi/i/i'j.
\) Vcrljs when they (juality nouns liecouje a 'jectivos. fj>£ y\\ ^^ l\j '^
sh\v..li i)uh .hii tih 'iv'u, nntipeakable uiinery; tJI^ jp ^* f/,;^ f]"^ Gi -f-
mi' ko' ugai*' 'c'hung tih .c'hen 'tsi, thcd favoured mandarin.
10 A verb l>econjes a substantive Avheu governed by anotlier verb, t^ |^--i
hioh (.siau, siiie) 'iiuii mai', to learn a trade. 113, /\£ ^Xt II J .ili ic
die* shi" 'avo tih t.sau' hwa", this is my good fortune.
11 When verbs beooiue gerunds by taking case j>articles before or after
them, they may also be viewed as assuuiing tlie form of substantives. jQi,
hwa-, he is thinkiwj, do not speah to him; \{i)t \rJ, ^C^ T |-J Ml" ^ >^
mi t.so- jkwau ,chi ,chuug 'yeu 'hii ,to .wei nan-, in being a mandarin there
12 The facility with whicli words jjass from one to anotlier ])art of speech
jiermits many verbs to become numeratives to nouns. ^J lyj y\\[ /\. yf\
V>y lij y*'ii 'liang ,chung .jen pub 'hau till, there are two kinds of bad pco-
J*h", ^vl (l^* ^^ ^C \\ yih t'uu' 'wan chau ,kia ho, a set of ehina
and other furniture.
13 The prepositions are almost nil freely used as vcrlw, being sucli origi-
nally. In l)otli cases they preceile nouns, so that their character as preposi-
tions or verbs in any individiuil caso. must Ik- decided by the 8<*n.s«*. not by
222 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. PART III.
"i tail' tell 'liau, in one day you can reacit it) 3:!J Jt> ^^yi'i ^-i-ii' .k'lijIf
o
'li, ?f;7icw owce yo?t have rccuclicd the cajyital; and a prepo.sition, in]£lj J'7^ ^
'^ J tail' jking 'li k'ii' 'liau, he is gone to the cajnial.
14 The i)osti)o.sition.s are freely used as adjectives. When they follow their
word they are postpositions; Avhen they precede they are adjectives. Among
them should be included the points of the compass. }^ ,chung .yuen, ^
China j[^ Fp ,sin ,chung, in the mind; j^l i(-I.,si ,kiang (ts), the ivestern
;
river; ^X Fi| Xmng ,ii[, the 20est of the river; P^\ J"|li nui- (nei) ti', the
interior of the country; tj^ P^J .c'heng iiei', loithin the ivalls.
The Adverb.
government of case i)articles. ig, 7q 0^ /\. die' .ri tih .jen, the men of this
place ; %'Y J%, yQ 05 Q %^ na' k'wai' .ri tih peh sing', the people of
that place; 1{li ^5 £0 lib it!i 5^ ,t'a .mei tau' 't'si ti' .lai, he has not
CHAPTER III.
the power of expansion and contraction under the control of certain laws.
These laws are those of rhythmus, and the position and grouping of words.
2 Examples. Many phrases used colloquially have all the laconic, con-
tracted character of the book style, from which they are many of them quo-
CHAPTER 3. REDUCTION AND EXTANSlON. 223
changed for more familiar jilira-seolofry. Thus l|l|i'ij ill; i| l!'',- | | ill: \ tl
-^ lio'fuh.uii .men .Mil .jcn tsi* ,cluui, is cxpn'sseclmore famihary, /L< /^
li~l M ^ MU M U — ^ \\^:}V'\ Ijffitau jen iih ho' hnV fuh k'i'
.wu yili ting' tih .men lu% tncii'a kuppini'sa and miser have no fixed if oi'ijin;
y>k \\l /\ Q liy p| ^cliih tsai' .jen tsi' t8o' tsi' shell', they only sprinrj
from men's own actions and deserts. In this i)ara]ihrasc each important word
is doubknl, and various particles etc. are inserted, l)y which the sentence is in-
creased to nearly three times its original length. In the Sacred Edict the
sentence ^ /V -T^ f^ti 11 fllj ^ )tj ,slieng .jcn puh .nengyih jili
,ri .wu yung"', is thus i)araj)hrastd, /\ {^ ill iiil-j^-'H ,sheng tsai* shi-', P^^
3>^" 4-<c'liih fan' ,c'hwen ,i, 7/ie7i living in the loorld, eating anddrinlc-
^^^'Jj 3<I 1^ /1^ li ,kiau (ts) tsieh .lai wang', minglinrj with others and
going hither and thither, Jj\^ pi ^ 3^ '^ >4./'J 'na yih jih ,mei yen
fei' ynng', ichat day do they pass ivithout expense'^ Here the verb iftt^.wu
becomes ^ >^ -J^ nuih 'yeu, to he ivithout; and /rjyung', to use, is expanded
into ^Tj^ /tJ fei' yung', expense.
of the book language, that we have now to do, more than with the converse
process. The principle on which it is based, is simply to choose such groups
of wortls, and modes of arrangement, as are euphonious and in common use.
tion of groups of words, whether of two, three, four, or more numbers must
be maintained. Thus in the sentence $\;^ ||^ jX, >^\\ ) j J
'^ j .t'sien
.t'sai lib k'eh yung' tsin' 'liau, your money iviU he at once expended, there
are three doubled words from the original. \\^ JJ^ [y([ ^^. t'sai lib k'wei' .i.
,chi jking (ts) ti' ,chi i', now fdial pietif is law in heaven and duty on caHh,
as cxpanaed iuto iE # M W iH (t ^ ilil I HI ^tE l\'j
^ iltche' hiau' shun' ,tie .niang .tsiii' ,t'ien ti' ,kien (tti) .wei ,taug.jau tih
tau' 'li, the word hinn'Jilialjiiciy, is developed into a four- word group hiau'
224 ilANDAhlN CKAMMAR. PAIlT 111.
ijhiUi' .tie .uianj^. In the other ]»art of this jiara phrase occurs an instance of
reduction. Two nieniLeis «)f an antitliesis law in heaven and dut// u)i earth,
5 Anionj^ these examples the briefer ones are taken from the book style,'
Many reduced sentences are however as already observed, also found in common
colloquial use. Thus P
/J ^[£ /pC jil' yueli ,siii<:; .c'hen. .<?^^//. moon and
stars, which is expressed more familiarly (nj j/^ 7[»M r\ >3^ ^U ^^ /^
jih .t-eu .ho yueh lianti;' .ho .sing ,shig-, in the Trking dialect, -^^ ^^ .kin
.tung, ^ 1^] .niing ,si, to-djij he goes east and to-morrow west, tor ^^
These })rocesses are facilitated by the readiness with which many particles
snn, moon and stars, no conjunction is neces.sary. The words are boiuid to-
gether by rhythmus instead. AVhen however the one gnnip is broken up in-
to three, the particle aiid is twice inserted. In a western language the con-
junction would be only used once. The Chinese ear regards this as a viola-
tion of symmetry.
the modern idiom of conversation has been formed. The old colloquial was
probably very like, if not identical Avith the Ku-wen. As words, tones, and
dialectic ditferences multiplied, it was found necessary to use two or more
words, where i)reviously one was enough, otherwise the meaning would not
dered.
CHAI'TKU 3. GOVKUNMKNT IX GROUrS, QO';
SS t
111 rtj^anl to intonml nrrangeinent, tlie worils in a group are oitliqr in tli.*
entire sentence.
2
m
Very nniny grouplf exhibit an
Government in
int^LTnal
Groups.
their external reh\tion to tlie rest of th«» sentence does not interfere, iff: i tjf
funits. In tliis sentence tlie four-word grou]) ,yeu 'sheu hair .him. eonsists
cally tor agents generally, and .hien is the object to the transitive verb hair.
as each consisting of a verb and its noun, are such as the following :
J4^ P$
.-tiA lln ^"^"o ^l*' ^^^""'^^ taieh, on the arrived of f stir ah; ^ % |p W
.wei ,yuen kitdi .c'heu, to be an enemy and form yrndyes '('^^^;
V '
;
t'=t hIh
tsih .hien tu' .m^ng, to envy the wise and fnJmted.
jective precediny a substantive. yC |pj /J^ ^ ta' .t'ung 'siau i', nearlt/
fi'f^r
^fcii X.^ J' .t'«i fu^ hiaii' (s) 'ts'i, kind fathers and Jified sons.
aw adverb, verb and 7ioun, as in I ( y[^ n^^- p.-h (i)ai) fei' .yin .t'sien.
to sfMiid money uselessly. Or two nominatives may govern two verbs, /s^
JJiJ Jlli %<, .t'ieu ,peng ti' lieh, heaven f(dfi„f/ and earth burstin<i.
5 So a verb may govern two nouns, (>i an adjective and iinuii. ^X. 7\.
22G MANDARIN GRAMMAR. PART III.
Jljj, king' ,t-ien ti', reverence heaven and earth ; ^^ /(^ Itp s^iuii Vi W^to
seek death by one's otcn hand (in the nortli ^jl yQ.sin'si).
In the composition of a(lvorl)s witli other words, the order of the words is
usually that uf syntax; e.g. in j'^ j^ ehili teli, Jw could onhj ; onhj; 7^
'^^ chih 'kwan. to attend only to] onJy;^ -l!ii puh kwo', onh/; ehjli'liau,
sist of words, bearing to each other all the grammatical relations, wliich spring
A
from their position and the parts of s])eecli to which they belong.
Antithesis.
9 A pair of words naturally opposed to each other stand Jirst and third
in a four-word group, or second and fourth. y^\ ^ ZK, %^ A^ \±, puh
pill ta' jking 'siau kwai', you need not fear much or luondcr little^ i. e
there is no ground for fear p^c ; ^ n^ Jtli -t'an ,t'ien shwoh ti', to con-
verse alout heaven and earth, i. e. things generally; "vj. ^L ^^]A ®^ jsieu
v>t 5^k'i* (t's) ngan' .t'eu .mmg, forsake the dark and seek the light;
\^^ y^ ^'tso .lin yeu' she^ neighbours on the right and left-^ JW 1dE
4u 'tseu .nan 'wang peh (,pei), going to the nortli and to the south;^^ PjfJ
}J[ n'|',tunghan' ,si kiau', calling to the eastward and shouting to the west-
ioa rd; P/fj gU .1^ "^'tsui .t'ien ,sin 'k*u, sweet in the mouth but bitter in
the heart; ^ Pf %^ ^\ .c'hang ,hu 'twan t'an', long sighs and short la-
mentations.
I'l'i'' Bxl P"^^ ?<^"'" '^^'" y"'.-' «<^^ f^ know whctfur they lost or yaineil.
11 Two pairs ut" o2)])i)si'd lulji-ctivcs muy form u lour- word j;rouj» ; "^^ ^x/
yC /r cliiuii^ yen' ta^ 'siau, ohl and f/ouw/, fjrcat and 8maU.
Jiepetiti'on.
But in the case of adjectives and verl)S its use is rhytlimical or fur emphasis.
'tsT, allfothers nnd sons; -y \7\\ ]y]\ ^ 'th'i 'tai .mn.mn, sous and (/rand-
4ons; ^< ^<. ^
H Jii 7C J ,l<ia ,l<:ia ,tung ,si 't'siant; .wan liau, r///
the houses have been robbed of their projierty ; fj^* jjj" |j[i xf\ ^"jp 7J2 jl^i^i'
jkiai ,tu puh 'hau 'tseii, the streets are all imjtassable.
a family.
14 Several of the formida3 for the repetition nf adpctives and verbs are
the same. Two coordinate adjectiv^^r^erbs are eacli rei>eated, or the sec-
ond of them is repeated, while tho otft^^ notj^. fj% n>L ft'fC U'K shwoli
shwoh .fan .fan, they talkrtl and convtr.frfn'^'' ^*' I'j'l) n']|j.(heng,cheng
'jang '.jiing, they wrangled noisily; \\\j\ [j^ [j^ nau" liungMiung', «o?'6y; )|4'j
"5 /]»J 'man .feng .feng,/M^/ <o owr/?o<yr«.7; fJWi fiy 'iH ,piau tang'
tirl um of'l ^MJ i' l^m' i' I'^nS '<> '^^ advice upon.
228 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. PART III.
a simple or c<^ini)ound vcrh. U\^ h0 iuK ® n^an- ngJin- Jiwaii 'hi. secirt-
down the hlU; \f^ j'J JT ^ hwuli hweh 'ta 'sY, to lent to death; 'I'k ijt
7J2 k'wai- k'wai" 'tseii, tcalk qnicJch/; ^ \U H^ 9c!l I'^i"' "^i"' 1""^" i, /'<
parth/ believed it and parth/ doubted it; ^ ^f Ihlg T .t'si .f'si kwei' hia',
toijether the)/ Icnelt (hion; ^^ Pj T^f^ shih shili 'k''o A'uu, truhj to be
16 Some nouns take aftt-r tli(Mn a repeuti'd word expivssinj^ some quality or
mode of a})i)earance in them. |i)l'< \\y ilr M"J'yeu ,tseng ,tseng tih, the eyes
looking amjHly; \\[k \ i 1 4 El^'yeu .pa .patih, the eyes hokiny wistfully.
,teng, sound of fir in ff cannon; ,t'eih .t'ung 'k'u ,t'ung, noise of men rushing
together; J# pIJ ^ Vi% ,si ,1a ,hwa ,1a, noise of the sea.
,/v 3v SI" niien' pah ,fang, the four quarters and eight regions; XL ilyj
\!S i^ ''^^^1 -l^^i ^i" li^Jj the*fve lakes and four seas.
-b ::^ A y^ t'sih ta' pah ta^ of diferent sizes; but "t :;^
"~^ ,fen ,fen puhyih, cow-
t'sih ta' pah 'siau, is more common; I// $// ^\
fused and various.
20 In comixnind nouns wliere one word specifics and defines anotlier, the
fornicr precedes. ^^ /{^ ,^\\\\:, ,'^\\m\)::,, the Uijht of stars ', 'AJV I'jnJ
p 'au'
'liiang, noise of cannon ; \±\ ^p ,slian .yaiig, « yoat ; ildj ^p .mien .yan o>
till ,k\v(i lii\ cut off his retreat; i53. J ^^ *^ '^^^'j' '^^^^^ ^'*^^ .t'eu, Ara*-
22 In compound nouns, where one word expijpsses matter and the other
loim, the Ibnner precedes. $j(|^ ti| t'ieh tih, an iron fife.', 41 iSrf chuh k'i-
(.t's), hanihoo articles; -rn Jui ^li'i'» ,kwei, stone tortoise', X] I'lX 7Q sliih
pan .11, a fiat stone; ^]\ )H 'chi kioh, corner of a sheet of paper; -^^ pp
'kwo p'in, /ir«c?s of fruit.
23 Further, all auxiliary substantives, as ;p 'tsi, [i^ .t'eu, etc, and all
'ho 'pa, a torch; \1\\ "jr ,s"" '^sY, grandson; 2^-. i^L, .li ]'a*, handle of a
plough ;
M)fj ^
"j" 'thui ,i)a 'tsi', instrument of torture for striking on the
I
"-
inoutJi.
jhiunjj; (s) ti' ,l>'eng 'yeu, j^n'nce and suhject, father and son, husband and
wife, elder and younger brother, friend and friend; ^ -^- y[j. 3\ 1'^"
ther, mother and ivifc ; Js^ J-'[!i /V ,t4eu ti' .jen, heaven, earth, and man ;
"g J /n 'tsif ,sun, so«5 and grandsons.
^ Order of Time.
25 Wlien the action is gradual in a compound verb, the word first in time
is first in order. ^^ tso' ting', to sU stiU; (ijC flljjk'an 'tan, to strike
atid thr 010 down; JH"- ^^ jt'ui loh, to 2'>i''^h doivn;7^ i(^ 'tscu pien', to go
26 When one verb expresses power, andtlie other action, the former pre-
cedes, as in the case of the potential auxiliaries.^ ^ IhS Itu P^^^ hwei*
'p'au hi', he cannot toalh.
27 Most of the auxiliary prefixes to verbs are originally mental acts, which
naturally precede physical acts; e. g. }p\ 'k'eng, luilling :^^ y^^^^S to desire.
28 The suftixes to verbs describe the progress and issue of the action. In
^ Jl H'J y^ 'tseu shang' .t'sien .lai, to icalh iip and come forward, one
action is described, viz. coming forward. The first verb represents the action
generally, 'tseu, lualking. Shang' and .t'sien describe, the direction taken i(p
and before. .Lai indicates the conclusion of the action. Thus the several
words are arranged according to the extent of their speciality. The most
specific stands first, 'tseu ivalk, and the most general last, .lai come. The
law of order is the same for verbs as for substantives.
29 "When one verb is the object of another verb, it follows it; ^ H-j- JJ
puh kiau' 'ta, they did not call out to heat him; y\\ i^> ^^ ^ puh'siaug
tung' jShen, lie does not think of setting out] y\\ tfx j^jl^
p^^l^ kan .t's'i, he
permission or iirohibition. This rule embraces therefore the one above regard-
ing prefixes. ^^ it® ^j •^'h'an' 'p'au 'ma k'ii' (t's), he is gone to see the
horse-race; ^yfC nX mi. nP ,hieu shwoh ,hu hwa', cease to speak falsehj.
niAi'Tini 4. ouDHU of akiutraky choice. 231
minrtl l>y cust.iin. |^ "^^ \\\\qV .V)^\, tOyiiwet and asficiahlc; ^^ H. -yki
.(.'ha, to vxantinc into; j^^^ jLj! ^^^^^ U\\V^ robbers; ^^ |rj)liinh (.siau) wen',
learning; )\vl S)'^'"' "S ^^ f^''«^'*A'i' and hate; ^ |*$ Itfe f^^ ,toiig kiang'
kwt'i* pai*, /o </o ?/y) an<l descend, kncci and juaJce prostrations; X[^ )^|h.lseng
jt'ien, ^o «(/(^;!lt III pi' yen', to protect; Jlfc; ;}|Vl,'^''ii -v^'o) '^'/t'«^"«<^i^'*t''-
/orv; TJC HM iMc. {-ii^'shui 'tsieu su' fan', water, ivine, vegetables and rice;
li^it l-ty ^tib I^'^i^'" tail .mi 'wanj::, overturned, con/iiscd and^icrong; jjl
^\i 'fhaii .siiui, to seeli-; jq|; t[I] kih .niang, hasty. "^
Order of a Proposition.
32 In some groui).s of closely connected words, there are both subject and
TpJ j/\^ ^^ ^^ 'siang man' .t'ang .fang, his appearance ivas dignified.
34 The verb groups formed with |^ teh and -^ jiuh, are to be regarded
as originally ]»ru])o.sitions, though they are used in the same manner as simple
verbs, f'jjj f^ /\^ 'pu i)uh tsuh, cannot be filled completely up.
may even be introduced betwe(»n the subject and predicate, ^'ij lAjlt ;/lP ^
wuh .li jhiang kwei', all thinj.i Hf. ay from hvnie, arc dear. Ju proverbial
expressions like this, the most varied modes of a proposition may occur, but
Variation in Order.
certain groups, of which some examples are here given. The order iu two-
Avurd groups, where the terms afe synonymous, is also often varied, /fp
^i 'T'n ^ ki^'l^ i^lii^i ^^itili slnh, or -f p i7>'pj
^^ '^ kieh kieh shili sliili,
.t'si
Try I
jCkeng, w orcZer; ipj^ pyij .t'sai ,kjuig or
A
,kang .t'sai, J«t.s^ now; -^
^
•*
—I ,
•^ "kin yau' or yau' 'kin, important', /{_, ,hiung ti', elder and youmjer
hrotkers, or^ti' ,liiung, brothers.
Mr CHAPTER V.
I**
External Relations of Groups.
1 Groups of words such as those described in the last chai)ter, bear the
same relation to the other i)arts of a sentence as single words do. Thus in
the sentence, ^j^ A ^' 1^ 1^1^ Hf ifi ,sheu juh ,kien nui-' (nei') till
.shi lieu', cd the time of his being i^laced in prison, the first group of four
words is related to the compound noun, .shi lieu' as a single word Avould be,
^ M^ P^T \ul -^^^ ^^^^ -^^^^ hen', the time of his coming. So in the sentence
hwa' hien' (s) hai' ,t'a, bri?ig him into trotible by groundless charges, the
four-word group .ww 'ying .wu .hing, might be rei^laced by any single word
meaning/aZse. The government of the words 'ying and .hing by the verb
.wujs for the time lost sight of. jji tli^ llj |f- ^ |ffl (54/ ffl till
.c'heu hen' tau' 'kiai puli ,k'ai till . t'ien ti', i/ic?r enmity ptroceedcd to an in-
curable length. Here 'kiai puh ,k'ai, it cannot be untied, in itself a jiroposi-
tion, becomes an adjective to the following noun. ^'j]i ,^» Ifljj ilj j^Q
A^ Iszi 0^ /v yih wei' 'jen nai' tau' 'si' puh pien' till .jen, a man ivho is
J] )]•'!' t'i' '"' •""'• •^^*" '^^'''' •^''" kiai, I will separate them for you; ^\
iM ^31 i^ flJ "yt- f'/ii J l''il» k^^'*^'' -^^'i" '^^^^''^t "^^aii '«'iwii pa' 'liau, he
Otliors arc too closely cnm]mcto(l to allow of this. Tims ^J ijx '^'^ ^•l^fii'""',
meaning. Thus it ai)pear.s that the words in a group are not combined in
;ill cases with the same ilegree of closeness. They may be separable or inse-
Inseparable Groups.
".%' R^'^ .ai yaS alas! ^}j f1|) "fang fuh, lih-e: I'T ^'^J^ ,ting .ning, to inti-
5 None of the words in these groui)s are used alone in the same sense,
but some of them may be replaced by anotli'-r Tvord ; e. g. Plji' j^ 'ya 'tsi,
have a dilferent force if separated. Many verbs resign their governing power
when they enter these combinations, taking the character of the entire group
.t'sin .sui, his oicn servants; y\< .lai, to come, in ^ 1}^.^ .lai lih, orifjin;
nr/J I'fj^
tung' tsing', to move, to rest, in@ -^"J" J?// p/j^ yen .hing(s)tung•
t8ing*, At» wort/^, actions ajid moucinents; /j\] /\. \\-j /\^ ^p jiieh .jen
they enter into coinl)inati<in with verhs, and assume tlic character of the
whole group. |-l \j>\ 'k-cu Jcuiiti;, io confess a cririwS/]^ iili ,k\vaiii;cli.nr',
(y>-/c/*. ^IJ tah, ^>««/67<;/^e«^, becomes a vorh, in ^ =g,-IJ tsdi (diai) fali, /o
punish. In 'IJ,',?! ^ /j* j[^ 1lii 'tsnng van- 'sian ,sin ,t^a, you must he
careful of him, sian litflc, an<l sin heart, join to form a VQihbe careful. Ki*,
a project, in PQ ^^ -^ ri I
/v ngan' 'h swan' ki* .Jen, secretly he jylots
take that force. Tlius in /\. \l\ ,\ jjp .jcii ,shan .jcu hai, men in vast
numhers, .shan and 'hai, mountains and seas. -Dwnnvcr// inimrroux. fn»ni tin-
tih, gluttonous and fond of loine ; /v [1] ^\ \^ [rj-J \ .Jen mien"' shcu'
.sin tih .jen, a man human in face hut a hrutc in heart \yCs ^C ^ "i Tn:
W^ pi '"^^'*^
jl^^^^o -liic^ 5^^'i'iS ^il'; ^'-^- ^'^ younger titan I. Here the substan-
tive .nien, years, forms with ,k'ing light, an adjective after tlie adverb ,keng
9 In names of agents many verbs areemploycnl, wliich then lose their ac-
tivity. )^ "^ .yuen kau', (accJise) ^:)7a»if /^'; p^ pj i^ei'kau', (Ztybic^a^ii;
things, %% ,feng, wind, in ^ )% >K" eliieu' ,feng 'king, a?i old turinkkd
/^
k'i'', in y] 3J]^(
f^l
nndi, eye, in -^ ^ tsi' muli, characters (used in Kiang-nan); and in
^4^ y sill' mull, influence. In some of these examples, the reason fur the
use of the superfluous words may be detected. Thus in tlie last, muh cye^
sheu head, is probaljly an eld numeral particle, which as such regularly fol-
ii'jfnt.'-'' In stiiiir such iinmos of tliinijjs tlie f'tvmc>lo;'v ciiiHi"t Ix' tli.scovcivcl:
thiny, both words Utsf tht'ir own sejisc, iind join to t'orni ii nicuniiij; entuely
ilifferent.
Separah/c Groups.
to each. ^^ 7Lr UJ '"'J ^"^^ j^'i'in^^ '^"li ,t'siin, mc// hamJct and viUar/e:
, piig kiiu ,t'an k'woh hin', hud and hoastfid wonts; ^k %'i|j* vJ.V A ..kwa
Ip* .ku 'nil, tvidows and orphan girls', 3(P 'il> WX V^]\ .l'^
,l<iaii si' t'sih,
f'tivhlug together as if with glue and^xiint\%Yi /K V-d. ^^ .fan .hii full k'ii-,
turning bachcards and forwards; ^f /|^ ,^1 ij'j^ p'in^ jslienp: sih k-i',
'fl' ~^ 'i^^ ~^
holding their breath from spteahing', -^
J 13" 'fl^ fip" 'k'iau .yen .liwa 'ii,
'f'li
'
Vi /iX l;-v-:^"^'in{^ .t'sing fang' sr', giving loose to the feelings; ^ "y^
hl}l )t} 'sheng cMiih 'kien ynng*, to be cconomieal in food and expenditure.
In tlie first of these examples, the order of the two verhs is inverted, y^^ TT*
nJi: fll ynng .tsung van' 'tsu, to bring honour on one's ancestors; "i^ H^-
/i»!f |i|li,t'sien ,ehen yyiin'k'ioh, perfecflg trite and arcuraf'-^^\\: ^^ ^%x |_|
.c'heng ,san t.san' si', to praise on various accounts; JJjll^ f'll. 1^ "^ 'hicu
'tsu .yang .ming, to glorify anrrsfors and sjmi^ad one's fame.
tives. ]7C :Jj: Mj yih pMh cMiih 'ma, a bay horsr ; ^^ 'Pm
yih .c'heng su* kian* (ch), a plain sedan chair: Jyj
~/\. :VlJ. irt }''*
.fan ta- tau' 'Ii, a great doctrine or argument ['tt' 'jK t|J |-I 'han yih
.chang Ii* 'k'lMi, a very sharp moM//i (cutting in speech). lint where a num-
ruined temple;
— ' tK' Ji W X^^^ j^^^''^ ^^' •^•''•'^"- ''' .?"^^*'
l'"^'"'
/""'•-/>''/?; ?J|i
]7L >;ji jitrj na- p'ili c-hili "lua, that red horse; jx] J j /{a, /]"* ) j j j'
shell 'liau yih k"\vai' 'siiui shili p-ieu', he picked up a siiudl stone.
14 Auxiliary particles and other words are inserted )>ut\veen a verb and
its object. J J 7i2 J ^p J 'ta .wan 'liau IviCdi 't.si. //^/s/hv/ tijing this
hnot; ^^ '
%^ 'fifp yaiit,' yih "yang .shen, tu refresh one's spirits alif fie;
^VS J :?H JxS ta t'so' 'liau swan' .ji'an, /te Aas calcuhded wrong on the
abacus.
15 Au.xiliary and other words occur between a verb and its auxiliarici;.
S^ T iJ-i i 'P'^-iii 'li^^^i ^-'li^il^ l^-'iiS ^'c loalkrd Old; f^ fl^ ^^#
^^ jhwang .mang lib 'k'i ,shen .lai, hastily he raised himself up; [li,| Ijl^v
»•
^ i^ TN -hwei 'chwen 'ma .t-eu .lai, lie turned the horse's head round ;
M-\ -j^
^^ J}^ "siang "k-ikieu- sh'r' .lai, hv begon to fhinh of old things:
.
I'4I
-t 5® 5tv 'pai shang' 'tsieu .lai, set on luine; il'i) \]^ ^ ji). -^
V 7/|x ii< J I" 5r5 ii''^' lei' (ui) ,keng s'i' 'tseu ,chu yih .pan 'kwen
'liau Ilia' .lai, tJiose tears yet more like moving pearls rolled down.
cipal verb. ^^ y^ y]\ ^Ij^ring ta' jiuli c'liuh, / do not hear ivell.
to receive a word expressing the object, the division takes place before k'an-
and 'k'o. J J ]\ jjJi ^ 'ta 'ta ,t'a k'an', strike him and sec.
rnAPTER 6. ON' SIMPLE PROPOSITION'S. 237
CHAPTEli VI.
Ox SiMI'I.K PUOPOSITIOKS.
anil ]»r('ilicate \^^ .]>in, guest). Tiic sulycot jnocedos, ^'^3j tJ^ .c'liau .lai,
an adjective or verb, x<, Li T'J ^^ .c'lianf^ .man li' hai', the long-haired
men are form idahle ; /J'j ^^ |LL| vj4 .p'eng 'yen .liwei .lai, hi
y friend has
returned.
2 Tn till' case of somt' verbs as jLi' \ c"huh, liia', tlie Rnbjcct follows
ihe Verb ;
pll iJlj ~f^ c'iiuli ten' 'tsi, to have the smaIl-2>ox; y |:):J
liia'
'ii, it rains : ^ 'M loh (Ian) .c'luui, ^ 'JC loh 'shni, //<f tide falls; T
^^ Ilia' (s) siueli, it snows. Yet in such examples the noun may also bo
by ellii>sis, supplied.
mai' .jen, he is not a trader; /p] .\ yf\ 7^\^ ^ i»ieh .jen puh ,chi tau'.
others do not knoiv. The omission of the copula before adjectives is as com-
mon as before verbs, -f'^ j^f^ ye' ,shen, the night is far advanced; /\, ^
.jeii ,to, the men are numerous. ,m^
4 A proposition in a still fuller form contains also an object, viz. the
till slii" jhwan hi- .yen ,slmn .wan 'king, those who have money are fond of
wandering among hills and fine scenery.
construed as nouns. 4]^^ [] '(V'J till [I'll/ ]%\ .t'sin t.si' k'iuen' ,t'a ,kwei
pan*, virtue has a gnod reward;]^]] }^, :tQ. "^ y ^ ^\ ]]i^ fl J .k'ai
23S MANHAHIN fiUAMMAC. PAltT 111.
.iigon dio'lnvoi' 'tsi shi" jiuli .noiiu^ tih, to show mcrci/ I hi slime is inipossihlc ;
liiiKs may appear to lie witliout a suliject. 'i:S ^ /V ^[^ |)j| /^ i.-uiii;
yair 'siau ,sin .hien .jen, ifou must I-c carefnJ of lotln-rrs\ JjI/(]^* J
tsicu'
llierc is a double object, one direct and one indirect. -y<: \'\\ |L| ^* -P'^^'
Aw. Xxsyy-x s'm}^, the soldiers all returne d to the eauip; m J\ |'||^ y "f;
jsan .jen .tu hia' 'ma, the three men dismounted from their horses; "y^ |^
fP J jt"a ])ien' p'eli 'slieu, he then clapped his hands; ^tJi Jjf./(] !;(;/-
^tli
— ~h ffi ill "F ^J 5S K' ;t"''i tsieu' 'ii ,t-a rr sliih 'liang yin 'tsY
.wei .p-'an fei"', he then rjave him tiuenty taels of silver fur his travcllintj ex-
penses. The place of the object is after the governing verb, but there an?
Exceptions to this arrangement, itji "tsl -^ -T^ T^P^t-a shi- shr puh ,chi,
.separate clauses, by a})plying qmilifying words and groups to the parts just
/Y 7^ ^5! li^ ilk ^< ?M '«i'^" -t'i Pi^'i' '1^'^i *so' ta' .t'i, a small charge
is then magnified into a great one; ^ J^ /^ ^-fx ud ^ Yyll ^\' shan-
"M~" L-i 'I'hl itlS. J y'li ,t"sien .nien 'i .king kwo" 'liau. a thousand years
have already passed ; ^Q. 1|»'| /V /E I'VA c^^"
^^" j*^^^ ^^^^' tbeh(tsei), this
(.HAITKK it. KXTKXSIOX OK TIIK S11WK( T. 231)
attriliiitc iM'lonjjJTi;; tn it. with <ir withmu tlic conncctiiu' j»aitiil<' [|^ tiii
li 'ii I'l'j \t J^^ALW 'it U \\'i k-1, .kia .ih fal, ^,„- sl,V- .nan
.k'waii .snnp; till, tin' hnr of the state is hard to rc/ao: ; \\'i] \,C ]\ ^^ .ya
pi\i ]ni\\ An'i. thr i/nmcn pnf ice did not i'owf'jK^ \'v^ \j,] ^(J J
ku Am
kai' 'hau "liati. thr drum tower is rompletcd; ^\^ j^ l\J /^ ^[^ /}^ \[]^
iij l"'li .jii'-n till .jell .sill slir tliiU till, the men of the north an straitjht-
11 Adverbs of time and j)lace are iiiefixod to a .substantive, -in the same
manner a.s attributive substantive.^, with or without H^tih. ^ij, jj^ /\^ ,^\^,
J4- ^'hc'' Mi .jell .rhung hcu', the wen here are honest and liberal ; ^}\^ |JlJ
llj /j ^t; 5(i* .t'sung .t^sieu tih jl'ang lah liau, ///' method fornorlij iisfd
if good.
substantive with cr witliout thj tih, to form the subject. §1 f[|- /^ .jp^ uh
li .jen ,to, the people in the house are many.
13 A ntlexive ])ionoun often follows a noun or pronoun in the sense o(self,
Ilii S lL ^S i![i f^ :t-a tsi' 'ki puh -siang ts..- .kwau, he himself
does not desire to become a mandarin ; ^X pJ ^^ ^il '^^'^^ ^^''* '>' "
the people heard it; flii {Y} ffe }f^ }'U A U\ i\L f ^'»' ^^ '^" '^••'
per
i' .jen mau* fan- 'liau. his tiger pride has been rniUly injured hy some one.
Iti
l( A verb with its objective case may form ft subject. |W X) I'lU ^I'll
Ilia' si"' hcii' tih 'Hang ko" 'lau .jrn ,tu k'xv 'Wan, the two old nun who wait
is (/one.
of a substantive with its adjective, ig, t^ /)£ '\\H Jj. clie' k'wai' slir 'kia
cate, or tlie substantive may constitute a subject, and tlic number jmkI jtar-
tiele a luedicate with "f^' 'yen, to he; ]^ ^ /Jb — bjIJ J"^ if^f?
E?.
.Yuen .lai shi' yih fu' ti' 'li .t'u, it was a map ; -j(Ia JjJ ^— ^
"I
che' .fang uh ri' shi- ,kien, this house has ticcniy rooms ; y r /^
ys^ ^* ,tu shi" yih .c'hang ta' meng', it was all a long dream.
^ 20 Another substantive exjiressing some specialitv or attribute mny be
/H /\^ Jji the' yang' ,hiung ngoh puh shi' ,t'ien 'li, this violence does not
substantive. ^^^H %^
;/ SJC 'wo 'yen 'wo tih .yum ku', / have
my reasons; ittl ^ ^"^
^^ Wj 1t'i 1^ 't'si shi- yih kung' tih kia'
.ngai 'tsi 'tau 'ye ,i)iau chr, that idiot is indeed pretty; ^jii u'^ r>j Pik ^ I
1^ QK )t'a tih ,shen 't'i 'leng teh 'hen, his body is very cold.
23 Adjectives also take the verbal auxiliary TcB 7^ 'k'i .lai, as verbs do
CIIArrKR ('). F.XTKNSION OF THE* PRKDICATE. 241
wcathtr
qimlify tuljectiws. /v^ ^'^ i"^ ^^ ,tM<'u k'i' 'leng
faytr did not dure ajtjiroacli; "({ii ij(/(^ tu ^M ~}j ,t'a tsicii' c'liuh k'u-
,k-ai .tiiMi;, he then loent out to write a per script ion) jjijl JjX |{ll [U.] |'^|
tsieir faiii;' ,t'a .liwei kwoh, he then let him go back it> his country.
25 The i»retlicate may consist of a verb and its object, and further the ob-
ject may be double, viz. direct and indirect. The direct object is nsuall\
next to the verb. yil y]\ ^P iji- .^'^ ,t'a puh ,ehi shi' wu'. he does not
know business; V^ \\ (]^ jsV iH ^* mai full tih .pin<; .hwei .yinj,', the
soldiers in andmsh returned to the camp; y^ .^\ 1^ ;^] ,t*a jiuh hwei' i-,
'ER ^'>' ^^'"^i" '^''^ j*'*^ }'^' ^"'^S his father gave him a beating; ^ 'fjf
xfL itli iJli 'Xa Mt Ji^vang ti* sun^:^' ,t'a .lung funi^'' .k'i, the emperor pre-
sented him a dragon and phoenix banner. *
2G A substantivt! with a jtre])osition or postjmsition, jaeceding another
substantive may form a predicate. a§.^fe ^C |{]j UJ 1;^ P| ehe' shr
,kia li tih 'pan })ei', this is a thing of value belonging to the family.
predicate. ^£4 Ij^'i ii.L l# TI'j V .kung tinr kai' teh jtsing 'k-iau, the
'ni .nu'i 'you .t'siuen .jan .wen sih, you have not yet learnt it perfectly;
W^ '(§ A M't 95 §S n^J [1^ T na' fu' .jenrhan' 'king king tih kwri-
"p p/f ^W wo 'i ,king kau' su' kwo', / have already informed him; -tTi
242 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. TART 111.
^J^ 'Jjc. l" 77 5n clie' ,wa ,wa sliili ,fen .luing i>ch, this child un-
bines with a verb to form a jircdicate. The noun may liave a preposition or
k'u', they loent out by the back door; itli l|"| /h J}j f^ ^ W\ •^'•^ "it'ii
'siau .fang 'li ,ngan hieh, they ivent to rest in the smn^l room; 'Jp /V
'pE r'M I ~1^ y^^^ ^^^' j^" ^^^^^ )*cng Ilia- tso', a man sat beside a lamp;
l^j ^ y^
^|r.j yiuig' 'sheu 'chi ,t'a, with his hands he pointed at hiyn; j{li
\^ IMj -^ /^ 5^*''^ jy"^ '^'^^ P^^^^ •^^'' '^^' ^^" account of this did not conic.
30 Tlie noun with its adjunct follows when the order of time requires it.
'y ^'Ijij JjX r /p T^ .na 't'ung fang' hia' 'tsing .chung, he took a bucket
and let it doivn into the iveU ; ^^ ^\j ^ W] 'tseu tau' 'ma .t'sicn, he
attach9d to it. M % ^^ Iw iff ffi \^] ^'na' chih 'siau .c'hwen chih
'ti .hu nf^an', that small boat came direct to the shore of the lake; j]y
|I^ J^'^Jy^ ISI ^t)| PT na' yih tui' ,ping 'hau ,sheng lar'sheu
.c'heng .men, that co^npany of soldiers kept good guard at the city gate;y^
^ t4 Ylk 16 ~ t]$ I?i3 tR ^,t'a soh siug'kih 'k'i yih ,k'iang men'
k'i' .lai, he quickly began to feel a bosom full of grief; /C ^ Fft 1pl 1i
4 — 11 BS ^' ife '1^1 W P^ fti' ,t'si 'liang ko' chu' tsai' yih 'ting
p'o' .nieu .p'i chang' .fang nui', the husband and wife lived in a torn cow-
skin tent.
tsiug' 'liau, the night is quiet) ^ )J^ {jl g %^T.' f^i^i '};e tang' .wan
'Mi Hliytliiiius tlirows niany atljirtiws, tulvfrbs, and coiijuuctions before tlic
(v)|)ula, cwn wluMi it is simply connective, and luis no sigiiiluance of its own.
as in ^ /4i "
l|»''l yeu' sl»\- yili ko', that is another; lillf. /k M&
tsii'u' shi- clu'- yang', // /*• n/ M/6- ftv/y ; ^Li^ ]^ ;^ )l'j f|J ,,Mn tsui- slii-
invuh till, th". heart is very variable. Hence it becomes i)ro]ier in Chin'-sc
l)uli stands alone ;iQ A. ^^^ l> W che' .jen ].uh (soh ,sheng, the man.
did not speak. »Shi* is omitted in any case where the rhythnius would be
improved without the sense ])eing injur^'d. .Mei and .niei 'yeu are both used
l>efore verbs; jp] ^'S<, i^i^ ^ TtL ® yili ko' .t'sien .mei k'an' kien-
dearly ; Jc /E "ic ^ %.W^ clieng' shi- yau* lui' ,t^sin .jen, this must
involve relatives; f{}i f|U J Hi ^ di M jt'a ,tMijg 'liau ping' null
jsheng k*i*, tvhcn he heard it he certainly ivas not angrii' 4q 4»* jj^
^ ^' iU A^ chc' yang^ yih ting' sbr yau' sheh '])en, in this way you
must lose money; fcl /Kt /E 1 [|l ^ -^ f ^^'' jan shi- ,t*rt .na k'u-
'U&n, of course it is he that has taken it away; xl"^ /J£ ^5 h ^5^ 'pen
shr yau' shang' ,king, he orirjinally wished to rjo to the capital;^ /[^ ^
Uf /^ ting' jan shr hau .Jen, he is certainly a good man. |]^ -
{\ N^/
tsung pull c'hih, he would not eat on any account.
37 In the same umnner conjunctions are tliruwn beioro tlio eopnla. jl'IJ .^f^
.© Jisl I-Li I I
'^'^^^
P"^* yuen' i' chuh .men, hut he in uuwiUiii<i to 70 out.
38 The ]>runouns tliat mark tlie plural precede the copula. |yJ ^<. I'jP ^
'Iha ^ HV li''^iVi^ -l^''^ jtu slip tso' ,kwan tih, loth the famiJ'us hove mem-
he, s who are mandarins ; %% iif ^ lilt Jh rh '}"» ^l''l» t'siuen .wu
t'su' pan', their food and drink they were entire!ij wifhrntt nnanfi 0/ pro-
fhere was some one who had gone in hetimes to tell him; ^p" ^ ^ ^Q
to 'yeu mau' fan', 7 have (jreathj insxdted you.
40 Adverbs precede not merely ^>(J^ shi', the common substantive verb but
also copulas. \% 77 W >% .S ^'^ li"o' 'y^^ i' >si, he has other 3)lans;
QK. -^ !^ / 'J
'^""'^
r^^'^ slieu' yung', he was very ill-satisfied; •^{fi ^|
^ ^ ^ Jl J^ IK: gi j'i 5^ ,t'a .men .hau .wu tau' 'li chih ,ti
.t'eu tsoh hwoh, they xoere left with nothing to say, and could hut hend down
their heads and work] "^ /£ PJ -^ shen' shi"' 'k'o 'hi, it is greatly to he
rejoiced in.
41 Many verbs not having a full predicate sense, may be taken as littlf
more than an extension of the copula or substitutes for it. ^(Q. /v -T^ ^T
^j" '\ che' .jen puh kiau' 'hau .jen, this man is not to he considered good:
/j\ .^ Jx^ If^ puh swan'"'wo tih, it is not to he considered mine. The
verb iflx tso', is used before relative nouns, professions, etc. ^x| y\\ ipi'^i*
tM V
''^^
P^^ ^^^^ 'kwan chang' tih, I am not a Icccper of accounts.
42 The negative/f\ i)uh, when taking as its opposite 'jif teh, to ohtoin,
T^ 1^f lui \M P^ >f"nj? piili tt'l^ ,^''^ tso' jkwan, he should not he ap-
pointed to office; -tri /^ ^J^ %f
fx \Y^ che' shi' 'shau })uli teh tih, this
is i,,d!spc«lob!.;B M lYj J^ i -
M ffl M 11= * iii ?it
»'' B"-
tih .hai 'tsi 'na 'li tso* teh .Ini .hwang ti', a child offour years, hoiv can he
43 Tlic nl.jfct is I'lvqiit'iitly taken frnm its position, ul'ter tlic verb, and
j.laci'd bctbiv tlio cupuUi. When in sntli cnsos tho snbjcft is oniitt.d l»v
ellipsis, the object seems to take its j.lacc [^|^j jj£ 'J' ')\\l ^>, Jfj^ '^fj
'Uan<; cbili 'sluii k'ii.b pnli lain tnng' he docs nut dare move his two hands'
^ry pp 4 3^ fix. 7L >'•» J^"'"' Ji^^«^' •""» sbwoh .wan, he had notjinishrd
owe sentence.
lixes and sutlixes. Pa" j:j{^ is a common affix to commands, but tliev are
still more Ireiiuently witliout any ]>:irticu]ar si<;n. ^| r_^ 1^^ fjtlt^^i' ki"
c'lnh inv, eat it i/onrself fhut; "Jxi. t-l" IjJ' fiX IJl! '^vo t'i" 'nishwoh pa', ht
mesjjeaJcfor yon:]/^^ \\ J j^ [{li :)t2 *^J pi'f 'ni .men ,t'ing ,t'a die' tinu-
liwa'', listen yon to his ivicked words; \f\\ "pi ji/j> {{li 'ni kair sii' ,t'a, do
you tell him.
4') Tlie interrogative pronouns take tlie same ]»laee In a .sentence, afi tlie
personal pronouns as subject or object. p|t y]\ p,(^ jij: f,|r: .sliui j>ub jeir
tell ,sbui, who (in a vHhaje) does not know every one clsc'^ y^] ^[I ,^. iflJ-J
-^ n J lV7j JitJ ju 'j<'n nai* ,8ie till ,kau, how is it not hettei- to he a little
forbearing?
46 The interrogative' adverbs ])re(i(l(' the substantive or other verbs lik<'
JIl I Iv ItL,' i \] ^^^^ J»'"' 't.sen ,siau, how shall this hatred be removed f \)\
^^ /U ?lil ^IJ" i\'i M f if l^-^'k-i I'lih shi' tsiueh 'hau tih ,tnng suh 'm..
times they are the only mark of a question. ([^ Jjy (• j. '', [jjtsai* 'na'ii .ni.
CUAFTER VIL
SrnoRDiNATE Sentences.
pull 'ya .mang yung' hwa' 'kiai k'iuen'j hearing them use i-^idc longuagc, he
mentality and mode. They usually precede the }»rinci})al clause. '0^ illl
^ M IS _il PtU -IM. fill i^ ^ tsai^ ,t'a 'mu .t'sin mien- sliang- .jau
]:wo' ,t'a chc' t'si', for the salce of his mother forgive him this time ; |a|
llll y^y ni xl) •yi'^ j^i^ng (feng) 'hau "tsau tau', hecanse the wind was
fair they arrived early; ^ )j^^ ^ 5n T^ ^ '^'hai- ,sau 'k'i .lai j.nli
'k'eng ('k'en) .lai, beginning to feel ashamed, he would not come ; 'j|ji f^
jmi '^A vf5 J jt'a pei' jfung ,c'hui ping' 'liau. he was attacked hy illness
yih 'tsau 'ta fah 'siau ,si .men kMi', the next day as soon as it was light she
4 Subordinate clauses expressive of time and jdace, also precede the prin-
.bhi' 'wo .liwan 'siau, when the old lady left the world I was still young;
-fjj;
rifpnsa, n>nl in the frouhh's of the date we sec the JoyaHy 0/ the/aifh/ul and
the upnrjhf. ][• |)Vj nk ^-i' P- ^iL A 5|sL cheng' ,8hang i' choh chil.
kicu" .jon .\ii\,just while they were deliberotim/ they saw a man come.
J Many Miboniinat*' circumstantial clauses are introduced by verbs, and
precetlc the jirincipal clause. These are our participial clauses, and arepn--
sent or past in time. Amon;j^ verbs in the present, I'orm.s correspondinj]^ to
our j;erunds are included. 'r|:| JA^- y\\ IjX p'a' .t-'sien puh ken', ^ yzi^
1^,* — .
[3^ .to sung' "ni ri" i)ch, /caring that the mOH>:y will he insuJiciaU,
.p'ing .shi tsieu* 'k*'o i, wait till a time 0/ peaec and you may ; /JT 3:'J
^^
'J 'jC if\ yC 'kan tau* pah yueh '.shui 'ting ta*, passiny on to the eighth
his soldiers; J|)^ f f{ii \^- j^ MS k'i" 'li'^'i ^^'' ^sai' ttioh tau' 'li.
into one four-word group. /J y {-{j /V ,tau liia' .lieu .jen, let the be-
heading of that man be delayed; ff y\. ^ ^[^ Uii' .jen .wu ,sin, in trea-
ting others he is neglectful; f^i'- %\^ ^'\^ ^iai- .liang .t'sai .lai, he is just
-f'^t
tau* tuh .shu jen* tsr ,t'a pub .neng keu' tih, as to study and reading h^
248 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. PART III.
1) The olijcct often takes an instrumental verb before it, and thus liTuis
a subordinate intrcnluctory elause. ^[_j va^ ^vIJ '])a .feu yih t-i', he
"~^
"liau kwd' .lai 'liau, i(dii/irf h ispropcrf)/ hr IrougJit it orcr here: -jl^ ^^
fe HO ^ ^T "li 'pa ,t-siang yili "e'hi .t'sien .hii 'ta cliang-, takinr/ the
y'lh 'ch'i fihwoh, 7cith his Jinr/er he 'pointed and said; 71 v li}l'
' '
llit Iti^
^13 lul ,tsiang .c'inveu yih 'i)ai ,k<'U choh ,t'a, tcdcimj the boat he sculled it
and folloiced.
10 The ol>j(^ct also stands before its V(^rb "without an introductory verb.
% Y^i fl^ IM t''Jc M llV Wil )" A .fung .yau tih shu' ,chi .ri t'so-
jen' 'liau .jen, branches tvaving in the wind, he onistoolc for men; \vX \!t^
\\^ 5'£ 7" 'f{!i ^. -T^ lii P'^' i"^'ii' ^i'l ^"'i^ 'tsi ,t'a ,sheng puli c'huh,
Ilelativc Clauses.
in use, and lu our ])articiple taken as an adjective in form, "tji fHl "^ p}|L
those tvho bring false charges are very nuuierous ; \>\\ 1%: pj^ Ijl. ^f< /f\
\ 'ni ku"' tih ,c'he clnvang' pub hia-', the carriage ivhich you have hired
t'.'ill not hold if. The whole subordinate clause may also in such sentences
he taken as tlio logical subject, in distinction form the grammatical subject,
whicli consists of the substantive only.
'ki kieii' shi' ,tu koh tmx'v 'wo .slieii similar-, hoiarer inanij thi/ujs there U
tltvy arc all jrut upon me; ^ ifpj ^ I'd n^'[-
({jj ^puli .kii pIiY' Mxxii
k'uur' ,t'i\ k'ii', whoever it be tell him to go; ]'^. f^I H^ ^ vM hl!i /J-
nfl: I'^'n '" sliwuhshr .sliul tsieu' ehV* .sliui, whoever you say it is, then
it is he.
13 A lelativo chiuse is sometimes placed after the principal propositioTi.
^^ n?£ 1^ Itli ;25 M^ M ^E IHih "hiau teh ,t*a 'tsen 'mo yang' 'si, J
do not know in what way he dieil.
Final Clauses.
14 Clauses expre.ssim? the object of an act usually follow the sentence that
contains the act. fS ^ f^ -f^ ^^ ^fi 'U\ fnh .lial 'tsi e'hii- jitrnu
hieh, she sent away the children to rest; ^X ^}^ -HF* 1^ tT TS rf'j fl
?tJ ^ lt!i"\^'t> 'shau puh teh 'ta 'k'i ,tsing .shen .lai tah ,t'a, I must rottsc
,c*h\vang wai' ,t'eu k'au', secretly he loalked to the outside of the window to
look furtively in; M'}" ftii UJ 5K fp) IrJj kiau- ,t'a c'huh lai wen' won',
he called him out to ask him ; ^ \l\
lU. -^ j^fij ^ 'mei jili kwo' kii'
't'sinir ,ngan. every day they went over to ask hoio he ivas ;
'
'J jjv^ -Yk T^P
(T \\d *|E 1|H 'k'o 'i pau' ,chi 'hau tso' 'chiin pei', ?/o« can announce it so
.ining pan- che' shi' .t'sing yau' ,t'a suh k'ien .tsiang .kwan .k'in .na, they
reportrd this affair to him (hat he might send officers to capture them; ]^[^
IMj fill W fui ""^ ^ tsieu' ma' ,t'a yau' ,t'a Jen' tsui', he then repro-
ached him to make him confess he icas tn'ong : i\']^ -^ pX y] '-£/^ |{il
j^ tsungyau* shwoh .ming kiau' ,t'a "tiuig, you must speak plainly that
he may understand /y ; .{j /y /L> jy, 1^ j\. J/^ 'siau ,8in 'siau .sin i
mien' 'ho ,taai, takf. care, take care, that it may not catch fire.
1(^ The final that being not seldom unexpressed, rhythmus often draws the
two verba expressing the action, and the object into one clause. lli| '^
250 MANDAIdN GRAMMAR. PART III.
\^^l \l^ .hwei k'ii' (c-hii-) c'liih fan*, he is (/one home to dine; }y^ vC J^
JK. /^» 'fij' ^C "^- 'i 'h<^ 3^^^i»S ^10 'i lull jkung tub, tahejire to combat
fire, take jjoison to conquer poison.
to write; -^ j'^ ^' ^ .na .t'sien k'ii' 'mai, talx the money to hinj it.
Explanatory Clauses.
leen, thought, or wished for, follows that which contains the action. ^ /<l'
'^ BtS i^t P7a tsi" .chi ]iuh .neng 't'au .iau, he himself hneic that he could
??oi rtsA; ^o he forgiven; y\\ \u\:± |^ /t;, yQ "j* puli Jen' teh sli?' .ri 'tsi,
/ie f/icZ not Jmow him to he his son; ^ P^- ^;J» i£ ^ 10 In Itll "S"
J 'wo kiau' 'ni sung' die' ko' kill ,t'a k'ii' 'liau, / require that you should
talce this and p)rcsentittohim; 'J/p ^ ^^ /I::, jgl ZL 'ni ,tang 'wo shi*
p'a' pull tell .hien, I fear that I shall not have leisure.
A -^ ^P
'^ 1/1^ '3© /',t'icn kwo' yih 'liang ko' ,jen 'ni 'tsau ,elii
rm ^^
tiur
"liau, <^a^ o?ie or two more men had heen added you already knetc: ^M ^^
fl^^ ^ ^^ ffl /(J* Btl 1^'mai mai' tih shi' .t'sing pub liau wo
pub 'hiau teh, that trade is in a had condition I do not know : \% ^^J >£
HT iy yR A — ^ bS W ^ ft >fr _h woi 'yeu 'li k'o 'i f,.!,
.jcn yih kii' hwa' yau' fang' tsai' ,sin shang', you must keep in mind the
Comparing Clauses.
of tho principiil proposition. l{!i JL Hf^ fe ^X" l|'| TT iift Hh' ;t-'ii >i
puh toll 'wo .men hwei* slnvoli liwji', he cannot compdic with us in abih'f'/
.t'sicn li* hai', M/s ;7/;;r.s\<? As- won* sct'ov ///a;? before; j'L xt >^l Pi! |,c;j
4- ^* jfll >K ^^T" ^ 'i'i <^=i'' 1'^^ '1' >'"*"' ^«""' •^'" "tiiu 'ti I'iiu .sie, it in
really better than sitting gJoomibj in th^, house; JL Ilii f J- yv o[^ yu V'
.t'a teh .jon ,sin .ri, she obtained ynen's good opinion more than he did: itl
I'l Ml ft^ n5 K lli ILI-I ^^'I'i 'mn ,t'sin till hwa' 'f.m .nan .l.uvi tal..
21 When the compared objects arc in a fixed ratio to each other, so that
they increase ami decrease together, the adverbs ti^ yiioh and l^ 'ii, ar-
used in both clauses. iJl 'l\!: ^ jf i^ ^^ ^' y^C .c'hcu hen' yuch
jshen fen' nu' yueh ta', the deeper the enniit}/, the greater was his anger.
22 For the negative ^^ j'L puh ^ ^P '])i i)uh .jii aud Jx 'W-"^^'^ }'"
are employed. |/]> ^\ 3(P i^ ^^ ^ ^{y 'ni puh .ju ye- ])an' k'ii' 'hau.
it would he letter that you should go at midnight. Jx W :Ui 'M l^U I'l'"
siang*, is ]ilaced before the predicate of the principal proposition, ^i^ ijf/J[]
('i; .^:'J r 7\. ^ l^-II 11^ — I'l'wo tsieu' siang- tau' 'liau.tMen .t'an-
li tih yih yang', / /'eel as if I had gone up to heaven; ^j '({li /^ yy^ UJ
A j@ j(P X 'T> H^ ii] @~ /i^ kien' ,t^a .t'sau tsih tih .jen y. u
.ju ,hiung ti' tih k'wen' 'k*u yih ,pan, he regards those maimed jjersons ns
if they were brothers.
24 Sometimes the predicate precedes the comparing elause, and form*
with it one sentence usually of three words. ^7^ 3^11 Jj^.slieu .ju Imi, derj)
"V the sen: j[^ ^^ t^P ^^^,siu ,kien .ju tMeh, his heart isjirm as iron;^
/it^ 3^P ill rDgau .jan .ju 'tu, tranquil as a wall.
•2r)2 MANIJAIUN' GUAMMAP.. PAnT III.
2;") Mtiny conditional clauses are without the appropriate particles. Thcv
precede the principal clause, g §it 0^ '\i\t ^^ nX WL 9u tsi' tsiu'
till ming' ngan' ting' slnvoh 'ngeu 'si, if any one has pnt an end to hi/nsvff'.
lie is f-ure to say thai he has been beaten to death; -pf- ^4^
— ' ||n) /\. Yfyi
linl ^^f^^iii' ,.t'ien yih ko" .jen jeli nau' ,8ie, if another mail be added, it will
vih .liu 'tsit'U, if yon speak acjain you must forfeit a -pot of wine ^j(| JJ
|{!i
— T ' till dL iT ^ic
— * T 'wo 'ta A-A yih hia' ,t'a
;
2G Some verbs are used to give to a clause a conditional force. -^^ /li
^l M t'i Ik hiJi IL M^ Irt T yau-' sh-r 'wo ,kia che- yang-' 'xvo
tsieu' lih k'eh tso' .c'hwen 'liau, if my Jiouse loere liJce this. I would at once
f/o a boating.
f P)b 5'fX i /)C Wi jt'ien han' 'liau .ni tsieu' k'li' (c'hii) .k'ieu 'u, if
there is drought, they then go to pray for o-ain; y]\ ^ (jjx )§ JL tul
Jc ^^ pull 'k'eng full 'ma ,pa ,t'a cheng' iah, if he does 7wt submit, he
:i^ W /U ^ ^»> Iaj ipjt a liwoli yih .shi fung' choh .hiung pih .jaii
hwa' tso' kill, if any time you meet evil it ivill turn to good; :Q" ^B ™.iVi
T fill i;l^ ^W\- ^\X ^ job shi' ,shu 'liau ,t'a k'ioh yih .ban
-4--I- -=^1* ^-i?^
shi' 'ye .mei 'yen. if he is defeated, he suffers nothing at all; i^ Ji£ :(g
'h '^m 1^^ {{L Il^^C
'^*
tij' T joli Inva' die' ta' i'lih tih 'ye tsieu' 'k-o
pal clause takes ftlj 'tau, yet, however. — J?^ ^^ jf'l iS" fli- yih
.t'si tsin' k'ii' (t'sii) 'tau 'sheng shi', if they go in together it will save trouble. m
30 In the preceding examples the conditional clause is a case supposed. I
'M The comlitionnl clause is sonietiiues placed in the niidcUe of the princi-
l>al clause. # iS i^t ^5 vfr 'fJH tj^ 'jij i.m ,t^siu ,sui ping' ,Bin
11 IvMoli ining peh. 7ny mother although ill ivas in mind quite char\y^ ii[K
fft ^ :^ ^ di '"^
^ :ilii y^ >t'ii «"! jini P"li -l»i' 'wo 'ye 'yeu,sic
monry thre is no place to Innj it: |f| /£ H ^< (]-J S ^J[-%:k til
'tiea jk'wun ta' ye puh .neng keu' chiau' shah .jen tih puh .c'hang niing',
although the state bestoics its favour abundantly, it cannot let the nnirderer
Superadded Clauses.
proposition curtailed of its subjt'ct. Such are the ])hrases ^ 3l-^^'t^i 'chu,
flfi M. {-l ''k i^ Il5 J"l!i !^ it ^ .c'hwen yu' ,cho 'shui 't'sion tih
fi* ,fang 'hn ,to, the boats meet luith shalloiv places in great numbers: 'f/<
)"J ••!/ iTt ji hn .wei kiai' (chie'), taking the river as the boundary.
34 There are several short and imperf»'ct sentences, used to conclude the
sense of the principal proposition, or to interrogate, or to qualify adjective and
verb predicates. They may on account of the weakness of their own signi-
.tung .men wai" la' .cMiiau ,si 'slieii pien' .slii', it is outside the cast r/ate
on the west of the great hridrje] JK ^ ^^< ||li ]\y[j /H J cliih 'kwan ,i
,t'a tsieii' slii' 'liau, she only thinks of doing as he wishes that is all.
i- 'Hang ko' tsi* tsui' shi' yau' 'kin till, benevolence and iMegrity, these two
things arc all-imj-^ortant; ^]c fl^ ^^ #' ffi fl I'^l^' '^t T'^KoHl.
fu' 'mu 'liang ko' ,tu 's'l 'liau, mg imrents arc both dead.
37 Yih one, with |S] .t'ung together, ]\% 7Q k-'wai- ,ri,^{'.t\si, etc.
fjJ^ j^d 1^ l^'l: ^.ho ,hiung M ti' yih k-wai" ai (c'hi') hiang- 'li mien-
38 After verbs of motion and nouns of place, adverbs, such as Jiy )'[['
na- "li, there, are commonly used. ^(J ilji \\ \ l]y \^±^ ~S^ \\a\ tau' ,t'a
.men na' 'li kMr' wen"^, go tojhem and ask; ^Xt ill JJr f'x ^U '^g"^ -^i^^'''
ua' 'li 'ycu, with ws there are some; y\^ \a ^. iHii ~£ ^<. :(fl :^* .'^v
't'si jih 'tseu kwo' 'lau jkia che' jpien .hii, the next day he came home here.
'liau "ni ,kia ,t-ien hia- tsieu- nuih 'yen "liau .nun .jeu puh .c-heng, is it so
k'ii' puh .c'heng, are you not then content, but wish to see him die and
then go'i
is very sod. liikencss is expressed by adding ]}\ [rJv ^^^ ^'^''' ''^ '"*''
''^'^^; ^^ '•«
k'an' choh .wu 'li sV tih, do not cause others to notice that you seem destitute
CUAl'TEU 8. COORUIKATE SKNTKXCKS. . 25
ZOO
of reason ;i)C ^\- /^ ||Ji. [IJ.mfi .shi' ,jcii sr tih, like a man with uothhuj
to do. {11 lly. ye sr' is also (•mi)loyed, us^ (ji \U M 'vc kT, Ukcflyinq.
' '
7iU yi'' j1'=^'i- " '
y>k y'l» yii^K', -- IrJ yili .t-ung, are u.sed in nearly
the same rnannor;^IJ jX. "e/: ^\j^ .ho fir "mu yili ,i)an, like, a father
and mother.
42 Many phrases toriuetl of a verh or adjective, ami a negative particle, ar<^
u.sed ns intensitive particles. K \V\\ ^\ iiu! 'kan sit- piih tsin*', he is incx-
haitstihly thank/aJ \ ^''V\ VWK ^~^ Lj jCMieng tsan' puh 'i, /jc praises him
ina'ssanthj; ^ 1|n| fv jHlsiair ko' puh chir he laughed icith out stopp in >/.
CHAFTEll VIII.
COORDIN.VTK SeNTEXCKS.
Under this denomination are included not only sentences conijdete in thcui-
other.
Simple Connection.
sentences connected without a conjunction. J' ' y^M H^] ijij j,||_^ ^'^ |J|^
i^ iw \ )V A'^tT ^fe t;hih jCliT c'hili 'tsieu 'tu .t-'sien .mien ,h\va suh 'lieu
.woi loh, he only considered drinking ivine and gaming, lying a /nong glowers
tih .jen .ho ,t'a shwoh 'li, s> veral aged and upriifht men reasoned with him:
X X Mi m mwjc iyjwj m
ffc ii'j .--.ng fu^ ,hiuug uu
kiau" hiuu- ,t'ing ,t'sin 'yeu tih k'iucn' 'kiai, they listen to the instructions
%
._).-,G
MANDARIN' GRAMMAR. PART III.
(//' fathers and chJer Irothcys. and to the exhortatio7is of relatives and friends:
M ^ ft :S Jl ^ H "fr
on the Jong table and regarded
fi^t\ing' tsai' .t'iau
it
choh sbang' ,tang'ku
as an antique curio-
Hiinw till, he placed it
niilkij way a little indistinct -/i, yfc Iff TU M'j ^ 1Lt §^ ^ T^-^^ang
L*ai' .i .mano- .kung ,slien 'ti .t-'eu .ban sian', Wang, the imperial fihysician
hastily hotved, lent his head doivn and lav.ghed; Idi* HE ffi m& m
^^ WL J
— 1m' /H'l :^'"i pii"*©' -"^'^^ pieb cheng' 'ngeu .jan "kan 'liau
vih 'tien .fung .ban, you have no other ailment, you liavc accidentally caught
nM THI "lii -i^^^ii I'irig' •^^1"'! ;'^^^ ya^' <^^^o^i s^^^^ '^'^^'^'^
'^'^ ^^i^^ shen". 7/o?i
soldiers and peajjle shoidd all be earnest, attentive and diligent ,))l ^J X.
'^: /L -^ J2. :B'
— ' /^ mull 'yeu fu' 'niu .hiung ti' chib ,shen yih
Connective Particles.
t-ai' .ho 'nai 'nai ping' na' ,,8ie 'siau 'tsie .men .lien kob .fang 'li tih .kn
.niang .men ,tu .lai "liau, the old lady with the mistress, and those young
ladies, and also the young ladies in each room, cdl came:-' /jtj /V hi A^
1^ 11 IS Hl'ft fi ^ J$ Jlf iii Pi^'^^ Je" "yeu ,pen shi pub tan'
jCbe .man ping' yau' t'so' cbeb ,t'a, tvhcn others have talent he not only hides
4 The conjunctions tlL 'ye, X^ VL-ir, also, and ji^ .hwiin (.hai) intiu-
.kwun 'til .ying 'lian chnli .lai, he alsoaaiv IhiH hiandarin come uut to escort
him; ^\,vL i^ /'' v® '^^'^^ 've piih ,chi tair, I also do not know; [lii
.c'hwangclmng- ,ta 'Vsi ,shi ycu' tai"linu t'sih })ah ,ft'n till 'tsieu yeu"tscu
fall 'iiiiii pion* tbu' tsai' .c'lnvang shang", he sjtddtnli/ saw a curtained couch;
at this time he was intoxicated seven parts in ten, and had aho walked
himself weary] he at once sat
t.j, (111 —^ down on the couch; /V I'll* -T* V±, l^I vL
'J'/L n^ J j*-'*^ M^ pu^' '^i hwoi' 've tsieu' pa' 'liau, they none of them un-
' 5 Tho conjunctions nH .n, witli _fcL 't'sio, and its compounds also
I'.y^v M( r\'^ C.J.I, -r- _il
coninicnce a new clause. pX. :±|i "^ {^'Jf ||IJ ^^ shwoli i)i]i kau' .tsi .n
c'hii', havinij JinisJied what he had to say, he took leave and locnt away
S^ /^ i}i W ^ :^ flT- S 't'i pull -yi'i '«iau shr .n hai-
ta* shi- *mo, is it not to suffer great loss for the sak.e of a small advantage i
VL i L '^^iji /\. ^ "j^Qjlnvang 't'sie shah .jcn 'die 'si, and still more wlten
t<j kill a man is a cajntal crime; _l1 j|l \u] -^ shang' ,c'lu' .n k'ii', he
ascended his carriage and went away; ]^]^ y^ y/L J:L yC cL Tv I'^L
.fung ta- ,hwang 't'sie ,t'ien seh ,tsiang 'wan, the wind is high and further
it is growing late.
G The cunj unctions (JX ye and J^ y<^u', are repeated at the head of
7 Not only —but even, are ex})ressed hy ^j- 3lUl >^^'' ^^^^j *^"^ some other
compound ailverbs in the first clause, and Jjl/L /^ tsieu' shV, even, etc. in
the second. fC (n ^ jji^ I^ ffll ±L Ijsi J uiC t'^P"l» tan' puh .neng
.c'hang tsin' 't'sie hwai' 'liau shih y»tig', he not only could not steadily ad-
vance, but further his pla7i was broken up ; y]\ iii ..il- izi ^^i /r^ h\^i
258 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. r'ART III.
^ ^^ firf 43;^ /N piih tan- .wii full 'k'o 'c'hu tsieir' ahV .cheng pien' 'k'i
.lai, there teas not only no ivatj of acting, they even began to quarrel.
pull ,cliY, his eyes ivere ojoen to it, hut he professed 7iot to knoio if; /X. H^i
Jul '\'\H ^^^ 'fan shwoh ,t^a .liu .t'u, you however say that he is foolish:
jT- r '
-^ jl^ TK -T* fe iul '^vang Ilia*' yih k-'iin' .ynen .lai pub
shi' ,t'a, he went down and looked hut it was not he; ji'lj yj\ ^P '^ ^^
r. Jt^ 'tau pull .ju .kin .mow sliang' ,king, hut it will he better to go to the
capital this year; -jlij }K W ^S^ '& ^k H^J i^fj' ^ 'tau -fan yair pih
'k'i 'wo till iiiing- .lai, you yet luish to 02)prcss me to death.
and some others, jirecede two sentences which are opposed to each other.
The second sentence may also be without a ])article. BiE Ji^ 3^P ]}\^ ijfi,
w iS H m i$ 11 m. )a m *
1^= :^- ,sui .ju,, ju h'.-,- .mvan
yau' 'kan teh si' ,fang tih .hau kieh w^ang' ,fung .ri .lai, although it is so,
yet it is needful to induce heroes from all jt arts to observe lohat is p)assing
sheu' ,c'ha puh ,to, althoughhe has the name of a man he difers little from
a beast.
hwoh tsi- 'ki .lieu hia', either give it away, or keep it for yourself; ^
niArTEK 8. SHNTF.VCES WITH PI.^JUKfTIVr: r'AKTICLES. 250
^flt iii I?S ^^ III hwoli 'cho k-i' ,t'a hwoli 'cho siair ,t/a, /^c j/;a,s-
eif/icr nnijvii at him or/nu>//itd of him; ^xl vL i)^ W yC t!§. Ill -^^
ijfi," {11 1^ i3 ]Jii' 'H ?T 7k '^vo 'ye muh 'yeu c'hien' kwo' chai' puli
.liwiiii ye pull .tseng je c'hi' 'ta chia', / have neither failed to pay mi/
debts, nor have I done anythinrf to provoke anger and fighting; ^^ y]^
11^* \YJ aW ^n' tiLrfi:
^" tli fl ya.r .sui .c^han^^ tih ,tung ,si
"hau yo pa* 'tai'yo pa', / want common things, whether good or bad, it does
not matter.
know if it is so or not/ fill (^M ?." fti ]J |> ^ '^X P ,t'a 'sing puh
'sincr 'na 'H 'k'o ,chT, lohether he will wake or not, how can wc know? y\\
%M ;.V^ p7 P J 4k ^ l'"li lull heh (,hei) tih peh (.jjai) tih .f'siucn
mien', and some other siniihxr foiTns at the liead of each clause.
'
— [U]
%SL ~ 10 t^ '1'^ UO f'l^ ^ tij 5|i yih mien' .hwoh yih mien' man'
man- tih .shen 'slieu c'huh dai, while she, spoke she sloivly put out her hand;
pei' 'ho yoh yih mien' ngan' tien jen 'ma, on one hand he ptrejyared powder,
and on the other hand secretly collected men and horses.
14 Some — and others, are often expressed Ly jdacing the princijial virb
with tih at tht» beginning of each sentence. ^Q U J ^U ^W UM UJ i_b
J ^ Ih ^ Vi till 'si teh ming' tih .t'au liau ,sie .hwei k'ii', some died
and others. ran away home again; n'll* fl J itlt |p'(-: [I J |(.'J-:
t'iaii' tih t'iair
wu* tih wu', some jumped and others clapped their hands.
1") llln'le — at the same time, are expresscu in various ways, as —
"
' il Ll
V P3
^
nil
""^ II
llU .^
fUb HM
••
vih In* kMih yih lu' ma', wht'le he walked, he used reviliu'/
HIL •"*
words; \Yi :/^ "im* A?^ tai' k'uh tai' ma', while he wept, he uttered re-
proaches.
2G0 MANDARIN GRAMMAR. PART III.
that you had conic and therefore ask for instruction: [a| ||:i| |{li fj^i .yin
Aveir ,t'u shwoh, he therefore asked him ; 1{il ^M >I^ l?3 itB "feV 4^
t'a sien tsin' .king ,yin 't'si .wu shr, licjirst entered the capital and there-
fore it came to nothing.
a sleepless night.
19 Among such verbs are Tp P'^^S ^^ /"^"^'^ ^"^^ JCiit'k'ung, to fear, mean-
shano-' p'a' ,t'a 'yang hwoh puh ta', he cast off" his son into a temple to he a
placed between them, or at the end of the second clause. |B| Jfv J ^ ^
'§' .hwei .lai 'liau })uh .t'seng, has he come back or 7wt? 53c *^Lt -T^ ^L,
& 1^ ® S Wi ~P '^^'*^ Chill puh c'hih 'ii 'ni shen' 'mo ,siang ,kan,
I'hc" kcir .taiii^ 'k'o .jau piili 'k'o .jmi, ca?? ////.v matter he pardontd or not ^
.jt'U .ni .liwan slir ]>iih jnr tcli tili, is he of the same viUaye as yourself or
/*•/»•« .^„„y,-,/ f'1:|T ^'h 7 ^l|! fl \k I"! i'^ %'m ting-si -iia,,
iia" ko' j)*uii" .int'U umli 'yiii. /aav; yoM spiked those gxms or not?
Coiiqjurison.
21 For examph, and such like plirases are ('X])rcsscd byj L yy 'pi ,ian»;,
'M /v '1^ I -T^ HtS ^ r P'J' J" pi"^'' j^ilj ,^i" liiii' piili .ueng kieir
liau, /'ur cxa)iiji(e, tvhen disease has entered the jmrts below the heart, th^re
is no chance of safety.
.t'aiiLT till jkwang king, hr seemed as if he wished for water and hrotli; 3(P
ko' .ho .p'ing shi- kiai', as if a peaceful world had been established; fli; jl^i
tih .j.ing jting, like a soldier who fights for life and death; J j^ iJj 7C* ^
/\. \]j siang- \v kivn- ,t''sin .jen tih, the same as if he had met a relation;
rJ -i'v y^n ~J" tai' ;ping .ju 'ts», he treats the soldiers as if they were his
children.
CHAPTEli IX.
In regard to the lir>st of tliese it may be remarked, that for ek'gance^ words
which can Ix' understood from the circumstances are omitted. ^^^ f^'* pai-
sheu', to visit and bow to amj one on his hlrth-daij;T^ '-^ pai' .iiicn, tn
.shen"- 'sT ti- ,liiung (s), tJiey hoiuvd {to each other and became) sworn bro-
thers for life ; f!)\ yX \l\ S "^ ty 'so 'i ,kwan clii^ 'tsai slang', there-
fore (he rose in) rank till {he became) chief minister; pi ^ kau- 'lau, //c
announced {that he was too) old {for luorlc); pj 'M l^^u' jiingS he an-
iiicu' kin"- .ien .mu vang' {for his) dress he assmncd the aji/)caraiice of a
tau' kwo' k*u' wei' .lai, he knows ^mst and future {things) ; ]^- ZL f\)^
^ tsai' ,san 't'siug tsui', two or three {times) he ashed {pardon for his)
fault.
wei' ling' .lang, how many sojis have 7/ou'^yil XI ^ rSi Wb H^ "tP T3E
-^Y ,t'a pih yau' .meu hien' ling' tsun' sing' ming', he luas resolved on ptlan-
is also common, when the substituted adjectives are not used, nl 7L't'au
.kwang, {I)beg {your) favour; (southern), ijj TLtsie' ,kwang, {may I) bor-
row {this by 7/our) favour; {northern). y^V\\ 'kieu .niang, {I have) long
looked up {to you); ^ S'^i^^^i i"^i^ {IJiave)long desired {to meet you);
^ lijj[ -k'i 'kan, how {can I) dare'^ e^} gSt sie' sie', (/) thaiik {you).
4 When the language in use is not complimentary, the pronouns are also
very fnn]uently omitted. ^ IS ^ puh .t'ing kien', I did not hear it;
sben 'slieu .na 'liau kwo'.lai, having heard it he then tvent, stretched out his
t IIAITKU 10. ANTITIIKSKS. 2Go
haml, and drew it ovir. Hero tlie words if, /n's. and, //, aiv omitted witli-
.") Atlirmatioiis juv ro]>oatod liy mentioning their opposite wifli a ne'^ativc
partiele. /H Hi fl^ T^ p ll'^ fl^ sl,i'_,chen tili puli shi' 'kia till, it
lL.j ^\ ;^ Jf)( hau tso' 'ma 'k'o 'i tso* j)uli 'hau tsu' nia piiii yaii" tso",
C Clauses are repeated, or the idea they convey is repeated ]>y lueans of
synonyms. 7J;X ^ Ul'X i"J -1\ \j]'\ shah puh san- 'ta puh ,k'ai, killin'j
it governs. ^Vl flii U^J f :^ InJ' shah ,fa tih sing' ming^ he killed him.
So also in f lij 7II4 ,-i[li ^^ , siang .fan jf^ung pau', / will trouble you to an-
nounce fo me. .Lai and k'ii* are pleonastic in many verb groups, as i/p /|^
CHAPTER X.
Antithesis.
jchen kia' yan' sliih, the articles mtist he good and the jrr ices true ;
'
1l5l
J^ ^hS 1H a. ^»P yili k"o' .jen c'hang' peli ko- .jcn lio^', one man san<j
heaven has wiexpected clouds and rain, man has unexpected turns of good
shi' 'ni till .jen 'si shi' 'iii tih 'kwei, livinri am I your slave and ivhcn dead
I luill attend you as a ghost; {{L ^ m ^ >(t til ^j* 11' 'ye piili
'hau ,t'ui 'ye ])uli 'liau jen', he could not refuse nor yet say he ivas wiUing:
};lnv;)li shvli 'mo, ichat you have in your heart, utter with your lips; A. ^
T^P ^ -7^ *Mi -J^^^ P^^^^
y^^^^ ''k-wQi pull kioli, men did not hioiu it, demons
'man yueh tsieu' fall slang' .lieu ,sing, the low opened like the full moon,
they ivere his family, and public business as if it was family affairs; 4>C
un animal
jhwen ,sing, his dress he loishes to be elegant,
.lieu, corpses tvere heaped like mountains, and blood flou-ed like rivers.
hia' 'yeu ,su .hang, above is heaven andbeloiv are Sucheu and Hangcheu;
.shi' yih 'pa ,tau, externally he seemed like a mass offire {so loarm was his
\\% IJA /L W -li^t-'i^ jf^-'i >t'i^» ^^'^^i' P'^'^i san' 'kieu ,siau, his soul fed
beyond heaven, and his si^irit to the nine coelestial regions {said affright);
lIlArTKK 11. RHYTIIMUS. 265
# jli S^ ='4
Jllf! 7- ft- m S ^ tt m j'i l.im.' shun'
.Invau jshc'iig liiair sliiiu' 'tsi \\\v nili .Invan ,sheng wu' nih .n\ ^Ae /^Y/ff/
CHArTER XI.
RHYTHMUS.
not ui)ou the caprice of an individual, but on the custom of the language.
omitted in long ones.;^;{ ffli f] J Tx V^ «li'il> jt^a tih sing' ming', kill him
{his life); andPT D. ^iZ ftli'k'o 'i shah ,t'a, he may be jmt to death. The
sentence stops where it does in this last exami)le, because a four-word group
is already complete.
3 The new sentences which the exigencies of each individual lead him to
Yl^ ni .fu 'wo shang' 'ma .hwei .y^"g P'^S nsist mc to mount my horse and
return to the camp. Here the words T. ^J IG»| ^^consisting of two actions
in succession, form a svnniietrical fuur-wunl grouj). Then follow the words
and he then returned to his encampment. Here when the first of the actions
made to the second action. Tlie words 3E '^ form it into a new and
synnuetrical four-word group.
The omission of pronouns, and the fewness of tense particles and connec-
tive conjunctions, very mucli aid the rhythmical construction of sentences.
4 Rhythmus frequently hinds into one four- word sentence two coordinate
c'hli' tsai' 'sing, he fainted aiucnj and revived; ^f^* ^ 'TX. jjIl t'^i' ti'hir'
jSlieu ,kien, he ivas taken aivay and j^^ciccd in prison; J J jjSx "^'ta
tso' yih ,pau, he tied it up into a bundle; JL '»U ^/J 1x 'pa'maleh chu',
he reined uj) his horse; /f\ /^P ^ ^1^ puli .clri puh tsui-', luhat is done
5 Three- word groups are somewhat less common than those of two and
four members. When they occur they usually consist of words in some or-
der of syntax, ffi \'^ ifec'huh \hr\m, a tiger from theforest;i^' ^ Jj^
tsieh kwo^ .lai, he took it.
character of the groups into which words naturally fall. To mark these
groups an accent is usually placed on the last word. This occurs whether
the group consist of two, three, or four words. In a group of four a weaker
accent is also placed on the second word. This subject is more fully discussed
thought is brought into a finished state, adapted for vocal utterance with
THE END.
APPENDIX I.
TIk- ancient sounds given by Chii-hi, in liis edition ul" thu Shi-kin^, oi
in his work \\l\ p|}j Vun-pu, a book rarely to be met Avith. He is the foun-
The author of Ji l|i (jj,?| JfJ"? from which Morrison formed his syllabic
wTOte on the sounds of the Shi-king, and the jioetry at the close of the Cheu
dynasty. He has given in the former, the old sound of 500 words. He htw
been influenced by his own dialect too much, but in many cases has been led
At the close of the Ming period, and the beginning of the present dynasty,
nourished Ku-yen-wu, who among the multif;wious subjects he studied, gave
cular words, and as to its general features. He also wrote hh nil iil ^*
(>f the Yih-kinf):, and the tables of the tonic dictionaries. See his 0fj y\l%
and tJP. ^ ^- fg- The finals m and p, now lost from mandarin, lie
sounds. His three works are Q i-f-T ^^ ^fy[ Critique on the science of
ment of seventeen classes, aud another of six. The latter is in fact that of
the final letters, whether vowels or consonants. He was the first to state
clearly the late origin of the -^ }^ or third tone-class. Others had erro-
neously believed that it was the fourth tone-class juh sheng, Avhich was want-
ing in the ancient pronunciation. He shewed that the phonetic part of a
duals, but to large groups of words having the same initial. 8ee p. p. 92,
of this grammar.
class (juh sheng) is modern, and the third tone-class old. This erroneous
view has very much vitiated his conclusions. In other respects he adheres
to the results of modern investigation, as in the statement he cites from Yen-
peh-shi, that "ancient and modem sounds difier, just as the dialects in mo-
dern times of two jjUiccs distant from eatli other."
ATPKNMX II.
269
A great viiriety of inforiuation, botli on the old languuge and on tlie luan-
ilaiin dialect, is collected in
^ i\ f -f |2. The author, who lived early
in this century, knew the Kiarig-nan dialect, as well as that of Pekiu--
When he writes on the ancient sounds he exercises a goud judgment anil
gives a fuller account of alphabets (formed with Chinese characters) than any
other author.
The above are the most noted writers on this subject in the present dynastv.
With regard to the i)arts of speech and syntax, I know of no recent work
which has advanced the knowledge of the Chinese on the nature of their
language, except that of Pih-hwa-tsun pM ^ )5J5 nX <-'f which 1 havt^
APPENDIX II.
This subject has been admirably treated by M. Bazin in his ''Siecle des
Vouen." It was in the Yuen dynasty, a.d. 1280 to I3G8, that the coUociuial
the precetling period, that of the Southern Sung, and the works of Chu-hi.
and the Shantung novel Shui-hu-chwen, are consequently the earliest exam-
ples of it, if the latter does not belong to the Yuen period. This date syn-
chronizes with that of the origiu of the modern mandarin pronunciation, as
At the same time, the dramas composed of songs and familiar diak»gue, be-
came popular. Previously the national poetry had been sung, but at this
epoch, it was displaceil by songs ^k'iih (c'h). This was theuatiual result
of the great change in the language that then reached its crisis. The close
connection between the origin of the dramas, and that of the mandarin pro-
darin sounds, published in tlie Yuen dynasfy, was used as tlie standard for
pronunciation in the collection of 100 jdays of the Yuen period, and in tlic
songs and dramas of North China generally. Yet these songs are not purely
colloquial, though much freer in construction than common poetry. Works
partly in dialogue, and partly consisting of songs are called'|?|L "^Clnven-
k'i, or *fl l|!)Tsah-kili. In tlie catalogue of reprints calledg^ ^ij ^§
Hwei-k'eli-shu-muh, several hundreds of these works are mentioned. They
are given mostly with the names of the authors. A writer may acknowledge
name is assumed. The novels are not included in this cat.alogue, nor an*
the lives of their authors found in books of biography. Both novels and
dramas are excluded from the imperial catalogue.
These works are regarded simply as books of amusement, and as not worthy
of the study of scholars. To the foreigner however, they are not only interes-
has created our own schools of dramatists and romancists, but as furnishing
an easy introdifction to the history, manners and language of the country.
In the work called Jj )|j^ Fung sheu, the early part of the Chen period,
B.C. 1100 is described. In ^'J p| ,^-, we have the last part of the same
dynasty. The Western and Eastern Han periods are illustrated in P^ ^Ir^
i^M #io' ^^ i% ^M iic- '^^^^ "^^* period, when the empire was divided
into two states north and south, is described in pj-J ^f(^ l^J )\}\ ^^. The
time of the Sui and T^ang dynasties, is illustrated in \)\:j j^ )\}\ ^§, and
the fall of the latter in ^^ j§". The history of Yoh-fei and the Shui-hu,
describe the state of the country during the Sung period. Tlie manners of
y>X i-^U' Tigr
the metropolis during the present dynasty are depicted in;^*!. T^- ^*Hung-
leu-mung and fiip -f^ t;^ J^j^ P'in-hwa-pau-kien.
boniitifiil ami touching story of tlie P*i-pa-ki neodSno arguments to win tin-
.suflfrnge of the rea»U*r in its favour, but it is interesting to know from th.-
They regard it as the second of its class, but since its rival Si-sian'>--ki is
says M. Bnzin, (Uticient in plot, a foreign judgment will j)crhap8 reverse the
native one.
In the Yuen dynasty, there were more than 200 dramatists, from whose
works the 100 plays above-mentioned are but a selection. Tiie generic name
lor writings of this class is \\S k'iuh (chii)."^' They originated in the Kin
dATiasty, immediately preceding that of the Mongols. Among works that
may be referred to on this subject, is ^\] f|t by y7 SS ^ a native uf
Kwci-ki (Shau-hing) in Cheh-kiang. Pie wrote in the reign Wan-lih of
the Ming period. He states that dramatic productions, called k'iuh wer<i
in the Yuen dynasty divided into two schools, the north and the south. For
the former, he states that the work of Cheu-teh t'sing ^ j^ ^ jj^ is
the standard in regard to pronunciation. For the Nan k'iuh, southern son<j-
dramas, the tlialect of the ^Vu country (Sucheu) is made use of It is thi?
tirst of these schools that belongs to mandarin literature. The Sucheu diama.s
have a different dialect, which may be seen exemplified in my Shanghai gram-
mar. The author here mentioned says, that among celebrated southern airs
near Sucheu. In the poetry of the Sung dynasty there was a kind, called
ri^" \^ Slii-ii, which aj)proached the character of the more recent species of
compositions, known as k'iuh, but in those productions the pronunciation
and general rules of versification were still the same as in regular poetry. In
the Kin dynasty (centuries XI and XII) the modern pronunciation iK-gau to
l>e adopted, and this change was completed in the Yuen period.
* y\. Bazii) ha.s fnllowctl Prem dre in omitting the lost word, a very important one, in tlie nanio
songs.
272 MANDARIN GRAMMAR.
The songs in these dramas, form tlien a pojiular poetry for nortliern Cliina,
in the old mandarin dialeet of tlie Mongolian dynasty. From the rules for
eonstrncting these songs, given by the .^ame author, I extract the following,
''The rhymes must agree with the arrangement of words according to tlicir
finals in Cheu-teh-t'sing's dictionary. The upper and lower "^ Jj^ p'ing
sh('n'^ are not allowed to rhyme together. Words in/\. ^i'^juh shcng. may
rhyme with those inn" ^M" P'"^o ^heng. Two sentences should not begin
with a character having the same sound. Four consecutive words should
never all have the same tone. Not more than two alliterative words should
-^juh sheng, should not be used
consecutively. Not more than two words whose finals rhyme together, should
with another sentence, having the same final. M must not rhyme with
H. Two words both ending in m are not allowed to stand together, but a
^ shang sheng,
and two in -^ 'f^ k'ii sheng, come together, the tones should alternate."
These rules of versification are much more simple than those of the regular
poetry of the T'ang and Sung dynasties. A good ear would be to the poet
a sufficient guide. The regular poetry still made by the literati at examina-
tions is the result of learned labour in the tonic dictionary, and rigid adherence
modern garb of the finer feelings of the heart, and is suited to be sung, ap-
Tlu! author of the above-mentioned work, states that tlie^fj^ IxQ 1*^'^^ k'iuli,
On the other hand, he says, in the south [Sucheu, etc.], the dialect of each
city has its provincialisms, so that many phrases used in one, would be
unintelligible in another. He lays it down as a rule of composition, that
a distance. Yet in many southern dramas the localisms of Sucheu and its
ti»>nal style, and that ut'tlie songs. The dialogue parts in the drania.s, and
many of the novels are in the free style of conversation ; but only sueh
arrangement and choice of words is admitted as is agreeable to the ear, and
in the case of plays, suited for elianting in the usual native manner. It is
these parts of the mandarin literature, which may be studied witli advantage
by the student of that dialect. The language in some of the older specinn>ns
A meeting of scholars.
-fV V\B
—^i
tah ying' 'liau shi', Zte re/>//ef? ?/es; J^ >q '
J\ ^
'^ J ^ '
5ll M-l ^ chih kien' yih .jcnyeu^na'liauyih'chan ,tong
(••huh .lai. they then saiv n man bring out another lanthorn) 71 y 7L jh
IH il ^1^
j^il T/c J jtsiang ,sien kwa' till na' 'chan ,teng hwan* 'liati.
lie took the lanthorn that teas ham/ing there hi fore, and exchanged it for thin
muh sieii' k'i' 't'i ,kau .liwa, as to. his ajtpeamnce, he had a clear fo'ehcod.
I'bl I'bl /J^ /ftt n^ S 5|i -^'i' " -^'i'" 'y^^ 'y^ ^'l' 1^^^'"' l*^- ff'^'rely and
rlrgnvtly hr rrnnrforioard; Mi X J^ |'|' j'i'j Hi 1llJ Zl A ^f
1^ _tl H'J ^ kion* .Wen t.seh Chung' .t'sing .Wang .siiin ,san .jen yih
t'si .ying shang* .t'sien .lai, to see Wcn-fsrh. Chnng-t^fing and lV<nig-siii/i.
jC'heiig ,1m ,t/a .^vei Tsinp:' .1 ,sic'n .slieng, tltcy addressed him as Jlr. Tsiutj-
i; MAM HA T !/iL ifl "<^' -J^'Ji '^^ ,^'^^^ •.)'" ^ien' 'Vnm li. (his
fjfenileman and the three friends havinr/ miitualhj paid, their compUinents
X fp]
?' 31 11^ r It'll ]\!\ yc^ir liiaiig-' 'Tsi u^ ts.-h liau ko' yili. _/.(<
approached Tsi-ii ivith hands joined respectfully ; "Jr Jl :iHl t|_* ^" )|iy
'Tsi ir' .lien .mang .hwan 'li. Ts'i-il instantly returned the compliment : ^
m gp m ajk mmmm. i4':t m; )^i ^ .wo„ uewtsn,
tui' 'Siau t'si- .liien shwoh tau', clie' wei^ sin' .Mei .ii jhiang, Wen-tseh then
j^
.^-
j^
.fe?/ ^
- HH^- :dt^
^¥^ T*si' .liien tan' ,kin jTh shili ,king sliili .wci wair liiiig', jf-sii-
/i/e« (Mr. Tsing-i) said, to-day I have become acquainted (,king following
ali'ih, metxwH your apjjearance, you ; it in an elegant ])hrase used in letter
'mien i)uh jkung, Tsi-il said, this evening toe are not infdl dress, it icouhl
jih jcliwcn .c'heng tsin' holi pa^, let tis another day loith all res2')ect call a-
f/«m (tsin lioli, an elegant expression for calling on any one) ; y^ ^i -^^
jBheng jtang ,kin .ming shi', T'st-hien said, you sir, a celebrated scholar of
thep)rescnt time; A^ lM> ^M Jr .S lib P"^^ .V^^p' '^^ '^^ ^^^^ '^^^h ought
not for a trifling reason to come here; v/L 3.1 A. {IL -T^ pE ^C.hwang
'chu .jen 'ye puli tsai' ,\i\ix, further the master of the house is not at home;
"JJC "^ h)\* lJ* ^f<. P'^ ^^^'<^ pt^i' .liau'i tsii' .fan, ?e^ws7Meaw?f7A<7cco;H'ersc
together; ^ ^J J^ J^^ )jlf| fp t'.sieh wuh ,kii 'i 'li tsieh, do not on any
account stand on ceremony ;
"j^ ^ pN 1=^ ISj ^^^ *?* "t*
'Tsi ii' chill teli .t'ling clioh 'tseu c'liuh .t'ing 'tsi; 2'sc-il could but go out
with him from the arbour.
Ari'KNDIX II. •27j
Di'rcim a/' Pan- it a/frr the ricnfh <>/ f/ir ohji-rt of his attadimcnl. ^ 3»-
lis J f'^ ^jv //^ ^I=r ^v! :?C I'dii-u on hinn'u'j if, auild not restrain
himself, but wei>t aloud ; fflj (\[ j^C ±^^ [1!^ if f^ M A, M,r,.
hinhseff on the bed, when suddenly before his eyes all became 2)iteh-dark:
})\\ y\\ \1a V PTI lie could not disfim/uish the direction vf aniithinn:
A^ I Jr. H 1 ^L T-L:.' I' !•'< lit iiid was alirrtd by restless thouf/hfs; JR
>iL Hk H'J ^J" f'i^ ^J.<^ $^ ^"' •"'"*
^"f"^'^ ^""^ '^'''^'^ appeared tn
lib P^'; PJ :/JC ItU /^'<- »««« replied, this is the way fo the (nine) fountains,
where resides the rider of Hades
;er>H ot' life is not completed, tohy
; (3> J^t
hove
:''|^-
^ j"J i^il ^. J-ti .v^wr
vegetables as icell as all animals; 5'k li^vcn. hsduI possessed by all animals:
its ofHeo is said to be chi kioh. perception.) J'L A ^y^ \\% M$ W ^A
V, }^4 ffi S) € ^L Ml) M5 >t ^ i!^ \A Sf5 mc .o./. ,/ ...
\chen thy collect, form the body; when they scjuirate tht y become vapour;
in life they collect; at death they are dispersed; }^ /\^ [uj ^- '^'J ^jl
i'k 1^1
^^
ii w^: you had better go quickly back; H i! JMS T 7\^ T
li|nj Pan-u on hearing this became lost in thought for a short time;
saiilj since yov. ttU me that the dead disperse info vajiour, how /v it thnf
hell, you
nit ffi 'if'L ffi '^'C if
say he exists, then he does exist; if you say there is none, then there is none :
it "M ili \i\ V^ ^ & ?B ^2. 'vy^ all this arisjsfrom groundless
notions current in the ivorld respecting life and death ; fjx. ^ VX 'r^T ilL
they are stories invented to terj-ify manlcind; iSJJ ii§. _£l 7C ):^C. Sy i'cL*'
^ ^^ p| 'fT yC ?'! '" '^'^"5 heforc their term of life is comjyhted, jnit
«7i end to themselves; ^X l'i| J3E JOi^ fP] ^nl ^ \l1\ or ivho are guilty of
fornication, and 'proneness to anger and violence; if ^ nX. J^L ^lli vA jA|
^> ^^ H/k c>" purpose to imprison the sonJs of such is this prison of hell
f'j)pointcd; ^^ ^^ ^^ (J^ "qT ^/i«f they may receive unlimited sufftring:
V)ATi^^- H'J i^^ ^ in retribution for the sins of their life; 1(P ^
^^ Ili /H ^ 5^ H 1^^ you seek Tai-it who has without reason piut
an end to herself; ]^ £_^ g^ y\^ J^ />J jj^ she has already returned
into vacant space, into the regions of oblivion ;
3^PI ::g* ^ -^ j[^ af]
ifyouivishto seek for her; Iff vf^* 'fil ^ § M % Hf M M
<nid will earnestly cultivate virtue, you will be s^ure some day to see her;
had finished what he had to say, took a stone from his sleeve ;
|nj ^l ^H
^fr H J5I' 7^ "^^'l ^^'^'<'^<^ ^f «^ Pau-u's breast: ^ IE. sS J "© 5p"
ter hearing these words, and being sfrucJc on the heart by the stone, felt al-
armed and wished to return homt; J^' '\'lc ^3S J '^ l^M ^'^ only regret-
fr-d that he had jnissed the path ; IE 4 Iti It^ ^ M Ifcj ]£; ^' A
^X 1ui if^'hile he teas hesitating, he suddenly heard some one on one side
.m-1'i:m»i\ II. o
-/ /
.„//,•,,.,/„„,; iiii
m i^ m 7x 'A >;i] a jf. ^ ii-- u ^n t^
T li J - ^ u'Jmi III tuiuid his hroil nniiii/ (i, InnJ:, it icu.s nom uthvr than
hix uiittlur and othvrs of tin'fuiiillij; \\\'\ ^^/^ ^ \ >i \\\ ^ wlio stoo,f
rotiiid him wvvpitnj iuul vaUiiiij ; pj (_', "(/) fe 5l'''l xE }\l .h /"' «'«%•
'
^^^ ljy\
J^J J^ ^— '
JQ
7\, ^' (ipj>li/iii</ his viind to think, he sow that it was in real if ij onJij <i
tional. It is indeed ditKeuU to select })assuges, which are entirely free fVoi,i
expressions of the kind called iven-/i. There is however much ni«»re of this
higher colloquial in the Sau-kwoh-chi and similar works, which constitute the
by the late R. Thorn, Esq. in his Chinese speaker. The dialogues are <'-ood.
but the pronunciation of the metropolis was not ])ro]terly understood by th^
author, nor by his translator. The vocabulary, which has not been translated,
contains useful lists of common words, but the author's attempt to teach th'-
[Bp ~J" k'iiih tsT, which are often j)urelv colloquial or nearly so.
T>
't.^a
W US $JJ
'tsu ,tsung ,t'sien.
-'IJ "H in M'Mv»h 'Muns.c-lmu'.l-inijnu',.,!,,,,^-
-f
M L L_a [i \\i< W: hJ y'ls ^^^ng' d'^ jpft >" 'yen .wu ;veu kien'.
:^i ''ill "iij JUL iM fib %^ W, ^'"1' t'i A'\ hiueh lei'- .k'ung .ju sien-.
Little thoufjht I that the court would he angry, and remove the yrave «/
viy ancestors; and that all my family, loth sons and duuyhters icould vurt
278 MAXDAHIN GIIAMMAI?.
cannot see. T weep, and hhodt/ tears faU Ukc sleet, till their source is dry.
^G M 7L ^C
n-i' Blil 1
1*X ye' slmi- ,tsiang .laii .c'Ik'H ,kwiin^' ii sail'.
G i% Wt i§ f ^ ^' i J" i^4'- 'V^ jChu .lien 'kiueu ,i pir ,tan .c'l.i.
m^
^^
Mt
m 4& ^ Vi
?^'J
/r> ;^?i
ijli ,-^ li^"' •^'»'^' 5^^'" 'i^'o "o'"^'-
I will draiv aside the bamboo curtains, and icnJh out on the red jtavemcnt.
I win put this table in its place. (P-i p^a ki) {^ ^l,
—i ' fl|t ) jt ©
S 'wL i£ >iV mi n* Jnlifii n yih k-ir .^^•ll ,siau .si .slnvang ,t-sin 'lau
Our boy since he left its, we have heard nufhing of. 11 c hi.s(w<> parents,
l)y the requirements of the music to which they are sung. In the histexam-
APPENDIX III.
On Southern Mandarin.
this title. When it is said by some native writers, that the northern pro-
nunciation is in use at Nanking, it is meant that the dialect of that city has
an equal claim with that of the northern i)rovinces to the title of mandarin.
that of Nanking, hut the initial consonants are many of them less pure. In
Arn:Mii\ m. 27[>
the soutliein inaiulaiiu a common auxiliiirv vi'ib f'or^ give is-j[__^ 'jia lur f jj
kill (kfi). F«»r ytw, it is so, ^""cho is common, as occasionally in the iiortli.
This is the same w«>nl as ti<>h in the Changcheu dialect in Fnhkicn, hut
ditferently pronounced. Many men from Kiangnan reside in Peking, especially
of the class of scholars. They retain many peculiarities of the soul!. mi
cases the tones of Peking are sometimes used in conjunction with tin- initials
SFtHTONfLL
lAy fl ft UMiff
U. C. BCRKCLCY
SENT ON ILL
OCT 1 6 2002
U. C. BERKELEY
JUN 2 5 ;^nn-^
BDD077T171
m
i»
^.
%jj